The Best of the Faithist Journal - Robert Bayer - Editor

The Best of the Faithist JournalEditor in Chief: Kasandra Kares

Compiled by Robert BayerEdited by Michael McDavies

2008 INCLUDEPICTURE

"http://archives.nmsu.edu/exhibits/shalam2/children2.jpg" \*

MERGEFORMATINET

Faithist Otis Acres colony effort, established in Arizona in the 1950s.

of 305

ContentsThe Best of the Faithist Journal..............................................................1

The Faithist Journal 1965.........................................................................12

MEDITATION from the Eloists...................................................................12

The Faithist Journal 1969..............................................................13

Volume 8 – Number 1...................................................................................13

Henry David Thoreau (1817-1862)...............................................13

Polarity..........................................................................................................13

By Walter DeVoe...........................................................................13

Letter.............................................................................................................14

A REMNANT FOR AMERICA...................................................................23

By Griscom Morgan (Ohio)............................................................23

Conclusion....................................................................................25

The Faithist Journal V1-2 N10..................................................................26

MEDITATION..............................................................................................26

by Al Holmes.................................................................................26


IN THE HOUR BEFORE DAWN................................................................27

A FAITHIST PRAYER.................................................................................29

from The Eloists............................................................................29

FAITHIST GROUPS AND COMMUNES (circa 1974)..............................30

report by Arnold Arias...................................................................30

I AM MUSIC................................................................................................34

by Allan C. Inman..........................................................................34

THE VOICE.................................................................................................35

by Gisella Faldowski......................................................................35

THE INSPIRATION OF THE WORLD AND THE GLORY OF THE

MORNING STAR........................................................................................35

by D. G. Pickard............................................................................35



STRANGER ON THE SHORE....................................................................46

by D. G. Pickard............................................................................46

of 305

ANGELIC PRECEPTORY - ZARATHUSTRIAN MAS.............................48

Given in trance by C. Morley (Reprinted from Nov. 1972 Kosmon

Unity)............................................................................................48

THE FUNCTION OF TAE...........................................................................51

by Joan Harmon............................................................................51

THE MATCHLESS VOICE OF E-O-IH......................................................53

By D. G. Pickard............................................................................53


I SHALL GO FORTH IN THY NAME........................................................59

by Rick Cafero...............................................................................59

The Rose.......................................................................................................59

By D. G. Pickard............................................................................59

Message........................................................................................................62

MESSAGE FROM ABOVE.........................................................................62

Channeled through Agnes Castle..................................................62

THE HERMETIC CLEF..............................................................................63

By Jim Dennon..............................................................................63

A JAPANESE NEWBROUGH?...................................................................66

Pete. Barnes..................................................................................66

PRAYER TO EOIH......................................................................................67

By RICK CAFERO...........................................................................67

OAHSPE’S KOSMON AND COMMUNISM.............................................69

John F. Lindh..................................................................................69

INVOCATION..............................................................................................70

THE CREATOR and ourselves.....................................................................70

Seeing the Aura.............................................................................................71


Soul Development........................................................................................74

By Walter Devoe...........................................................................74


LET THERE BE LIGHT..............................................................................77

by Ann Wigmore D.D.....................................................................77


of 305

The Reality Way:..........................................................................................79

PUTTING IT ALL TOGETHER WITH THE REALITY WAY.....................79


The Green Fruit.............................................................................................89

The Kingdom Within....................................................................................92

MEDITATION BY THE ELOISTS..............................................................94

WORLD PEACE..........................................................................................95

RELIGIOUS FANATICISM THE MARK OF A FALSE RELIGION........97

By Don Pickard..............................................................................97

Notes...........................................................................................................101

PRAYER FOR MORAL STRENGTH.......................................................102

given to Belle B. Sundgren 1978.................................................102

Use Your Will Wisely.................................................................................103

by Dr. Ron Anjard........................................................................103

SKY WRITING: A GAME FOR CHILDREN...........................................104

By Lovie Gasteiner......................................................................104

THE LABEL WAS MISSING....................................................................105

by Julie Watts..............................................................................105

THE LOVING CREATOR.........................................................................106

by John Harden...........................................................................106

ALONE.......................................................................................................107

By Richard E. Byrd......................................................................107

The Faithist Journal 1981.......................................................................108

ONE LIFE...................................................................................................108

By Alfred Holmes........................................................................108

OUR ONENESS WITH OUR CREATOR.................................................111

by Julie Watts..............................................................................111

A FULLY MATERIALIZED SPIRIT SPEAKS TO HER DAUGHTER...112

WHAT IS REALITY?.................................................................................113

by Alfred Holmes........................................................................113

MEDITATION............................................................................................114

by Alfred Holmes........................................................................114

MEDITATION............................................................................................115

of 305

by Al Holmes...............................................................................115

THE TRUTH ABOUT OBSESSION.........................................................117

by Josephine Possi......................................................................117

THE POWER OF LOVE............................................................................122

by Eva Bell Werber......................................................................122

VOICE OF THE GREAT SPIRIT..............................................................123

(Adapted and edited from the Dead Sea Scrolls by Rick Cafero) 123

THE VOICES OF SPIRIT FRIENDS SPEAK THUS...............................125

by Don Pickard............................................................................125

By Steve Conniff.........................................................................127


MEDITATION............................................................................................128

by Alfred Holmes........................................................................128

HOPI DECLARATION OF PEACE..........................................................129

THE PATH OF LIGHT...............................................................................130

MEDITATION............................................................................................132

By Al Holmes...............................................................................132

MEDITATION............................................................................................133

by Alfred Holmes........................................................................133


I AM NEVER ALONE...............................................................................134

By Harold Sherman.....................................................................134

MEDITATION............................................................................................135

By Alfred Holmes........................................................................135

MEDITATIONS..........................................................................................135

by Alfred Holmes........................................................................135

KOSMON NEWSLETTER........................................................................136

Dear Friends:..............................................................................136

THOUGHTS ABOUT LOVE.....................................................................139

by Alfred Holmes........................................................................139

YOU HAVE WHAT IT TAKES.................................................................140

by Mary L. Kupferle.....................................................................140


of 305

Eloist Meditation........................................................................................142

THOUGHTS ABOUT LOVE.....................................................................143

From The Eloists..........................................................................143

THE INSPIRATION OF ANGELS............................................................145

by Don Pickard............................................................................145


AN ACT OF WORSHIP.............................................................................153

by Don Pickard............................................................................153

Prayers........................................................................................154

Hymn..........................................................................................154

Meditative Silence......................................................................154

Reading from Oahspe.................................................................155

Fraternal Greetings:....................................................................................156

LAND OF SHALAM.................................................................................157

by Marjorie White........................................................................157

MEDITATION............................................................................................162

by Alfred Holmes........................................................................162

MEDITATION............................................................................................162

MEDITATIONS..........................................................................................163

by Alfred Holmes........................................................................163

MEDITATION............................................................................................164

MEDITATION............................................................................................164

MEDITATION............................................................................................165

MEDITATION............................................................................................166

By Alfred Holmes........................................................................166

TOWARD SOLVING THE PROBLEMS IN OUR LIVES.......................167

JEHOVIH THE CREATOR........................................................................169

Veronica Halley...........................................................................169

MEDITATION............................................................................................169

MEDITATION............................................................................................171

MEDITATION............................................................................................171

THOUGHT.................................................................................................172

SLEEP.........................................................................................................175

of 305

AN ARGUMENT IN FAVOR OF SOUL-MATES....................................175

MEDITATION............................................................................................176

MEDITATIONS by The Eloists..................................................................177

Praise...........................................................................................................178

Prayer..........................................................................................................178

Prayer..........................................................................................................179

PRAYER FOR THE DIVINE LINK, FOR THE UPLIFTING

ENFOLDMENT OF ALL...........................................................................181

VOICES FROM THE SPIRIT WORLD....................................................183

DON PICKARD.............................................................................183


MEDITATION............................................................................................186


PROPHECY...............................................................................................187

by Fred Almquist.........................................................................187

PRAYERS IN CONCERT..........................................................................191

Meditations from the Eloists.......................................................................193

By Thomas Paine........................................................................193

INFANTRY.................................................................................................194


EDITORIAL...............................................................................................198

THE GROWTH OF LOVE........................................................................201

by A. Crane.................................................................................201

ADAPTATIONS FROM MARCUS AURELIUS......................................205

by Alfred Holmes........................................................................205

EDITORIAL...............................................................................................206

EXPLANATION OF TERMS....................................................................208

Patricia, Shirley and Elizabeth Kemp...........................................208

JEHOVIH: NO TWO LEAVES, NO TWO FRUITS, NO TWO FEATHERS,

HAS HE CREATED IDENTICAL; EACH IS LIKE ITS BROTHER; YET

EACH IS AN INDIVIDUAL WORK OF GITCHEE MANITOU’S ART.209


ONE MARRIAGE?....................................................................................210

of 305

by Belle Brand Sundgren............................................................210

FAITHIST FRIENDS’ PRINCIPLES.........................................................211

related by Lloyd Kinder...............................................................211

MEDITATION............................................................................................213

by Alfred Holmes........................................................................213

MEDITATION............................................................................................214

MEDITATIONS..........................................................................................215

by Alfred Holmes........................................................................215

MEDITATION FROM THE ELOISTS......................................................215



THE HEAVENS BETWEEN THE WINDS...............................................217

by Agnes Castle (A pre-publication review)................................217

WILL YOU BECOME A MESSENGER FOR THE LIGHT?...................217

by Gus Cahill...............................................................................217


WHO IS THE CREATOR?.........................................................................220

By Joan Kares..............................................................................220

ADVICE FOR THE READER OF OAHSPE............................................221

By Wing Anderson, Essenes of Kosmon......................................221

THE UNIVERSE........................................................................................225

HAPPINESS MEDITATION......................................................................226

Alfred Homes..............................................................................226

MEDITATION............................................................................................227

from the Eloists...........................................................................227


MEDITATION............................................................................................228

From Eloists................................................................................228

“TO COMFORT THE BEREAVED”.........................................................229

by Medium D. S. Pickard November 1982...................................229

MEDITATION............................................................................................232

from the Eloists...........................................................................232

MEDITATION............................................................................................233

of 305

by the Eloists..............................................................................233


The Zend Avesta of Zarathustra..................................................................234

EDITORIAL...............................................................................................234

HOW TO LIVE...........................................................................................236

By Julie Waits..............................................................................236

The Eloists -- The Kosmon Journal 1996................................................237

AN APPEAL TO ALL SOULS...................................................................237

The Eloists -- The Kosmon Journal 1998................................................238

FROM THE ELOISTS...............................................................................238


SPIRIT AND MATTER..............................................................................239

Anonymous.................................................................................239

LET US SHARE OUR THOUGHTS WITH YOU....................................240

Medium: Donald Pickard - England March, 1982.........................240

LIFE WITH THE SPIRITS........................................................................244

Kasandra Kares...........................................................................244

Spirit Obsession in Everyday Life..............................................................245

Kasandra Kares...........................................................................245


YOU ASKED ABOUT THE INVISIBLE WORLD..................................247

Eugene Maurey...........................................................................247

FROM THE ELOISTS...............................................................................250

MEDITATION............................................................................................251

FROM THE ELOISTS.....................................................................251


CHANNELS OF LIGHT............................................................................252

Vernon Wobschall........................................................................252

FROM THE ELOISTS...............................................................................253

FROM THE ELOISTS...............................................................................254


CHURCH TRANCE ADDRESS................................................................255

By Brother George Morley...........................................................255

of 305

OAHSPE FELLOWSHIP KOSMON - Midsummer Festival (Summer

Solstice)......................................................................................................255


We Believe..................................................................................................259

The Eloists..................................................................................259

BLAMELESS.............................................................................................260

Rick Cafaro.................................................................................260


FROM THE ELOISTS...............................................................................262

The Spiritual Dress.................................................................................263

14 October 2003.........................................................................................263

Ken Mills......................................................................................263

THE TREE OF LIFE................................................................................264

OPEN LETTERS PROM READERS......................................................268

Kosmon Pioneer Bulletin 1954...................................................................270

From: Ken Mills.......................................................................................271

Date: 03/18/04 21:01:28...................................................................271

Subject: in my sight.................................................................................274

As a Ray of light......................................................................................275

THE DANGEROUS ROAD.....................................................................277

by Eugene Maurey......................................................................277

SYMBOLS..............................................................................................280

by Joan Greer..............................................................................................280

SYMBOLS..............................................................................................282

by Joan Greer..............................................................................................282

WHAT IS A FAITHIST?...........................................................................284

CHILDREN AND THE WAY OF PEACE.................................................287

by Peace Pilgrim.........................................................................................287

THE ORIGINAL OAHSPE MANUSCRIPT LOCATED — SAFE!............288

THE BIRTH OF JEHOVIH’S KINGDOM ON THE EARTH......................290

by Jahazerah, Son of Jehovih.......................................................290

Faithist Lodge.........................................................................................292

The Faithist Brotherhood of Light: The Beginning....................................292

of 305

From Joan Greer..........................................................................292

Positioning the Plates in Oahspe ……………………………………….… 294

by Robert Bayer………………………………………………… 294

Editorial – 2008 — Kasandra Kares........................................................301

of 305

The Faithist Journal 1965

MEDITATION from the Eloists

We need to get into a state of attunement with our Creator. We need to bring

the power of our minds to a focus with Him. We know that we can generate a force

of faith that His angel workers can use to benefit all mankind. We can do it by

affirming His Presence and Power, and creating thoughts of peace and goodwill.

The words, "peace and goodwill," are very familiar to the people of the world,

especially to Christians. The majority of the world's people pray for peace and

goodwill. Now, more people are beginning to work for peace and goodwill. It is

becoming the spirit of the times. World leaders who are militant and aggressive

will go down in defeat. There is much struggle yet to cone; but light, peace and

love are on the march. An irresistible voice is speaking in the soul of humanity.

The Almighty Creator of all is moving mankind to be in attunement with Him by

expressing peace, love and compassion. It doesn't matter how or who people

worship, or what church they attend. When they are praying and working for peace

and goodwill on earth, they are one in purpose and attunement with the Almighty.

of 305


Volume 8 – Number 1

Henry David Thoreau (1817-1862)

“I see, smell, taste, hear, feel, that everlasting something to which we are

allied, at once our maker, our abode, our destiny, our very selves, the one historic

truth, the most remarkable fact which can become the distinct and uninvited subject

of our thought, the actual glory of the universe; the only fact which a human being

cannot avoid recognizing, or in some way forget or dispense with.

Polarity

By Walter DeVoe

Polarity is the basic principle of life as well as of all electrical phenomena

and inventions. The Chinese based all their philosophy upon the Yin and Yang, or

mother-father, principle of positive and negative. Swedenborg said that the Creator

ever seeks to ultimate Himself into objective creation. Electrical science says:

Power flows from a higher to a lower potential. The positive vivifies and directs the

negative.

In the vast Whole, the Cosmos, consciousness and purpose are positive.

Responsiveness or creativeness is negative. Consciousness is Father, or the purpose

to create. Responsiveness is Mother, or the Creativeness that builds or fulfils the

purpose or will of the Father. Thus infinity, or boundless space, is responsive

creativeness which ever responds to the Internal Father’s Will to beget immortal

sons and daughters who shall objectify His Eternal Being and Purpose throughout

infinite creativeness.

The Mother Creatrix ever remains responsive to the Father’s Purposefulness

as expressed by their sons and daughters, ever creating and fulfilling every purpose

of every being, without partiality, discrimination or condemnation.

of 305

Letter

Dear Dorothy (an editor of The Faithist Journal),

I wish to thank you so much for the July- August issue of the Faithist Journal.

It appears to me to be MORE than mere coincidence that you had “one” issue left

to send to someone and that someone turned out to be mc! I must hasten to tell you

why I believe this.

In flipping through the pages of the Journal to quickly acquaint myself with

its writers I was absolutely stunned when I saw Craig’s drawing of the “4 Corners”

Area Jehovih’s Signature on Fourth Guatama. I was even more dizzy when I read

his article and Learned how he came to hi: conclusions, by following verses from

Oahspe.

You see, I too, and a friend: named Dorothy Nayhugh, had found this great

Cross, not from the verses of Oahspe Craig used, but by going around the mulberry

bush, so to speak from another verse in this same great book...Chapter XXVII, First

Book of God, verse 4:

Search thou for the evidence of my footsteps on the earth; find the people

who stand by the Creator, the All One, God of All! Who can shake their faith, or

feed them with thy story of a Savior born of woman?”

Also Verse 9, same chapter:

“Thou hast triad on all my people, to convert them, but hast failed utterly.

Behold, I come now with a new book; an they will accept it from my hand.

I decided then, back in 1965, that if, as he said they would accept it from his

hand I must find out if they would. I wrote to Thomas Banyacya of Oraibi, Arizona

and here is a quote from his letter to me:

Yes, we too have heard of Oahspe and, in fact, have a copy of the book.

There are a great many writings in this book that are similar to Hopi ancient

teachings and instructions. But Hopi not only have this knowledge but try to

practice it in daily life. Hopi means peace, live peace and work for peace knowing

that the pattern of life was laid down by the Great Spirit for this land called

of 305

America by the white man. It is the land of the Great Spirit which was placed in the

hands of the Hopi traditional leaders, to hold it in trust for Him until the

Purification Day.

I feet this is very important for all America especially for the United States as

we are fast approaching the end time given to the Hopi by the Great Spirit. All

people of Peace must stand together against evil forces which are about to destroy

mankind with this terrible weapon which has been invented. The Hopi call it the

Gourd of Ashes. Hopi prophecy foretold of great trouble in this land and may even

break out in civil war right in this land. (signed) Thomas Banyacya

After proving to myself that the Hopi Indian had virtually the same ancient

instructions, and today have the Oahspe, I was further led to search the library

shelves and Frank Waters’ book (BOOK OF THE HOPI with Drawings and source

material recorded by Oswald White Bear Fredericks). I found this book most

inspiring and conclusive to me that I had indeed found and contacted the remnants

of Jehovih’s Chosen People.

Quoting from the BOOK OF THE HOPI by Frank Waters:

And now before Masaw turned his face from them and became invisible, he

explained that every clan must make four directional migrations before they all

arrived at their common, permanent home. They must go to the ends of the land ―

west, south, east, and north ― to the farthest paso (where the land meets the sea) in

each direction. Only when the clans had completed those four movements, rounds,

or stops of their migration, could they come together again, forming the pattern of

the Creator’s universal plan.

That is the way it was. Some clans started to the south, others to the north,

retraced their routes to turn east and west, and then back again. All their routes

formed a great cross whose center Tuwanasavi (Center of he Universe), lay in what

is now Hopi country in the south-western part of the United States, and whose arms

reached to the four directional Pasos. As they turned at each of these extremities,

they formed of this great cross a swastika, either clockwise or counter-clockwise,

corresponding to the movement of the earth or of the sun. And then when their

migrations slowed as they reached their permanent home, they formed spirals and

of 305

circles, ever growing smaller. All these patterns formed by their four migrations are

the basic motifs of the symbols still found today in their pottery and basketware, on

their “Kachina” rattles and altar boards.

Often one clan would come upon the ruins of a village built by a preceding

clan and find on the ground broken pieces of pottery circling to the right or to the

left, indicating which way the clan had gone. Throughout the continent, those

countless ruins and mounds covered with broken pottery are still being discovered.

They constitute what the people call now their title to the land. Everywhere, too,

the clans carved on rocks their signatures, pictographs and petroglyphs which

identified them, revealed what round of their migration they were on, and related

the history of the village.

Still the migrations continued. Some clans forgot in time the commands of

Masaw, settling in tropical climates where life was easy, and developing beautiful

cities of stone that were to decay and crumble into ruin. Other clans did not

complete all four of their migrations before settling in their permanent hone, and

hence lost their religious power and standing. Still others persisted, keeping open

the doors on top of their heads (crown chakra). These were the ones who finally

realized the purpose and the meaning of their four migrations.

For these migrations were themselves purification ceremonies, weeding out

through generations all the latent evil brought from the previous Third World

(Whaga, or Pan). Man could not succumb to the comfort and luxury given hit by

indulgent surroundings, for then he lost the need to rely upon the Creator. Nor

should he be frightened even by the polar extremities of the earth, for there he

learned that the power given him by the Creator would still sustain him. So, by

traveling to all the farthest extremities of the land during their four migrations,

these chosen people finally came to settle on the vast arid plateau that stretches

between the Colorado and Rio Grande Rivers.

More quotes:

Although the basic moaning of the Hopi creation myth and symbol which

expresses it is subjective, we cannot ignore the literal interpretation ― that the

Hopis came to America from the west, crossing the sea on boats or rafts from one

of 305

“stepping stone” island to the next, a similar interpretation can be made of the myth

of the ancient Quiche Maya, which relates that the waters parted and the tribes

crossed on stepping stones placed in a row over the sand ― “Stones in a row, Sand

under the Sea” (Popul Vuh: The Sacred Book of the Ancient Quiche Maya, (1950).

The Hopis with this sacred tradition knock in the head the popular

anthropological belief that the Hopi sipapuni or place of emergence, was the Grand

Canyon, ninety miles west of Oreibi. The Hopis simply use the Colorado River as a

symbol for the water to the west, and the precipitous wall of the Grand Canyon to

symbolize the mountainous wall extending throughout the Fourth World of

America.

The tradition also refutes the popular theory that the Hopis, like all Indians,

emigrated from Asia to America by way of the Bering Strait land bridge. Yet it

gives no clue to the many rational questions long asked. From what ancient race of

world mankind did the Hopis spring? What and where was the now submerged

Third World of the Hopis? When did they emigrate to America?

Since the time of Plato there has persisted a belief in the antediluvian

existence of such continents during past geologic periods. Certainly the land

masses on this planet have not always held the same shape and location. Data

obtained during the International Geophysical Year tend to prove that other

continents did exist. Scientific credence is now given to the theory proposed by

Alfred Wegener, a German geologist, that our present continents have broken away

from greater land masses and are slowly drifting to ever-new positions on the face

of the earth. Their movements are caused by convection currents set in notion by

radio-activity in the center of the earth, making the earth a great gyroscope forever

spinning at a fixed angle. This is a modern restatement of the Hopi view in which

Poqanghoya and Palongawhoya personalize opposite polarities of the great

magnetic circuit which keeps the earth rotating and the land masses of its upper

crust shifting. We now know that, with continental drifts, there are different

directions at different times for north, magnetic north having once been in the

middle of the Pacific and then in the Southwest of the United States. The Hopi

creation myth parallels this finding in its assertion that the polar center of the earth

shifted from the now vanished Third World to the Hopi homeland on this present

of 305

Fourth World.

In Oahspe, we find in the Book of Cosmogony and Prophecy, chapter 1,

verses 11-14, a verification of these polar shiftings:

… “in the early tines, the earth was longer north and south than east and

west. But the m’vortexya, being less than the vortoxya, the earth assumed the

globular form, which was afterward attenuated east and west, then it again turned,

to adapt itself to the polarity north and south.

In these various turnings of the earth, the same force of the vortex exerted

ever to the east and west. By which behavior every portion of the earth hath been to

the east, to the west, to the north and to the south, which is proven in the rocks, and

boulders, and mountains of the earth.

Wherefore it is shown there is no north and south polar power in the earth as

such, Furthermore the iron mountains show they attract east and west and north and

south, without any regard to a central polar force in the earth.

Wherein mortals have been taught erroneously in regard to two powers which

do not exist as they have been heretofore set forth; These are the attraction of

gravitation in the earth, and a north pole magnetism in the earth.

The positive force of the vortex is therefore, from the external toward the

internal and the negative force of the vortex is toward the poles, and the toward the

pole external from the sun centre.

Wherefore it may be said the force of the vortex is toward its own centre, but

turneth at the centre and escapeth outward at the north pole,

Now, Dorothy, you may surmise by this time I’m building up to something,

so stay with me!

Having searched for the evidence of the Father’s footsteps on earth and

satisfied myself I found them, the Book of the Hopi with its first revelation of the

Hopis’ historical and religious world-view of life, interpreting the hitherto

unknown meanings and functions of their year-long ceremonial cycle is simply

crammed with additives to supplement and parallel Oahspe:

of 305

The Lord said: From these, my seed, will I people the earth over in all the

divisions thereof. And that after generations, for thousands of years, may know the

work of my hand; behold I give them a sign, which is my covenant to them and

their heirs forever; which is my crescent, in the form of a rainbow; and whatsoever

people bear this, my sign, shall be as a remembrance to me of my covenant. Nor

shall they be destroyed from the inheritance which I have given unto them. (The

Lords’ First Book, chapter 1, verses 49-50)

Verses 61 through 72 of the same chapter also offer conclusive evidence to

me these are remnants of the descendents of Pan.

Now when I discovered this great Cross, Thwanasavi (Center of the

Universe) laying in what is now the Hopi country in southwestern part of the

United States having been formed by the migrations, this magnetic or spiritual

center formed by the junction of the North-South and East-West axes along which

the Twin Forces (Poquanghoya and Palongawhoya) sent their vibratory messages

and controlled the rotation of the planet, I wondered like Craig, a great big WHY?

Why did Jehovih’s Angels have these people walk this continents back and forth,

to and fro for thousands of years? What significant purpose were they

accomplishing for Jehovih by so doing? Why was it so desperately important for

this small handful of people to hold sacred one small area of this earth? Hopi

prophecy always speaks of “purification day”. So I began to contemplate the

deeper meaning of all this.

We are in the arc of Kosmon. But how far? Just the fringe edges so to speak.

Looking back upon other arcs as given in Oahspe, we read (Book of Cpenta-Armij,

chapter xiii. verses 2-6):

And there rose over the earth and her heavens, farther than Chinvat, a trident

arc, broad as a world, of shimmering light., the countless rays of ethe, as mortals

see the glimmering air in a summer’s day; hut the ethe was of every color, hue and

tint, reflective and brilliant, the clear soul of things separate, the very breath of

Jehovih. It was the beginning of the form of the arc of Spe-ta, the deliverance of

the earth and her heavens into a new condition

Meanwhile, their high-raised companion, Cpenta-armij, known and loved in

of 305

hundreds of etherean worlds, was down on the low earth, laying the corner-stone

for Jehovih’s everlasting kingdom, whereon should fall, presently, from out the arc

of Spe-ta, a shaft of fire, the feast for the purified Chieftainess, who had for four

years subsisted on the coarse provender of the lower heavens! And, touched by the

hand of Immortal Light, was Brahma, long trained to look toward Jehovih; for his

angel wife rose upward, leading his vision toward a realm amongst the Gods and

Goddesses, whom he beheld in countless numbers receiving her most royally. Thus

gazing on the glorious scene, the great man in soul came forth, leaving his

corporeal part stretched on the ground. And Cpenta-armij and God took him;

received the soul of Brahma, and held, in obedience to the sacred purpose, his place

in the sacred circle with mortals three days. Then, on the fourth, the Chieftainess

signaled her swift messengers; and they touched the currents along, till they ran

high beyond the earth’s vortex, where the stationed Gods of etherea fastened on the

ethe’ic wave, extending to the great arc over all.

It was the signal for the shaft of light; of which mortals have a weak and

coarse symbol in the electric currents which tear things unmeaningly and without

judgment; but the ethe’ic current is not so small and purposeless, but mighty, and a

tool from Jehovih’s fountain of All Power, with skill, and learnedly directed by

such high-raised angels as have had millions of years of experience, who know

well what prayers deserve an answer from the Immortal spheres.

From this description, we can readily see an arc is made up of the Mighty

Power of Cosmic Electricity! It comes through the vortex and strikes the earth at a

given point, directed by Jehovih’s High Raised angels. I believe the Great Cross of

Tuwanasavi over i-iopi country is the sacred entrance point where the Arc of

Kosmon will occur. Turn this great Swastica of theirs over Hopi country, set it

spinning and you have the secret form of the Universe in operation!

David V. Vitlasenor in his book Tapestries In Sand (The Spirit of Indian

Sand Painting) says:

One of the most ancient of symbols, the Swastika, can be found through out

all the great cultures of the earth.” To the American Indian it has special

significance and will always be found rotating clockwise, from ease to west, in the

of 305

natural orderly movement of the earth. It may be interesting to observe that the late

Nazi regime spun this powerful symbol counterclockwise by tipping it on its side,

thus creating a complete antithesis of all that is natural, and substituting order with

chaos.

From the great center of life, four bars (elements) reach out to the four

cardinal points of the compass, where we find Father Sky and Mother Earth sitting

at the extreme horizon. Man and Woman (symbolically) have equal power of

creation ― the positive and negative polarity which, when brought together in

balance, brings forth new life, light and evolution.

The center of the swastika is the symbol of the Great Spirit, the Great

Mystery, out of which all things emanate.

Oahspe: Book of Cpenta-Armij; Chapter II, verse 15 says: “Thus spake

Cpenta-Armij, her voice mellow and sweet, but so tuned to the spheres it could be

heard the breadth of a world. And Jehovih, with whose power and will she had And

Jehovih, with whose power and will she had learned to be as one, by long

experience and studying submission to His will, lent a willing ear and strong hand.

Out shot the flames, the buoyant force manufactured by less skilled workmen

learning the trade of Gods, where whirled the million screws of fire, propelling, till

the mighty ship reeled, and turned, and rose from its foundation, with all its joyous

hosts aboard, shouting loud, and singing praise to Him who ruleth over all. Then

turning round and round, slowly, spiral like, the great secret form and force of

vortices now first revealed to man, to show the plan of worlds, and how holden in

their places and moved in universal harmony and endless creation, the great

airavagna began her course in the roadway of Salkwatka, in etherea, shooting

toward the red star, the young earth.

What a tremendous service these Hopi people, descendents of Jehovih’s

chosen, have done for humanity! What a gigantic accomplishment has been theirs,

this degraded, humiliated race have sacrificed personal dignity in the face of man to

stand tall in the spirit of the All Mighty, against all civil thrown at them without

mercy by dark forces, to hold till this end time the balance of universal forces for

you and me, for America, the continent of Guatama, and the world of this planet!

of 305

Can you see what I see, Dorothy? Can you see here enacted on the stage of

the Fourth World the plan of the Sons of Jehovih? The necessity to hold this center

of land sacred by the power of prayer, to keep its vibrations in attunement with the

Magnetic Forces of the heavens directly overhead was vital to the LIFE of this

planet! Why? Because through this Magnetic curtain we receive the charged power

of the INFINITE LIGHT of the Father. Because THROUGH IT will come the

GREATER LIGHT OF THE ARC OF KOSMON!!

Seven times greater will be the light of our present sun! Seven times brighter

than it now is! When that time comes, when our sun increases its energy, multiplies

its energy seven times by coming into balance with INFINITE LIGHT, by coming

to the center of the arc of Kosmon, the counterclockwise vortice motion of the third

density (which is negative) will come into an overlap of the 4th density which is in

a clockwise rotation, and is of a positive polarity. At Kosmon or Cosmic High

Noon there will be an illumination of minds because the vibratory frequency will

be increased, we will be QUICKENED in our Mortal Bodies, through this process

of accelerated time. The TIME Barrier will lay down. Time is eternity slowed

down in vibration. Our vibrations will be raised, we will be LIFTED UP, we will

be resurrected! The Frequency Barrier is lifting! It has been steadily lifting since

the year 1958 when the sun completely reversed its polarity. Our frequency has

increased steadily as we approach the center of the Arc and more things have been

opened up to us as far as intelligence is concerned. When we come fully into the

4th density it will not even be necessary for us to use voice for communication; we

wilt then be on a THOUGHT LEVEL frequency plane. We will start seeing things

around us that we didn’t know were even there. As we pass over, our physical light

of the sun will dim out to natural man. It will start to darken, so those who have

spiritual consciousness or the LIGHT WITHIN will not be troubled, for the

spiritual man on the inside is going to become that Light! They shall be the light of

the world at that time. Spiritual people will be literal lights and they will, be seen as

lights out of darkness, because the sun or Light of Jehovih has been planted in them

― they will be the “sun” of man.

In meditation once I was told, “you must become a lamp unto the night of

that day.” At the time I had no idea what it could mean. Now I do. One reason we

of 305

are told not to eat meat is because of the vicious light emanations that proceed from

flesh. If we can all become vegetarians, it will help our bodies rise in vibration, and

the higher we raise the electrical frequency of each cell we will achieve proper

entry frequency to the next higher state. Those who cannot do so will re-cycle in

their present physical form.

The lifting vortice of LOVE, seeing God in every person, in every place, in

everything will see us each through these end times.

WHEN THE GREAT CHANGE COMES, FLOW WITH IT IN LOVE.

A REMNANT FOR AMERICA

By Griscom Morgan (Ohio)

Sixty years ago Matthew Arnold spoke to a New York audience about the

future of western civilization and, particularly, of the United States. He did not

speak as a prophet foretelling doom, but as a man who, recognizing that our own

civilization shares with all past civilizations seeds of eventual decay, looked

beyond that end to an eventual rebirth. He was thus not concerned with the

temporary ups and downs of fortune, but with the long-time hope. And the hope he

held out for our distant future was that a remnant or portion of the population at

large would so resist the tide of decadence, so maintain from generation to

generation the virtues of a live and vital people, that it might constitute a sound

core to our civilization and so survive its disintegration.

Matthew Arnold was doubtless right in his prophecy. We may check his

judgment in the case of France; for of the great nations, it, being oldest, has

declined furthest. “Whether France gets colonies or not,” he said, “and whether she

allies herself with this nation or with that, things will only go from bad to worse

with her; she will more and more lose her powers of soul and spirit, her intellectual

productiveness, her skill in counsel, might in war, her formidableness as a foe, her

value as ally, and the life of that famous state will be more and more impaired until

it perish. And this is that hard but true doctrine of the sages and prophets of the

inexorable fatality of moral failure of the unsound majority operating to Impair and

destroy states.”

of 305

If analogy with an equivalent stage of Roman civilization should hold true in

the accelerated tines of today, the United States has a major role to play on the

world stage. But also if analogy with the past holds, the future has in store for our

nation such a decline as must be deliberately prepared against, not only to save our

own civilization from eventual extinction, but to save the tradition of civilization

which we have inherited.

To avoid decadent influences, those influences must be recognized and

understood. Yet so widespread is our worship of the wonders of modern science

that the trend of decadence is probably less recognized and less understood in

America than at an equivalent era of Greece or Rome. For example, the economic

influences that are displacing America’s rural population and communities, making

migrating, impoverished hordes out of millions of once independent farmers and

workmen, are mistakenly regarded as concomitants of progress in modern

technology. Yet the same economic process has been repeated in Greece, Asia

Minor, Judea, Rome, England, and Russia over the past three thousand years.

Greece and Rome made more vigorous attempts to stem this development than

have been made in America, and they both failed. We have reason to assume

failure on our own part.

of 305

Conclusion

The work and knowledge of the educator and the elite specialist is in no way

an alternative to the independent folkways of the people and their common sense

view and conduct of life. The substitution of extended universal academic training

for the natural acquisition of folkways through life experience, even makes

impossible the legitimate function of the school which can only succeed by

building on the foundation of live minds ready to digest and assimilate what the

school has to offer, This substitution is characteristic of decadent civilizations. It is

part of an age-old process whereby monopolistic authority destroys the

spontaneous culture of a people. A wise man once observed that such authority has

the “unvarying persistence to convert all knowledge into an imperialism which

makes itself the moral, intellectual and material master of independent thought and

action.” The result is barren dogma jealously guarded against the questioning

intelligence of the common man.

The consequences of the dominance of the professional specialists are

everywhere to be seen. The more religion is given into the hands of theologians,

the less religions are even our ministers; the more teaching becomes specialized,

the less truly educated are the teachers; the more justice is given into the hands of

lawyers, the lower is the order of justice in the legal profession; and the more the

medical profession assumes authority over health, the less healthy is even the

medical profession. Then when the professions perish upon the fall of a

civilization, the people are left bereft of even their own culture.

Appreciation of the true leadership of the specialist presupposes independent

grounds of judgment. Spurious priesthoods thrive where authority reigns over

ignorance. The capacity to judge the quality of the specialist is one of the most

invaluable assets of a people, depending upon their folk culture and moral character

rather than upon a smattering of learning.

of 305

The Faithist Journal V1-2 N10

MEDITATION

by Al Holmes

Hast Thou still a purpose in our writing, O Creator? What is that purpose?

Our original idea was to exercise and cultivate the habit of daily communion with

Thee. It is part of our awareness and attunement. We have learned much through

asking questions of Thee; and we would continue the practice in order to bring

forth whatever further light is needed in our world. We are trying to hold to the

theme that we are here to serve Thee, and for no other purpose. But the habit of

self-thinking is hard to break. We find ourselves falling into the old ways whenever

we are not alert, and positive in purpose. And often, when we have practiced our

attunement faithfully for awhile, reactions set in, and we have to relax, and let go,

and try to be nothing, — neither angels nor devils. As a patient before an operation

must try to relax, trusting completely in his doctors, so must we trust in Thee and

Thy angels, knowing that the diseased parts are being removed successfully, and

that we will soon be back at work, normal and healthy again. There are times when

we are touching neither an extreme of angelic feelings nor an extreme of self-

feelings, when it is wonderful just to be normal, just enjoying the ordinary things of

life. We thank Thee for such moments of peace and relaxation. We know it is not

necessary to have special luxuries and special entertainments in order to be happy.

The greatest joy of living is in the awareness of oneness with Thee, and in serving

Thee, and being attuned to that special wavelength which is in harmony with Thy

heavenly states, and with Thy all-pervading will, wisdom and love.

of 305


IN THE HOUR BEFORE DAWN

I come to speak of Purity, to entice thy thoughts upward and outward, away

from the earth.

Why do I choose this hour? It is at this time that the earth is giving off her

substance, actually becoming less and less substantial. During the day, the earth

receiveth both substance and light. Man, animals and plants are most active adding

to their substance: growing, ingesting, eliminating. So it is that during the day

man’s consciousness is inclined downward to the earth, to earthly things.

Man’s body at best is corrupt, for it is entirely of the earth and at death haste

is made to return the physical body to the earth, for without the spirit, the elements

of the body resume their disorganized state, ready to be used again in the plan of

creation.

Before dawn men’s bodies are most rested. It is the time when the greatest

period has passed since ingesting earthly food, and the body and mind are at their

purest.

This then is the key to purity: that which draws thee upward, away from the

earth. All else is impure. This be true whether it is a matter of food, doctrine, thy

thoughts, or anything which doth affect thee in any way whatsoever. Thus it is that

the diet of those who would prophecy, or who would hear such teachers as speak of

heavenly things, is of fruits and nuts, high-raised, growing the furthest from the

surface of the earth. For all impurity, whether of spirit or materiality, inclineth

downward, and that which groweth in a high place is least contaminated.

Sufficient is it to say that the flesh of any creature, including man which

feeds on other creatures Is impure to so great an extent that it Is often impossible to

awaken any desire to know of heavenly things. For the blood and flesh of an

animal is full of its own wastes, and to eat thereof is to take into thy body that

which the animal would otherwise excrete.

A plant is of a different nature. A plant taketh that which is unorganized from

the earth and putteth it into order and removeth that which is impure. Canst thou

of 305

eat a handful of soil and be nourished thereby? Yet through the agency of the

action of plants in purification and storing art thou able to eat the substance of

several pounds of soil each year of thy life.

Since the plant taketh directly from the earth and hath little consciousness of

its own, it leaveth the least imprint upon its substance which is used for food. Still

it doth leave an imprint as thou canst find by noting thy thoughts and feelings and

finding the inclination thereof after eating of but one plant food for several days.

An animal’s flesh is imprinted the more strongly since it hath taken from the

plant that which was only slightly organized and turned it into a more specialized

form. This is why, even amongst meat eaters, the flesh of carnivores is repugnant,

for it containeth both the imprint and the excrement of not one but many animals.

For a time, after thy spirit leaveth thy body in the birth called death, thou dost

subsist on the part of earthly foods which is exhaled upward during the night. Still

does it hold true about the purity or impurity of thy food inclining thee upward and

outward or downward toward the earth. For as thou hast formed thy habits during

life, so shall thy habits remain with thee after birth into our greater, freer realm.

This then is the second key to liberty. The first is Truth. The second is Purity

For as thou canst not be truly free when bound by falsehood, so canst thou

not be free while bound to the earth by impurity.

Come thou – join with thy teachers in, exploring the boundless universe and

the glories of Creation.

Thy earth, is but a small dark corner – come – join with us in ever increasing

knowledge and liberty forever!

of 305

A FAITHIST PRAYER

from The Eloists

Our Father who art present with us, praise to Thee! I shall live this day to do

Thy will, and help to bring Thy Kingdom on earth. I shall work to provide for

myself and others, harming no one, but doing good to the best of my ability. If I

fail at times to live up to my ideal, I will not condemn myself or others, but shall

learn from my experiences, and push ahead to a higher and higher way of life.

Temptation to do wrong shall be a means of my growing stronger as I rise

above the lesser self.

With Thy help, I shall conquer all darkness and deliver myself from evil to

become a soul of light and love for the good of the whole world.

of 305

FAITHIST GROUPS AND COMMUNES (circa 1974)

report by Arnold Arias

In the “Book of Judgment” and the Book of Jehovih’s Kingdom on Earth,”

the importance of affiliation is made very clear. Not only is affiliation better for the

spiritual grade of an individual, preparing him for a higher resurrection upon his

entrance into the heavenly worlds, but Faithist affiliations do more to help the

world by preparing the way for the building of the Creator’s kingdom on earth.

What follows is a brief description of the various Faithist groups and

communes I have visited. Each is a jewel with its own facets of beauty. Together

they form a radiant necklace fastened around the world to begin the work of

Kosmon, the creation of Jehovih’s paradise on earth.

ARKANSAS FAITHISTS (Address withheld upon request.) This community

of nine Faithists lives communally on 40 acres, farming their land and building

their own structures. They believe severe tribulations are coming to the world, and

they want only dedicated Faithists to visit or join with them.

FAITHIST FARM, BOX 112, Tiger, Ga. 30576 Surrounded on three sides by

a national forest, this group owns 80 acres. Their central structure is a mansion

with two kitchens, three bathrooms, and numerous rooms for worship, recreation,

dining, crafts, and guests. Wall to wall carpeting and wood paneling contribute to

the comfort of the house. They also have a whirlpool bath and sauna with a

bathroom in the rear and four mobile homes. Various books of interest to Faithists

are printed there, and they produce the Fairy Cross and the Universal cross of the

Creator (with circle and leaf). The demand for their jewelry is great, and Faithists

would have much to contribute, for the demand on their jewelry outweigh the

supply. When they are able, they want to raise orphans and have already collected

many baby cribs, potties, etc.

COLORADO FAITHISTS (Address withheld upon request.) This is a large

group of young Faithists with infants, who are musically inclined and hope to

become successful rock and roll musicians. They will inform other Faithists of their

plans, when they feel the time is ripe. (Hint: If they make it big, guess what they

of 305

want to do with the money.

DAWN FAITHISTS 9544 W. Metcalf Pl., Milwaukee., Wisconsin 53222

This group of young Faithists who meet regularly in their homes, hopes to build

Jehovih’s kingdom on earth as it is described in Oahspe, by joining with numerous

dedicated Faithists who have faith in Jehovih and are ready to leave Uz and build

unto the Almighty in His unoccupied forests and fields, raising His orphans to

rejoice In their Creator, hearing His voice and seeing His heavens.

THE ELOISTS Drawer O, Duxbury, Mass. 02332 Founded in 1918, this

group of Faithists lives together on an estate in a pleasant section of New England

near the landing place of the Pilgrims. They meet every day at noon for Council,

praying and praising the Creator, reading Oahspe, meditating, and dancing to

music. They farm; freezing much of their food for winter, and they hope to be used

as instruments to help cleanse the world of its spiritual darkness. There is a great

feeling of spiritual peace and harmony with this group, good for psychic and

spiritual development. (Ed. Note: Due to the unusual nature of the work this group

does, write or call before visiting. Do NOT call during the period from 11:45 am to

1:30 pm local time as you would disturb council. Your cooperation is appreciated.)

THE ELOISTS (New Jersey Branch) .49 Trafalgar Dr., Colonia, NJ 07067

This is a part of the above mentioned group, and their weekly meetings are very

similar to the noon councils of the Mass, group. Many of the members of the New

Jersey group visit frequently with the Mass. members. Many of the members of

both groups hope to move further out of Uz in the future, that they may better serve

Jehovih in the raising of His children.

THE FAITHIST JOURNAL 2324 Suffolk Ave., Kingman AZ 86401. This

group also meets daily for noon councils of prayer and praise to Jehovih,

dedication ceremonies and readings from Oahspe. They print the Faithist Journal

and numerous other books of interest to Faithists, encouraging Faithists to affiliate

and work to help build Jehovih’s kingdom on earth. They hope that some Faithists

will join them in Kingman, by buying land nearby and becoming their neighbors.

In this way, Faithists will learn to love one another as neighbors and be able to

build their relationships to the deep harmony needed for the giving up of self for

of 305

the building of His Kingdom on earth, The Faithist Journal group has harmony

with their neighbors, and other reasons why the group is founded on more secure

ground. (Ed. Note: We hold our councils at 12:00 noon local time, all are welcome

to attend. Please do not phone during the period from noon to one o’clock as it

would disturb council.)

THE VOICE OF JEHOVIH SERVICE CENTER 2256 Coronet Ave.,

Anaheim, CA. This is a rather controversial group within the Faithist movement.

Some believe they are not really Faithists, and they tend to believe they are the

only real Faithists. The truth is somewhere In between. Their beliefs are certainly

way out: They believe a chocolate-pudding-like darkness will cover the earth, and

later there will be a revolution and 55% of the world will be taken to the moon in

starships, where they will be housed while the earth Is cleansed and prepared for

`JAHOVIAH’S’ kingdom on earth. And this is only a partial summary of some of

their beliefs. Faithists should be advised to look into this group, indeed all groups,

with great reason and logic and some down-to-earth common sense. Remember,

words are cheap. Good works done unto others is the important consideration. How

can Jehovih be best served here and now?

OAHSPE FOUNDATION, PO Box 1058, Phoenix, Oregon 97535. This

group is trying to buy land for a colony site. They are in the process of producing

The Light of Kosmon for young people in communes throughout the country. They

are slightly modernizing the language of Oahspe (your for thy, etc.) and printing

the main doctrinal books of Oahspe like “Judgment, Inspiration, Discipline, and

The Book of Jehovih’s Kingdom on Earth”. They believe a time of tribulation and

hardship is coming to this country and hope to relocate in an area of safety where

they can better serve Jehovih. (Ed. Note: We suggest the use of EXTREME

CAUTION in dealing with this group, If you must deal with them at all. The

Faithist Journal has received a number, of letters of complaint from Faithists who

have been frightened, coerced and worse, by the leader of this group. The founder

has stated before reliable witnesses “I am not a Faithist.” These letters are

maintained on file at the offices of the Journal and may be inspected by any who

desire further information.)

COMMUNITY OF SHALAM PO Box 83, Albion, CA 95410 Living

of 305

communally in the Redwood forests of California, this group farms organically and

tries to perceive Jehovih in all His creations. They have numerous books and are

very studious. They live in dome-like structures and feel that the outside world Is

rapidly approaching an apocalyptic fall of anarchy, depression, war, and possible

planetary upheavals, like the time when Pan was submerged. They feel this will be

part of the Creator’s “clean-up”, in preparing the way for His kingdom on earth.

KOSMON UNITY Walton on the Hill, Walton Manor North, Tadworth,

Surrey, England, U.K. KT 20 78A Founded in 1903, this is the oldest active

Oahspe-related group. They publish the small, dark green Oahspe, as well as the

Kosmon Unity magazine for Faithists and various books for Faithists. Four of them

live in the same country manor in a wooded area south of London and others of

their group live in London or other parts of England. WWII and the bombings

scattered their membership across the island, but they have a worship service once

a month in their chapel at the above address. There is more to this group that can be

revealed only after a Faithist has joined them and lived with them a year. They

have asked that I keep this added information a secret. Next summer I will again

visit the English group and a group of Faithists in Bombay, India.

This is not a complete list of Faithist groups. There are probably many groups

that have not made themselves known yet, like the Colorado and Milwaukee

groups that only became apparent to others this year. If any groups feel I have not

correctly or adequately described them, please correct me, preferably by writing

into this publication, so that your answer can be known to all. We all want to hear

from you, and I am trying to let others know that Faithist groups exist. I do not feel

that any group is THE GROUP, if any group can ever be THE GROUP. I think that

each group is a piece of the puzzle, a brick of the foundation. By putting the best of

each group together, a fuller picture, a more secure part of the foundation is

produced. One group knows a lot about farming and building. Another group is

good in music, another has studied healing, another child- care, another diet, etc.

Perhaps these different groups or parts of these groups will join together on a large

parcel of land in an isolated area and start building Jehovih’s kingdom on earth as it

is described in Oahspe, raising orphans and removing themselves completely from

the world. Most groups agree that they are preparing toward this end. Perhaps

of 305

many of these groups will attain that goal. Possibly, these groups are just training

schools for the real work to come in the future.

Whatever the outcome, Jehovih will bring His Faithists together and He will

build His kingdom on earth. Let us concern ourselves with serving Him to the best

of our ability. If you feel that you could best serve Jehovih by joining one of these

groups, then please write them and try to visit with them first. It is a wide, wide

world full of possibilities. MAY JEHOVIH GUIDE AND DIRECT US ALL

THAT WE MAY BE INSTRUMENTAL IN THE BUILDING OF HIS

KINGDOM ON EARTH!

I AM MUSIC

by Allan C. Inman

(A clipping from the March, 1974 Musical News, contributed by Leland S.

Barton)

I AM MUSIC, most ancient of the arts. I am more than ancient; I am eternal.

Even before life commenced upon this earth, I was here ― in the winds and the

waves. When the first trees and flowers and grasses appeared, I was among them.

And when Man came, I at once became the most delicate, most subtle, and most

powerful medium for the expression of Man’s emotions. When men were little

better than beasts, I influenced them for their good. In all ages I have inspired men

with hope, kindled their love, given a voice to their joys, cheered them on

chivalrous deeds, and soothed them in times of despair. I have played a great part

in the drama of Life, whose end and purpose is the complete perfection of man’s

nature. Through my influence human nature has been uplifted, sweetened and

refined, With the aid of men, I have become a Fine Art. From Tubalcain to Thomas

Edison a long line of the brightest minds have devoted themselves to the perfection

of instruments through which men may utilize my powers and enjoy my charms. I

have myriads of voices and instruments. I am in the hearts of all men and on their

tongues, in all lands and among all peoples; the ignorant and unlettered know me

not less than the rich and learned. For I speak to all men, in a language that all

understand. Even the deaf hear me, if they but listen to the voices of their own

of 305

souls. I am the food of love. I have taught men gentleness and peace: and I have led

them onward to heroic deeds. I comfort the lonely, and I harmonize the discord of

crowds. I am a necessary luxury to all men. I Am MUSIC.

THE VOICE

by Gisella Faldowski

The Voice is the Soul of all things

And speaks not with trumpet and tongue;

It utters in heaven and earth;

It’s silent to thunderous song.

In the soul of every creature

Dwells the Father’s sacred Voice;

To animals it gives ‘instinct’

The guide to humans is with choice.

Mortal men have many roadways

That they can walk to depth and height;

The still Voice leads on to heaven

Those hearing it not, tarry and fight.

In ages past this Voice was weak

And only chosen few could hear;

Now many thousands do perceive it

Glory to earth! Kosmon is near.

O brethren! Let us cultivate

This precious seed He placed in all

Tended with His love, and light.;

We help to shape it straight and tall.

Like a mighty, crystal current

The Voice will speak with force divine;

The multitudes on our earth planet

Will harmonize with THE GREAT MIND.

of 305

THE INSPIRATION OF THE WORLD AND THE GLORY OF THE MORNING STAR

by D. G. Pickard

The depth of the Soul is often revealed in the words of hymn writers. They

speak of an inner dissatisfaction felt even in the midst of an abundance of material

prosperity. There is an indefinable aching void. Behind the words lie the unspoken

declaration “I feel, but cannot express the feelings adequately”. The poets and

musicians have also felt and tried to convey it in language finer and more sensitive

than normal modes of utterance.

The sacred writings of all Religions express this. The appeal of the God-men

Saviors of past cycles of time was precisely the claim to satisfy this ache of the

Soul. The intangible ‘something missing’ was what the Redeemers promised to

provide. Though of the essence of the intangible, it is just as real as anything

objective that can be felt, touched, tasted and handled.

The souls of millions have tested these claims and still the soul is filled with

a sense of that which is missing, for which it longs so desperately to know. In the

language of soul, the spirit of mortals and even millions of angels give vent to the

sad lament:

“O Morning Star, Thy Glory veiled from sight,

And mortals cannot see,

in dark thou art as well as Light

And I would turn to Thee.”

And the Morning Star seems to hide itself. The soul seeks, asks and knocks,

often for many a long year. It is like the Sun hidden behind the clouds.

There is a deep mystery in this, a hidden truth of life well below the

superficial level of things. It is well to recognize that the world is full of the

illusions of things, being more like the shadow of a thing is to the substance. It

seems solid enough, yet is a never resting perpetual motion of eternal vibrations.

Only the spiritual matrix is real. The rest is of the order of transitory things, ever

changing and becoming something else.

of 305

It is full of magic and inviting charms, all of which are embraced in the

expression ‘The inspiration of the World’. Though it be incapable of filling this

void within the soul, it tries to deaden the feeling by constantly filling the world of

a man’s thoughts with ideas of things to do and say, so that he has little time to

ponder the deeper facts of life, or even the inclination to do so. It has a strange

hypnotic power, very potent, and full of danger to the soul.

In the New Bible ‘Oahspe’ we find in the Book of Inspiration a statement

regarding the inspiration of the world, spoken by the Creator, the Great Spirit E-O-

Ih, directed to the soul of every man and woman:

“Few only will turn away from the inspiration of the world and come unto

Me.” (Book of Inspiration, Chapter IX: 16.)

Why is this so? Is it not clear what constitutes the spirit of the world? The

prophets and great teachers of the Great Spirit made it quite plain. Read of the

Scribes and Pharisees, those descendants of the Hasidim, who were so scrupulous

as to commas and dots, but blind as to the underlying spirit at the back of all Law.

Listen again to the prophets who denounced the worldly spirit of their times. “I will

have mercy, not sacrifice. The smell of their burnt offerings is a stench to my

nostrils.”

Read again the sayings of “Woe unto Ye” and there can be little doubt, for

these in every age breed rank and social privilege, and the establishment of a

society of class. For these are the prizes the spirit of the World gives, yet none can

take them with them when they die. The same sickening stench arises from the

modern burnt offerings and are all rejected, even when offered with prayer and

praise, because they are formed of the Spirit of this World. What then is the

Inspiration of the World?

It is the outworking of the seven Tetracts, not personal devils, but impersonal

tendencies that grow within each soul from early days of childhood. The first

utterance “I want” declares it. “This is mine” confirms It. “I must have” also tells

of a tiny growth, a self that can be a world within itself, or a world of happiness

that may bless many. These are the words children say, and the spirit that gives

them life is the deadly spirit of the world. It charms and allures, making each self to

of 305

strive against its brother man, till In the end it gathers them all into giant conflicts

of major wars. Ever is the gentle voice of the Creator seeking to undo this inspiring

influence, so that the soul will weigh the matter with Godlike judgment, perceiving

all from the vantage of a nobler world where these are completely reversed.

The inspiring angels of the higher planes weigh and assess the actions of

nations and individuals, noting their habits and ways. Few see them at this work for

only on set occasions is the communion between both worlds made obvious and

apparent to even the most skeptical. But the overshadowing angels, seeking in this

work their own advancement In wisdom and knowledge, often ask the questions:

“Why do they turn away from the Higher Light? Why will they not turn unto Him

who speaks from within their own souls? Why do they attain to be their own worst

enemies?” To the Gods who have charge of these many missions they ask: “How

best shall the inspiration of the worldly spirit be overcome?”

From the wisdom of thousands of years the Gods recall the similarity of

growth on many worlds like earth, of the ups and downs from childhood to adult

age, and from this wisdom see the trend of earthly happenings as surely as if the

future already was the present. For in the past, the Universal Soul spoke to only

One here and there who had been raised specially to reveal the Light. In this cycle

of time, the Voice within all Souls will be felt by thousands all over the world. In

the cycles still to come, the many millions will be able to understand, just as it was

with the I-e-su of ancient days, and the Gods will again walk and talk with mortals.

The ode of Goethe, expressed in the ninth symphony of Beethoven, will be

uttered by a vast brotherhood, a chorus of mortal voices, as they feel the mighty

power of the least seen and most silent One

“O Morning Star, Thy Glory veiled from sight.

And mortals cannot see

In dark thou art as well as Light

And I would turn to Thee.”

So will these words be added to the Theme of Goethe’s Hymn of Praise, for

they originate from the same source of inspiration, a spirit not of this world.

The worldly spirit is deeply entrenched, and is most strong. It’s roots do not

of 305

come up easily. Even the words written here can be read yet not necessarily read

with understanding. The spirit of the world will always place a veil across the

mind, and bring the higher light down to the level of the commonplace.

Why is the Glory veiled? Why should the light seem to want to hide away?

There is a merciful wisdom in this. It is hidden by the coarse and lower vibrations

of corpor, and it is this octave in the celestial spheres that manifests corpor, and

hides the glory of the unseen worlds. The morning star, the sun behind the visible

sun, is not seen, and in the minds of many not even believed to be. It hides it’s

glory from the natural senses lest the sons of men are dazzled by it’s brilliance, and

so go from one extreme to the other within the passing hour. Neither will it ever

shine like the sun on a summer’s day all at once, for it Is too considerate of the

frailty of the mortal frame. For gradually the soul must attain to bear the light of

higher worlds, because of its intense power of magnification. Not only the Light,

but the darkness as well, both are magnified and stand in true colour for all to see

the contrast. It leadeth very gently the soul of man, always leaving him the right to

choose for himself. Such is the wisdom that has its own reasons for seeming to

want to hide.

Till the inward eye Is opened, the real seems unreal, and the unreal seems

solid and lasting. Only then is the perspective of things true. Then the unseen

becomes more real to the soul than the seeming solid earth that in actual fact is

nothing of the sort. The eyes of men see little of what is all around, hear not the

music of the spheres, nor understand the nature of the rhythm of higher vibrations.

The oceans and the lands of a world all around the earth remain unnoticed even

though the departed spirits declare them as a fact. The Higher Etherean Worlds

beyond, where nothing of the worldly spirit can abide, is a foreign land of which

little is known. But when the inward eye begins to see, the strangeness of the

unseen becomes more like home, and the world a place of no fixed settled

habitation. Then only dare a man say “The Prince of this World cometh, and he

hath nothing In Me”. For he has overcome the spirit of the world, overcome it

within his soul. Those whom the spirit of the world captivates see it entirely

opposite to this, and always will. Only so far can words give light and guidance.

In the end the soul must know of these things in its own experience.

of 305

“In dark thou art as well as light”. This is said in the Psalms as well. “Yea,

the darkness hideth not from thee: but the night shineth as the day; the darkness and

the light are both alike to thee.” (Psalm 139:12) (Ezra Bible, Ed)

Now these words are well worth careful study. They are not understood,

though their true significance is there quite plain for all to see. Men attribute all

that emanates from Light to come from One who is Perfect and Good, yet that

which cometh from darkness they say is of Satan. They then find themselves in the

dilemma of reasoning there must be a duality in the God-head, a God versus a

Satan, two contestants of superior might. Such a train of thought leads more away

from truth than it draws closer.

The hidden remains hid, inscrutable behind a deep mysterious silence. Yet

were it not for the darkness of soul, light could never be fully known. Were it not

for the ache of the soul, all the opposites and extremes would have no meaning, for

they would not be felt. Each of the opposites form the contrast, so that darkness and

light are part of the one.

Both light and darkness are in the soul, for the two are part of the One. It is as

a fortress, and in this citadel the defenders of the worldly spirit stand on guard,

knowing that the enemy must endeavor to overcome. Both are true to themselves.

Cometh the wooden horse of the Trojans, whose hidden warriors of light remain

unnoticed till it is too late. For it is from within that they overcome. And this is the

nature of the darkness in the soul, but rarely is it felt or understood, so that men

blindly curse fate, or question why a God who is good permits the evil to destroy

his works. They fail to see the Morning Star is just as potent in the depths of

darkness as it is in the region of Highest Light.

“And I would turn to Thee.” It is not easy to generalize about this, as it is a

personal experience different for every soul. Some could never say exactly what

happened. Others may be aware of the unseen watchmen who change the guard but

never slacken for a moment. Others perceive that mind substance is all-powerful

and the real battle ground lies in these higher realms. A few understood, but even

for them the fight with powers and principalities was long drawn-out and

prolonged for many a year ere the issue was decided, Behind all these variations is

of 305

one deep fundamental truth. Deep In the depth of darkness, Highest of All in the

Nirvanian Heights, is the Heart of the Great and Mighty Spirit E-O-Ih with a cord

of love tugging at each single heart and soul. It is by this ceaseless tugging the soul

Is never permitted to unconditionally surrender to the inspiration of the world. In

the end it has to turn its back on the worldly spirit for the call ‘Come unto Me’ is

the call of its beloved One.

In the distance we can hear the music of the spheres. In light, colour, and

sound, with melody and counterpart, change of mood, sadness and joyfulness, the

Oneness of the souls of millions is heard to singing the music of a Hymn of Praise

to the Creator `Jehovih’. (E-O-Ih)

Let us pursue the study of ‘Worldliness’ yet further, for nothing is more

confusing than this. If misinterpreted, the result is invariably Religious beliefs

leading to extreme positions, and the consequence is the crucifixion through

ignorance of the spirit behind the doctrine. The words of Christian scripture that

have been read with so little understanding are these:

“If any man love the world, the love of the Father is not In him. For all that is

in the world, the lust of the flesh, the lust of the eyes, and the pride of Life, is not of

the Father, but is of the world.

“And the world passeth away, and the lust thereof; but he who doeth the will

of God abideth forever,” (Epistle John 2:15-17.)

It is virtually impossible to separate the distinctions if we insist on applying

them to people, or the beauty of creation as we see it all around, and this the

preacher stated at once. He recognized the boundary lines of the love of the world,

or worldliness, are difficult to define. Unless we define, we merely flounder in a

sea of opinions.

The first idea suggested by ‘the world,’ is the world of nature. But this is not

the love of which is prohibited. We learn in three ways. First, the working of mind.

Love, Justice, Tenderness, once we know these we understand what the worldly

love is not. These belong not to the spirit of the world but a spirit much more

refined and sensitive to spiritual impulses. (Sermons - Rev. Frederick W.

Robertson, Published 1906)

of 305

The world of nature is the outer garment, the changing symbol of a reality we

cannot see. To love this is not at all to Love the Worldly Spirit, for this lies in the

actions of men who pervert this glory for selfish aims. The eye of self looks upon

all this which is Holy and sanctified and it becomes changed. It seems not a

potential Paradise, nor a possible Heavenly Kingdom on earth, but a garden of

weeds. It is enmeshed by the Tetracts, it sees with eyes of lust, flesh, eye, worldly-

glory, all these it views with relish. The glory of the Kingdoms of this world are

reflected in all the nations of Europe, and upon the worldly spirit is founded the

established Order that perpetuates Inequality. The poor remain, If not poor, hedged

in on all sides. The rich grow richer and the gap is always there.

The Pharisees judged the same issue in the lifetime of Joshu. In their desire to

emphasize ‘Love not men, but God,’ they framed the word ‘Corban’ so that

whereas a man might wish to support his parents, the Law of Corban insisted he

gave the money as a Temple offering. The worldly spirit takes the gifts from the

heart and says ‘These ought to be given to God.’ The same spirit builds

magnificent churches and leaves the poor only with the prospect of a happier

hereafter. The spirit of ‘Corban’ permeated the Established Religion; and so it

gained considerable wealth. Its Trustees invested legacies in stocks and shares, and

the poor still cried out for social justice.

It is sometimes thought that ‘by the world’ refers to a man’s profession or

occupation, as if this is in itself irreligious. It is not so. Any office presents the

opportunities to function towards a noble idea, like justice, or use it to become

personally richer through the advantages office bestows. Work itself is sacred. It

belongs not to the forbidden world.

Define ‘Worldliness,’ It is determined by the ‘Spirit’ of a Life. “Let us eat,

drink, be merry, indulge every appetite till it is exhausted. Let us worship the glory

of the world, be subservient and respectful to those set in authority over us. Let us

attach ourselves like limpets to pick up the crumbs they drop.” This is the Satanic

philosophy which clearly defines it all.

And thus the years of life pass quickly by. Even the lusts of youth give way

to time and the changing structure of the body cells. Even the pride of life loses its

of 305

hold so that in the evening of life you look back and say as Solomon did ‘Vanity,

all Vanity.’ Then rises the glory of the Morning Star to speak of newer life, more

purposeful, more abundant. “Forsake these things and turn unto Me, for I am Thy

True Inspiration.”

We have sought for the truth in this for one good reason. It has been sadly

misunderstood. The voice of Satan said to the Christian, “Forsake these things,

have nothing to do with the World.” The more strict in Faith took example from the

Pharisees of old and became brethren who lost the contact with people that is itself

‘Life.’

Now the great teacher Sakaya put the matter in true perspective centuries

before they found their way into Christian teachings.

“Satan calleth out from a dark corner saying:

Remain thou within the wicked world, and leaven the whole mass.”

Again he calleth from a dark corner, saying:

“Go thou away from the wicked world, be as an ascetic, praying alone, living

alone.”

Again be calleth from a dark corner, saying:

“Thou and Thy friends are too pure to mix with the world; go ye away

privily, and let the world take care of itself.”

“Now I say unto you, do none of these things; and, in the same breath I say,

Do all of them.” (Oahspe - God’s Book of Eskra, XXII: 9 - 11)

And in the working out of these words of priceless value and deep spiritual

insight lies the only safe and certain way of differentiating between the ‘Spirit of

Worldliness’ and the ‘Light of the Morning Star.’

The light that was with Sakaya was the Light of the Great Spirit, E-O-Ih, as it

was with Joshu of Palestine, and this Light cannot err. It was because the Religion

of Europe was established on a deliberate perversion of the doctrines of Joshu that

many a Christian bent on finding the Living Truth failed to define the nature of the

worldly spirit, or come to know the Morning Star within his own soul.

Many of the hymns the faithful sang also added, rather than detracted, from

of 305

the sea of confusion that abounded. For when they spoke of the Morning Star, it

was with reference to the name upon which the Faith was founded. And each

Religion had its founder, so that to the Angels who surveyed the ways of mortals,

there were always at least four major claimants to this title. Yet none of these

claimed in themselves the glory of which we speak. For that Glory is unto E-O-Ih

alone, and these great teachers were men in whom this Glory shone. So confusion

was added to confusion by the failure of men to recognise the one and only True

Morning Star of All.

In the Book of Inspiration from which come the words: “Few only will turn

away from the inspiration of the world, and come unto Me”, it is also explained

that you may take the most understanding of animals, the dog, and say ‘Jehovih’ to

it as often as you choose, but it will not understand understandingly. Thus the

Glory of the Morning Star must ever remain veiled, until it can be perceived with

understanding. Till then, the spirit of ‘Worldliness’ will ever seem the victor.

The worldly spirit, the lust of the Tetracts in the soul to enjoy to the full the

things the natural senses feel, the inspiration of the world, all these are one and the

same. They are hard to escape from. The factors of environment and heredity play a

great part in these things. But when the soul heareth the voice of the Father, he

hears not a voice of Judgment, but a gentle, sad voice, fully aware that the wisdom

that is beyond mortal capability to comprehend must ever work itself out in this

manner, so that the final glory of the Morning Star may shine with radiance and

perfection of soul. The Father does not explain this at the time, for it Is sufficient

His Son or Daughter has come at last, unto Him.

Even the words written, the ideas enlarged upon, the wisdom of the wise

teachers, all these at best are indirect inspiration. Only personal experience is for

any, direct inspiration. Though he tell it to others, for them it is indirect inspiration.

At the last, the soul must go it alone. None other can ever be substitute, for each

one is unique.

of 305

The Faithist Journal 1975Father, around, and within and over all, Grant that we of corpor should come

to understand Thy Ways and Seasons.

Teach us to look first unto You in all things that we might better know

ourselves and Thy Will within us.

Forgive us for our slow and erring ways and lift not Thy patient, gentle hand

from our eternal lives.

We humble ourselves before Thee, knowing that there is nothing without

Thee and Thy Presence. Amen.

By Spirit Dove

of 305


STRANGER ON THE SHORE

by D. G. Pickard

He stood, gazing into the distance as if waiting for the arrival of someone.

The atmospherean ocean was much like the waters on earth. Though not quite

alone, he stood apart from the other small groups of spirit people. Strange though it

may appear, many could not say exactly when or how the change had come about.

If, instead of gazing out to sea, you looked in the opposite direction, you

would see houses and gardens, colors richer than the flowers of earth. The spirit

people would be quite the same as those on earth, having as many diverse

dispositions and interests. At first you might be puzzled by all this. It is so similar

in some ways, so different in others, especially as to ease of movement, it being

more of a gliding motion calling for very little exertion. It is far easier than

carrying around a dense body that wearies easily.

There were mountains and hills, areas of land where all was bathed in a

brilliant light. There were shaded valleys where dwelt those with problems and

haunting fears, or secrets they wished hidden. These were unhappy souls, and

though there were helpers who tried to be of assistance, they could not remain for

long in these dark regions.

The problem lay mainly in the variation in vibrations as a result of which in

these realms beyond the earth, emotions were more powerful. On earth, emotions

can be repressed, but anger here was like the explosive blast from a gun! Painful

effects were felt by others for considerable distances. Many were unable to do

much on account of emotional power being magnified many times, for the new

body is capable of feeling intensely, and so is more sensitive.

Many problems arise on account of feelings intensification. Though good

gives greater harmony and pleasure, darkness is also magnified. On higher planes,

the power of magnification is even stronger. It then becomes extremely difficult to

have dark or secret thoughts for those who have progressed in these realms can

read thoughts before they are expressed.

of 305

I observed the stranger on the shore, curious as to why he stood alone. He

was strong, and amiable, giving an impression of gentleness.

Was the stranger waiting for someone he knew? Suddenly, I realised my very

thoughts had been overheard, for by my side stood a very youthful person who

said, “I couldn’t avoid reading your thoughts. I can answer your question. He

stands there for a good reason. Many arrive in these realms by sea or land from all

the continents on earth, and though you see groups of people waiting for loved

ones, not everyone has someone to welcome them. We have many here who feel

the anguish of such loneliness and they volunteer to watch the shores so that when

lonely folks come they can be made to feel wanted.”

In the distance I saw a boat. The horizon was more distant than on an earthly

shore, so I expected it would be some time before it reached the shore. Since it did

not seem right to intrude upon the privacy of the scene shortly to take place, I

decided to leave.

of 305

ANGELIC PRECEPTORY - ZARATHUSTRIAN MAS

Given in trance by C. Morley (Reprinted from Nov. 1972 Kosmon Unity)

If we say that the After-Death state was an epitome of everything we have

experienced in Earth Life, we would be correct so far as first awakening memories

go. The mystery of the condition after the spirit leaves the body is difficult to put

into familiar language, but you can understand it to a certain extent as earth

experience PLUS the experiences gained in subjective states. So the mystery is not

so profound as it may first appear but we must consider it since it plays an

important part in the growth of the spirit after it has left the earth body.

When one passes from the physical plane into spiritual life, one sinks into a

condition of sleep, because the etheric body becomes inactive and the mind sinks to

become active only on a very interior plane. The person has gone inward to

conscious experience, but as his “body” sleeps he has no means of bringing into

focus those things his mind knows in the deeper state. This fact is known to most

schools of psychical thought as it is a very ancient teaching and can be traced back

to the teaching of Zarathustra, the Persian sage, who lived approximately nine

thousand years ago. Also in the Christian teaching, it is said “On the third day,

Jesus rose from the dead.”

During the three days the etheric body slowly gathers its energies and finally

consciousness comes back to it and the person wakes on the plane to which he or

she has “gravitated,” then memories of earth life come back and persons formerly

associated are seen again. In some cases there is no realization that death has

supervened. Some think they are still alive and since thought can carry the spirit

anywhere, they go to places they were in before death. Yet they are affected by the

magnetic surroundings of their new home and its vibrations so that in earth

surroundings they make no contact and cannot understand why they cannot

communicate This veil of the newly dead is something which gives frequent

difficulty to those who minister to them. We point this our because even in this

moment so many people are passing into the other life without any idea of where

they might be going. Ministers of religion hint at a possibility of Paradise, or a long

of 305

sleep or a dwelling with Angels, but there is nothing definite, yet the true teaching

has been available for a long time.

Where it is necessary to arouse a spirit as to a knowledge of his true state,

Ministers of Light and those who work in this way go to them in the First

Resurrection and explain their condition and what is happening. They may take

them to the places they left and show them their old friends but point out the lack

of communication and so emphasize the difference of their state. They are taught

that their association with earth can only be subjective, though they may objectify

themselves and manifest under certain conditions. But association with earth life is

full of tantalizing experiences, because the new vibrations no longer register earth

vibrations, but are more active and emotions more acute, every reeling at a higher

pitch and so difficult to bear.

It may seem strange that you should concern yourself with such things before

they happen to you, but truly life is continuous from plane to plane and there is no

such thing as Death. The change called Death often produces a different state and

condition of life.

All Spiritual Schools, which teach from an occult and scientific point of

view, call the experiences of the first heaven, “the Planes of Illusion” for there

nothing is quite what it seems, but are reflections of things built up in etheric and

astral light, When a spirit has great bondage and is so to speak “earth bound”, the

forms are tantalizing and the experiences of those who are in the lower states can

accurately be described as Hell, because of the anxiety and pain and mental

anguish, which they may cause.

We pass on this matter to you because we believe your object is to serve the

Father in heaven by doing His Will and you may help those in the Higher Worlds

of Life and Being, who go to assist those in bondage and in this condition of

illusion. If you have thought of these things arid studied them and spent time in

meditation you are already associated with the Higher Spheres of Being, have

magnified the Light, Jehovih, within you and taken to yourself a garment of Solar

Radiance, so building the etheric body beautiful so when you pass from the Earth

Plane and awaken after the three earth days of rest, you arrive already above the

of 305

planes of illusion to the borderland of a higher reality.

In so far as this is your spiritual state already, you can through the Power of

Prayer and in intention together already join the higher reality and so aid those who

have passed from this life without knowledge of their new state. Many newly

passed over are in a state of shock and disorientation, still associated with earth life

and so inoperative in the new life. We should pray for them. How does our prayer

help?

Prayer creates a vortex of spiritual energy. We call it that for want of a better

term, and your learned men speak of energy existing which cannot be seen or

sensed, yet it is potent. Spiritual energy radiates from the finer realms of spiritual

matter for you have momentarily linked your heart and mind with the Great Centre

of All Life, the Soul of all souls. You have done this by an act of will. This is

possible because the seed within you is Eternal and the strength within you is part

of the Great All, Turning the mind inward and in a spirit of prayer for invoking the

light causes a higher, finer radiation from you to the Centre and there comes back

an answering wave, which is greatly magnified, as linked with the minds of Angels

ministering in the Father’s Name. If your prayer has been specifically for one you

knew, then they can find that one from the image of your mind, identifying the

thought image from its vibrational quality in the same way that an image can be

transmitted onto a photographic plate. The radiation however also partakes of the

life quality of the ray which brought that one into being, i.e. with his spiritual

lineage, with his time on earth and his etherean quality to come. Every mental and

spiritual effort on your part clarifies the higher Life Rays of that individual,

enhancing his tonal quality and enabling the Higher Ones to recognise what was, is

and is to be. SURPRISE!

When you get to heaven you will likely view Many folks whose presence

there Will be a shock to you,

But then keep very quiet. Do not even stare. Doubtless there’ll be many folks

Surprised to see YOU there.

of 305

THE FUNCTION OF TAE

by Joan Harmon

The Creator has made all forms and all life within them to exist in a constant

and everlasting state of flux. There must necessarily be all degrees from unripeness

to ripeness expressing about every grade of expression conceivable.

The sum total of the highest at any given time on a planet is given a name

expressive of that ascendancy and is called ‘TAE’, the highest general expression

of mankind.

Grades of people depend not only on heredity but also upon cosmic

conditions. At periods when cosmic conditions are favorable, there appear

individuals among people who are head and shoulders above the others. Through

these individuals, new ideas, more light, more encouragement for spiritual growth

in various ways are given to others so that new and higher standards become

known and practiced. People are caused to rise in grade for several generations.

Often, people who call themselves Faithists – people who dedicate their lives

to the All Light, the Ever Present Creator, are capable of receiving great

inspiration. Seeing the discrepancy between themselves and others, they

disassociate themselves, except from a few. The wisdom they are capable of

disseminating is moving and powerful, but all too often they keep it locked up in

themselves and that was not what it was given to them for. True enough, such

knowledge may not be for `everyone’ either, but often more good could result if it

were spread a bit more among those who are truly ready for it.

What is it that makes some inspired people so reluctant to share the Light

they attain to understand? Some say, “I’d rather not mislead anyone.” This can be

‘self’ talking. Light comes from the Creator. There is nothing misleading about it.

It is self -flattery to think it comes from self enough to mislead anyone. When

others are allowed to share light, they grow and make permanent changes in their

ways of thinking and acting. Certainly this is to be desired, and the very basis of

Jehovih’s kingdom on earth. Why, when so much general good can be done, do

some so fear and avoid bondage then? Would you not willingly even take on

of 305

bondage to do the Creator’s work?

(However for the most part there may be no bondage involved.) The Light

given you could not have been merely for yourself alone.

Some say, “I give light only to those who ask me for it.” The Journal asks

you for it. Often we know whom to ask – but not necessarily. And we often do not

know what to ask. Help us and the Journal to do the Creator’s work; to channel

help and light out to those who seek it. Not all information is for all, but we pray

for the ability to discriminate and channel some things into print, some into

personal contact and correspondence.

Part of laying the foundation of the Creator’s Kingdom on earth is to

establish planes of spiritual concepts, Truths become spread in the course of human

relations then incorporated into wider and wider circles, adding up to spiritual

progress among increasing numbers.

Setting an example is part of it. The tendency to idolize the ideal is called

Seffas. Having our Ideals reinforced, raised, clarified, is all part of spiritual

progress. No one person is Tae, and we all need the Creator’s Light as it comes

through you, just as we try to share what comes to us.

We know you are busy. It takes time to sit down and write or type

information. But as you give out what is given to you, more will be given you – the

time to do it will be provided also. The more you share, the more you will be given,

of 305

THE MATCHLESS VOICE OF E-O-IH

By D. G. Pickard

“My son be not afraid! Thy life shall be forever. Life of My Life thou art;

none can take this away. Life of cower is a taste; life of Es, the feast, Hear thou My

voice, O son of Man, I am Thy Creator.”

The son of man gazed skyward, to him no void, but filled with life, It seemed

a vast cathedral through whose open roof he viewed with opened inner eye, seeing

planes beyond. The music of the spheres, its central note, clear, rang in the depths

of his soul. “My son, though mortal life men take away, the life within cannot be

touched. My words, O son of man: I have made all men to be free. Only with this

freedom can they learn to know?”

Light like a silver cord stretching from every form of life, revealed many

threads in the ethe, linking everyone. AU links rising to Him who holds each

within Himself, each a part of Him. Like gentle ripples on waves, currents of the

carried His words throughout the Universe, In vain dark powers tried to check the

winds that traversed millions of worlds, potent with power, directed by mighty will.

These powers could not return to Him who sent them, until His will was done.

Throughout these many worlds were those who heard these words. Through

descending plans they were transmitted, inspired by angels to register in mortal

thought. In time these rooted deep in men’s’ souls. Hearing the Voice of the

beloved One, the, were not afraid. Knowing of immortality, truth set them free.

Within each soul the Voice spoke: ``My Son, My Daughter, know thy Life is

forever.”

The son of man looked fearlessly at death. Death was only the guardian of

the door, and once passed closed it forever. In Es worlds it was not. “My son, be

not afraid; death serves My purpose and thine. Thou canst not live on earth forever.

If not for death, would not life be hell?”

The son of man replied: “O Voice within my soul, how tell the sons of the

earth this fact?” The Voice replied, “Pave faith In Me alone, I will show a way.” In

the unseen worlds, Gods of wisdom heard the sounds of soul, for nothing there is

of 305

hidden. All is light and crystal clear. These Gods of Majesty read into the heart of

the Eternal One the way each soul would hear the Voice. “Go now, Ye Gods,” the

Voice said, “remove the clouds around their world. Then reflected power of My

Light shall stream into their souls. As those at-one with Me perceive My thoughts

and plans, so teach thou mortals every child of man is forever My son, My

daughter. Then will their Faith in Me expand and they become like Gods,”

So did the Gods of Wisdom and the Lords of Mind prepare the plan, They

proved the life of Es objectively and undermined the ancient (false) Gods so that

clouds were scattered and light shone clearly. Because His light no mortal could

withstand, He gently gave reflections of His mighty power, to suit the yieibriot ~

Sons of men. In course of time both light and sound were sensed in every soul; The

sons of men ceased war and peace reigned. In taking form and shape, projecting

thus their presence, these Gods at-one with everlasting Light showed mortals the

endless ladder whose height none could attain. The everlasting Light cast rays on

all, and all heard the Voice. “The life of earth is but the taste of Life: the Life of Es

the feast indeed.”

At first, these words seemed strange. Mortals believed in the earth life for its

own merit, riot that it was a beginning to a higher life like a feast. Fuller richer

Life, expanding without end, was beyond the scope of their minds. Their own

experience was three score and ten. They had no gauge by which to measure things

beyond the senses of touch, sight and taste, Dreams came subjectively but had no

substance or measurement, could not be defined. Teachers said “Why doubt ye this,

for whilst on corpor Es remains subjective, but when ye know of Es objectively,

behold, then corpor seems just like a dream.” Of many things these teachers spoke,

for the matchless Voice would not speak to all mankind until all the work of

preparation had been done.

The son of man developed the inner sense through the discipline of

concentrated thought and passive receptivity to spiritual things. In the silence deep

within, he recognized the source of all those thoughts which came to him from

without. As the wind they came, whose origin none knew, came and went,

oblivious of all law. In this the spirit ever surgeth free, inspiring whom lie will, by

virtue of His presence, supreme, beyond all law.

of 305

“O spirit,” said the son of man, “Is not thy presence in all that is? Yet even

so, hoss long crc every son of roan shall know this fact himself?” “My Son,” the

spirit said, “Observe nature. I do not cast aside the old at once, but bring all change

according to My long term plans. When it cometh, men hardly perceive change has

taken place. I clear the air of clouds, and bring their world to higher spheres; then

the senses in each soul are ready to receive My words. In course of time they lock

hack to the present age and say `what tools the ancients were,’ not knowing that

these things are bound to be.”

“O Great all-discerning Spirit,” replied the son of man, “How great the

measure of Thy wisdom, even Gods fail to comprehend. Thou fillest all life with

illustrations of Thy ways, When they ask for wisdom Thou makest each to see the

truth of things from within and without.”

“My son,” the matchless Voice re .lied, “Blessed are all who hear My Voice.

Tell them how to listen and know My Voice from that which is counterfeit.”

Then the Lords of Mind explained again the way in which the Voice Is heard,

describes the chains of light through every plane of life, and showed the waves of

power and energy vibrating at terrific pace throughout the Universe. In every little

atom It was as a Light a fund which spoke to every cell of matter told it what to do.

Behind each particle and element was the archetype of life. lf, the atomic

counterpart that was the life and power of every cell. It matched each to dance and

sway in rhythm to a celestial tune. When this was fully understood one knew the

Voice was everywhere, always had been thus and was greater and more powerful

than all the Gods and Lords. Though for a time mortals could be deceived, in the

end that matchless Voice Would penetrate all hidden depths, and `soul’ that was in

every man would recognize the source.

The son of man comprehended. “O Great Eternal Spirit,” he said, “in the end

they all must come to You, forsaking all the lesser lights rather than betray the

truth. For so the soul Thou hast made, to sense like a horning bird, the One who

made it, to know by virtue of Thy presence the route which leads home. May Thy

great Name be known to all, Thou art most beloved. May the speech of soul touch

all who live, and Thy Name extolled.”

of 305

The unseen friends who read the thoughts of all, had marked the way in

which the Voice touched a human soul here and there, saw them as lights, lamps of

white above each head. These they overshadowed, standing watch day and night,

watched as in the wise of time the lights increased, each kindled from the

everlasting Emme. Then spoke voice to voice, thought to thought, and in the

written word, Long after these lights had passed beyond the orbit of the earth, their

words and thoughts lived on, still seen in etheric waves as lights whose source

came from an everlasting flame. It was ages ere the Sons of men comprehended the

reality behind all life, could not for countless centuries grasp that the pen was

mightier than the sword. The pen did scribe the written worth, and behind the word

was thought expressed, back of which lay other thoughts, and back of those the

Matchless Voice. For in the first place, He alone gave utterance to the thought.

The son of man was slow to learn. All that is deeply profound grows slowly

upon the soul, Pondering this, he wondered if in a blank mind the Voice would

speak more clearly. For the Voice would come only when certain things had teen

done. in order and with due reverence, like the worship in the higher worlds. The

mind at peace, free of obsessive thoughts, free of bitterness and hate, contented in

itself, would in the stillness magnify the Voice, but in the conditions one normally

finds on earth, the Voice could seldom speak and was drowned by noise.

The son of man longed to tell others of the matchless Voice. He saw fears

and darkness in the mind, giving a quality life ought never to have. Men had many

fears, first of all, that of death. Most mortals were unaware of that which lay

beyond. Those who claimed knowledge, only quoted others’ words or spoke of

truths they did not understand. Original truth had long since been perverted and, in

the course of ages, lost to mind.

In the souls stillness the son of man found inspirational seeds to sow. Here

and there, into minds prepared to receive; the seed germinated and grow. In the

course of time light became a mighty flame. To each great flames hundred others

were drawn. These in time fanned by the winds increased ten-fold. So was there

formed a vortex round the earth, a power to enhance the power through which the

Voice spake. Thus souls of many were touched, and so believed. It was the currents

of vortexian power that carried the words of the matchless Voice, lodged them

of 305

deep in the soul. These were words no other could copy or imitate.

The son of man prayed, “O Matchless Voice, whose Name is spoken in the

wind, behold, the sons of earth have In this cycle heard Thy words, and glorified

Thy Name. Grant us the joy to glorify Thy Name on other worlds, that all shall

know Thee, Thou One Great Spirit of Eternity, E-O-I -H.”

In higher worlds the voice of praise was heard, by those standing in crescent.

It attuned each mind to contemplate the mystery of Jehovih’s love, Above the

throne of a God, there formed a glorious sea of etherial fire. Awe and reverence

deepened, the light grew brighter still, and from the midst of that bright sun came

words in language all could hear. It was the Father’s Voice yet gentle as a

Mother’s. That Voice was indescribable, it spoke of love and power and wisdom

that was without end, could grow in every source forever once that soul had been

awakened by Jehovih’s words, Though words of others could stimulate and lead,

only One had everlasting right to say “Beloved. I AM.”

On wings of prayer rose as one the words of countless millions, of Gods and

Lords and angels wise and holy, whose love flowed like an endless river unto the

Person of that Voice. In each and every one lay memory of the past, when first the

soul had heard Jehovih’s matchless Voice, “My son, be not afraid! The life thou

hast shall be forever. Life of My Life thou art, and none can take this life away,

The life of corpor is as a taste of life; the Life of Es the feast.” The memory was as

if of yesterday rather than of ages past.

The voice of God summed up the mood and will of all. “Beloved, think thou

of the sons of men who live their lives in darkness, and let us do the Father’s Will.”

Through God entranced, the Voice spoke tenderly, in tones that spoke of infinite

patience. “My Sons and daughters, labor thou with Me, that all may hear My

Voice, for only as they hear My Voice is all our joy increased.”

The son of man declared these things to a disbelieving world, to men who

failed to understand a scheme in which total liberty was bequeathed to all. Of

voices they spoke scornfully for darkness dwelt within. For in the darkness of evil

lay power to oppose light, a power forcing disbelief. In every life form the

matchless Voice spoke, in sound, light and harmony. Even in the elements the

of 305

Voice declared a name. The life of corpor so deceived, men looked up at the sky

and said; “It is all in ever-ending void, there is no Voice, It cannot be.”

The Voice spake once, nothing happened. It spoke again, and all the darkness

took flight. Again it spoke, and all was nailed with blazing light. In that light the

Voice rang loud and clear, was heard by all, could not be denied, for all heard the

Matchless Voice proclaim throughout the Universe “There Is no void; I AM.”

of 305


I SHALL GO FORTH IN THY NAME

by Rick Cafero

O Thou Jehovih, Everlasting Father. In thy Light do I covenant with Thee, to

go forth in Thy Name, henceforth forever. I hear Thy call O Father; the love of Thy

Lover, the joy of Thy joys; Thy beautiful voice of countless splendors. I shun the

darkness that lurks in Thy shadow, to embrace the Light of Thy Person. Thy Love

abounds forever, thy creations are endless, Thy wisdom is perfect, of unimaginable

perfection O Thou, All Light Jehovih! Thou art forever the Light that shall lead my

path. To purify myself and help others, and labor for Thy communities of Light,

forever; I shall go forth in Thy Name E-O-IH.

The Rose

of 305

By D. G. Pickard

The early summer rains had encouraged the growth of new wood. The little

shoots, only a few inches long, were a miracle of nature’s inventive genius. Red

and smooth, with thorns yet soft, all disclose the atomic archetype memory that

completed the outline shape to form in silence that which already had been formed

by Mind. Here was a mystery indeed.

How did the wood know the hidden pattern of that which was yet to come?

How did it know how to produce the end result, and even if it knew this, from

whence came the fragrance, earth or Heaven? The rose was a sensitive person, for

in a way everything is a person, in its own right, though its consciousness of being

varies in many worlds. Was it aware that others gazed at it? Did it respond to

human voices? Did it sense the harmony or otherwise, within the range of

consciousness peculiar to itself?

There were several shoots to be seen, some short, some long, as if to illustrate

how in nature nothing is made twice exactly the same. It was a living illustration of

a beauty far surpassing all the other forms of beauty nature sketched on earth, as if

life itself was writing of its own great mystery in the works of creation, so that the

soul could take it in. “I am too great and infinite to be perfectly expressed in any

form or shape, but here I localize part of My Presence the nearest to perfection you

will ever see on earth. Within the limits of form and colour and fragrance I AM. In

this expression of Myself I reach the soul of all. I tell them how I AM myself a

person but not as they believe I AM. For the sum of all these persons is Myself.”

Consider then the rose. `I gave its fragrance by virtue of the fact, I MYSELF

am present. Not as a chemist did mix the elements and compounds, for I take these

from all the places in the Universe and do the mixing Myself. Behind all you see is

that which speaks of Me. For I AM alone the Life of All forever, and all that you

can say concerning this remains for all Eternity in these two words. “Life Is”.

Let us therefore look at the rose with the comprehension of those who see

behind the form of Very Soul of things. See it as a person, an illustration of what

the soul of man must ultimately be like. We could not invent or design the rose, the

human mind could not imagine it from that which was not yet perceived. The

of 305

freshness of the rains is Life indeed. The rain is not the Life, but the means through

which the Life comes. The blood is not the life in man, but the channel through

which the life enlarges and makes the form expand. The ethe is not the life, but the

substance through which the Life permeates all the Universe. Behind the Ethe is

the atomic counterpart of all the atoms, molecules and neutrons, and this is but the

carrier of the Life. The Life is everywhere and in its boundlessness liveth all that is

of form and shape. The Life itself is E-O-Ih within, beyond, and ever

comprehensible in its entirety. How came the thought merely by contemplating a

rose? We look at things, and rarely see them as symbols of greater more profound

truths, yet every one hath speech to say if he will but enter silence and listen to the

language.

So the rose came to be a most profound emblem in the signs and sacred

symbols of the Brotherhoods of’ Earth. So honored they the rose as to give it place

of prominence in the centre of a cross. So numbered they the petals as to make

even these have deep significance. For as they unfolded, it was like Truth, Infinite

Truth, opening gradually, inside revealing many layers in that which men called

‘Truth.”

In the East, the mystics beheld the Lotus in the way the West considered the

Rose. Unto each the form was different, but the underlying truth was the same.

These spoke of a perfection beyond the mind of man to see. Perfection was unique

to each, and in a way each had to strive to perfectly express itself. It could not be

stamped or mass produced in Heaven. Perfection was never the same to each.

Perfection spoke of an excellence to be attained, and even when attained, was not

Perfection for beyond lay even greater possibilities of excellence.

One great profound lesson remained yet to be perceived. All things in

harmony with Jehovih the Great Creator do not toil or fight and resist. They grow

at peace within themselves, and become themselves by being One with Him. And

this applied to all who live. It seemed the Rose was saying “develop through your

natural self, try not to copy others. Be not an actor showing many parts, but

become yourself— the self that is yourself. Be One with Him who made me so and

he will do the rest.” For the rose was its natural self. It simply responded to all the

elements as they played upon its nature, receiving from each, resisting none. Surely

of 305

the soul was in a way like this, requiring all the elements to do their work. All that

man was called upon to do was ensure the soil was good, and the air fresh and

clean, the weeds kept down, and in the course of time nature would do all the work.

The rose was a symbol of a perfection none could excel. He who created it meant it

to be a lesson all could read for in this form the Inexpressible and beyond all Forms

had written clearly what Perfection was.

Message

In every age, the Creator speaks through instruments on earth, saying: “Love

one another. You are My divine sons and daughters. Love is the means of creating

order, harmony and beauty.

Love is the Ruling Power of the Universe. Practice love, and you shall be

renewed in spirit, and liberated from the causes of suffering. I am the love within

you. I am the happiness you are seeking.”

MESSAGE FROM ABOVE

Channeled through Agnes Castle

Direct always thy purest thoughts into the ethers for only the purest thoughts

will be taken up and be magnified and recognized. Etheric substance has powers of

tremendous values when directed properly and can save the world, enhance its

beauty, release tortuous souls from their prisons of agony. Beauteous thoughts of

the past are the bright lights of today!

As the thoughts take form coalesce, attract each other, their structure

enlarges, condenses and what you term reality or manifestation is put upon the

world. From this thou canst see that ALL IS THOUGHT! God has given each of

His children this magnificent power to use as he chooses, as he wills.

The correct direction of thought will be the Golden Years of Tomorrow! Be

thou EVER coming up into the higher structure of thought and power will be

advanced to you to be used in ever greater enlargement. We are your Faithful

Brothers of a Past Era guiding, directing and pulling you to the higher, lighter,

more glorious spheres of evolvement!

of 305

THE HERMETIC CLEF

By Jim Dennon

For those concerned about when the Kingdom colonies will really begin,

there exists a more definite time-table (the Hermetic Clef of the ancient

astrologers).

First of all, the Zodiac signs are disassociated from the physical star

constellations. Stars do not influence us directly.

This confirms Oahspe, but the 30 degrees of each sign that delineate the

spiritual roadways, themselves do.

The Great Solar Orbit is 25,920 years, divided into 12 Zodiac signs (30

degrees of space), of 2,160 years each. Each sign is further divided into seven 308

year “governing cycles” (corresponding to Dans). The exact 2,160-year Zodiac

sign cycle operates in conjunction with the variable (3,072-year average)

civilization ARC cycle.

The “governing cycles” (Darns) of the past and future, according to the

Hermetic Clef, are:

AGE OF PISCES (280 BCE - 1880 CE) Past history generally known –

280 BCE - 29 CE Sun Law-giver sent (Joshu)

29-337 CE Venus True Religion went underground

337-646 Mercury False Religions take over

646-954 Moon Dark Age

954-1263 Saturn Lowest point in the Arc cycle

1263-1572 Jupiter Reformation/Awakening

1572-1880 Mars Intellect/Inventions/War

of 305

AGE OF AQUARIUS (1880-4040 CE) The Present and Future

1880 - 2188 CE Sun Cleaning Cycle (Oahspe sent)

A period of imperial greatness... empires will shine.

Intellect will have full play.

Time and space annihilated by new transportation / communication.

Churches, creeds and dogmas will be destroyed.

From their ashes, a New Religion shall arise with the motto: “Veritas

Excelsior” (Truth Above).

This era will proclaim the rights of man, essentially the “Age of Reason”

dreamed of by Giordano Bruno and Thomas Paine.

Science and Religion will become blended.

2188-2497 CE Venus Love Cycle/Peace on earth

Women will become man’s equal, socially and politically.

Intuition will become superior to intellect.

The occult will be taught in universities.

Astronomers will again become astrologers.

Drugs will no longer be needed, and will join the religious dogmas and

scientific noodleisms of today.

Then, shall nations abolish fleets and standing armies, kings lay aside their

scepters, and the Universal Brotherhood begin. (Jehovih’s Kingdom on Earth.)

2497 - 2806 CE Mercury Apex of the Arc

The highest governing cycle in the current Kosmon Arc.

The age of genius, assimilating all the stores of knowledge treasured up by

past ages.

Adeptship will be the highest ambition of the noblest minds.

Science and art will reach their highest perfection.

2806 - 3114 CE Moon The decline begins.

From the summit, we begin to retrograde.

of 305

The mind begins to stagnate, and nations begin to relapse into ignorance once

more.

The “western civilization” will not reach it’s next apex until 7300 CE.

The predictions of Nostradamus cover about the same period of one sign,

2242 years from the year 1555 to 3797 CE. Only he lived in a time he could not

spell it out, and had to resort to obscure verses which became clear after the fact.

of 305

A JAPANESE NEWBROUGH?

Pete. Barnes

In 1887, about six years after Newbrough revealed Oahspe, a tremendously

mystical woman entered the mountains alone to practice religious disciplines. Her

name was Nao Deguchi (1837-1918). When she was in her fifties, after a life of

great hardships, she started writing divinely revealed material. This material or

scriptures are prophetic nature. (She predicted the World Wars, the invasion of

Japan, famines, the China-Japan war, the atom bomb.)Her book of revelation calls

on people to return to an awareness of the sacred mind to create new structures of

social Justice and a valuo system compatible with survival. Her written (200,000

pages in length) struck a universal brotherhood theme which was unique for a

Japanese group: She wrote: There is one God, the Original Root of the Universe;

infinitely older than, Amelerasu, Omikami, the Great Sun Goddess from whom the

Japanese imperial family claims direct descendence. All men are His children and

contain His essence. Hence all men are equal or equivalent and all racial, creedal,

national, social apartheids are delusional and sinful. To realize this is to reconstruct

the world and to found the Kingdom of Heaven on this earth. For the over 300,000

followers of these revealed scriptures calling themselves Oomoto (meaning great

divine origin) are vegetarian in diet who eat whole grains and vegetables and some

seafoods but no meat. There are no professional priests in Comoto. No one makes

his living by performing as a priest. The religion, which is humanistic, was the first

religious group to stage protests against atomic testing and remilitarization after the

war. In 1935 at the time Japan was a fascist ..state,. The government decided that

Oomoto and its followers were to be eradicated. In one night thousands of these

humanistic people were arrested. All the Oomoto sanctuaries, head-quarters, and

along with all office and branches were dynamited. I have written to these people

but have not heard anything from them.

If anyone would like to try to contact these people write David Kid 12-19

Kusunoki cho Ashiza City, 659, Japan.

of 305

PRAYER TO EOIH

By RICK CAFERO

Forever is Thy Light O Creator. In the Ever Presence of Thy indwelling spirit

I see Thy Light. Beautiful are Thy creations O Father. The worlds Thou createdst

are for the joy and happiness of Thy children; Thy voice grows forever in our

souls like beautiful flowers, as stars of the morning we go afar on the endless trails

ahead, beyond the skies. O Thou Almighty, how could I not remember Thee, in all

Thy creations! Thy wisdom and perfection are found in the least of Thy parts, in

sweet fumes and beautiful colors, in strains of whistling pines and running rivers

and rolling clouds. Rock layers of mountains and canyons show the symmetry of

Thy hand in millions of years. O the magnitude of Thy works, O Creator. Who

fashioned the boundless firmament of which even Gods know not the extent; who

adorned the heavens with countless billions of worlds and stars boundless forever.

None can deny Thee, Thou Ever Present. It is by Thy Hand all things are! It is by

Thy Breath all things moveth and liveth. All parts are Thine, O Thou Great Spirit

Jehovih! All Knowledge is Thee.

When will man have faith in Thee? Can he be persuaded to seek the All

Light, to live the All Pure, to follow Thy commandments in full? Has he found the

Joy and peace of Thy chosen; united, living together, with songs of love and praise

of Thee, O Father! 0 Thou Creator, Thy chosen are living proof of Thy hand upon

them. Thou art mighty in their souls and gentle in their hearts, with good words and

helping hands. Yea, Thy followers are living sermons, whose works are now

become cornerstones for the redemption of the entire world. O Thou Eternal

Ancestor and Quickener of all things, Thou art the power to accomplish. Thou hast

not gone away and left Thy children to labor for themselves. Thou art always near

and ready to those who desire to serve Thee, with a willing heart. O that man could

rind the happiness of Thy loves; that he could see Thy emancipated heavens. O that

he knew the meaning of the word, salvation!

Thou has said unto man; Have faith in thy Creator. I am the foundation for all

good and all progress. Cultivate My Voice within thy soul and thou shalt rejoice in

thy life forevermore. Ever those who had faith in Thee needed Thy

of 305

commandments. Their communities were blessed by Thy hand. But those who had

not faith in Thee went down to destruction. Their cities were ruined, their wars

multiplied on the earth, they were overrun with spirits of darkness. Will man ever

learn from the mistakes of his predecessors? When will he understand that Thou

alone art everlasting and all endurable? All other things vanish, but Thy wisdom

endures with Light forever. O that man would not lock his soul up against Thee,

but trust in Thee forevermore. Forever art Thou the joy of my soul, the love of my

speech, O Father. I will not complain against Thee; Thy hand is always put forth in

the furtherance of Thy Kingdoms. All honor and glory unto Thee, O Jehovih, Thou

Great Spirit! Thou art greatest and mightiest of all. Thy love will find its way in the

hearts of even the most unripe who turn about and proclaim Thee forevermore. Thy

Light only will I search for, O Eoih, Thou All Person, lead Thou me, by Thy Light

will I serve, forever! Amen.

of 305

OAHSPE’S KOSMON AND COMMUNISM

John F. Lindh

“The Photo-Copied 1882 edition of Oahspe published by Ray Palmer of

Amerst, Wisconsin states in the Book of Eskra that the heavenly record of heavenly

events in the Arc of Bon is 3300 years in duration which ends with the last event in

the Book of Es; the commencement of the Olympic Games in 1896.”

John Newbrough, who revised the 1882 edition of Oahspe in 1891, changed

the Book of Eskra from 3300 years to 3000 years for the purpose of making the

two books of Eskra and Es total to 3400 years; the actual length of the Arc of Bon.

However, John Newbrough died before 1896 and therefore did not grasp the

significance of the 3300 years stated in the original edition of Oahspe. Had he lived

to see the commencement of the Olympic Games in 1896 which is the last event in

the Book of Es, he would have understood the significance of the 3300 years in the

original edition of Oahspe. The significance is that the last one hundred years of the

Arc of Bon are not mentioned in Oahspe. Therefore 1896 is 100 years (3

generations or 99 years) before the end of the Arc of Bon. Consequently, Kosmon

arrives 99 years after 1896 or 1995.

Apparently the Olympic Games is the event referred to in Chapter 18 in the

Book of Inspiration concerning the event which was to take place subsequent to

1881 before the date of Kosmon could be determined.

Finally, it is now clear that it was always possible to determine the date that

Kosmon arrives beginning in 1896 when the Olympic Games first began.

Another matter which Faithists should give their attention at this time is that

communism must and will pass away before the Creator’s Kingdom on Earth can

be established. This Kingdom is scheduled to be established in the U.S.A. 33 years

after Kosmon arrives. Its subsequent establishment in the other countries of the

world must be preceded by the end of communism since Communist Countries

would not permit their citizens any free choice to perform a way of life different

than their type of communism. As a result, the writer believes that two generations

or 66 years after communism began; that is 1963, the world will see the end or the

of 305

beginning of the end of Communism as it is now established. The only form of

Communism which can succeed is that which was designed by the Creator as set

forth in Oahspe’s Book of Jehovih’s Kingdom on Earth.

INVOCATION

May the All Father show us the light we seek.

Give us of His Love, Wisdom and Power. There is a peace that passeth all

corporeal understanding; it abides in the hearts of those who truly serve Jehovih.

There is a power that maketh all things new; it lives and moves in those who know

the All List as One. May that Peace reign over us and that Power uplift us till we

stand in worlds Etherean with all our brothers and see them face to face. May

Jehovih’s Blessings pour forth in all the worlds as Peace.

THE CREATOR and ourselves

Atman is the self in us, AT-MA — it comes from its root words. “At” means

that which holds. There is something that holds the psycho physiological organism.

It is something that sustains this body. This body has come from food, is sustained

by food, and should go into food. But something greater than food or matter is

energy. Food and substance is converted from energy, and that something which

holds energy is mind. Energy is converted from mind. But there is something else

which holds mind or the psyche itself, this nucleus of the psyche and that is called

atman. So atman means that which is imperishable and that which holds

everything. That is the inmost self in us. Without that, these outer forms of being

cannot be held, cannot exist. For example we move in this space and the body has

its being in this space. Space is the medium in which all physical existence is

existing. But where do our thoughts exist? in what space? That is also a space and

we call it the space of consciousness. The spiritual reality, the spiritual plane which

transcends all this we can call the real dimension. This is the dimension which

transcends the whole of the universe, the dimension that is the existence within

which all spaces (physical and conscious) are held. It is an aspect of the Creator

and so we call it infinite. It is also the Creator in us, the unseen seer in us, the

unheard hearer in us. Without it we cannot think. Without it we cannot see. It is the

same thing that sees in the eyes. This self in us, this root consciousness, though it

of 305

identifies with the psycho physiological organism, is very subtle like an atom and

infinite at the same time. So long as we identify with the body, mind, intellect, and

ego, we have understanding that is nourished and tutored by the different

knowledge of the world. Then we cannot realize that which is infinite. But the

moment we cease identifying ourselves with material things, that exposes us to the

spiritual knowledge. We realize immediately our atomicity for we are almost like

atoms. Immediately we realize we are infinite; this is the root truth. Here we realize

the inconceivable, unthinkable truth, the Creator. Then, in becoming in tune with

Him, we become more perfect in this world. The other world is not only

somewhere hidden in the clouds and up beyond the stars. It is also in us. Everyday

we go into the other world, and we come back from it without knowing it or

knowing what is — is. This is a defect. The Creator is in man, the root of his being,

not what the average man conceives Him to be. The Creator must be unthinkable

by man.

If we can understand the Creator by mind, that means that we are

understanding only that mental form of him. He must be in our understanding —

but beyond our finite comprehension. So we are one with that infinity and we

cannot even conceive of ourselves by the use of the mind.

Seeing the Aura

Half a dozen members of our group are able to see the human aura. Of these,

children see it most easily. They see auras around people all the time, but can be

too busy on some days to look or to remember what they see. From these people

and a couple of small books of theirs I’ve picked up the following odd bits of

information.

Your aura is a constantly changing electromagnetic field. It changes when

you feel well and when you don’t, changes in size, and in color. When a person is

losing energy there is a shimmering haze of white on top of the head. In addition,

your thoughts influence your aura. For example, there was a school teacher who

noticed that whenever a person was going to lie or he evasive, a horizontal streak

of yellow green shot across their aura over the top of the head — it never failed!

How nice it would he if everyone could read auras, could even see them; then we

of 305

could all be perfectly candid with one another and there would be no reason for

anything else.

The aura about a woman’s body is a little different than it is about a man’s

and the aura about a pregnant or nursing mother’s body is unique.

People with no auras are about to die. One person was about to enter an

elevator he had rung for but when it arrived decided he would rather took at reel

sweaters so did not enter when the elevator arrived and the doors swung open. As it

left he thought there was something peculiar about all the people in the elevator —

no auras; and within a minute the cable broke and all the occupants went crashing

to their death!

A small hard very harsh grey or orange-brown aura belongs to a person with

no spiritual aspirations. A business man whose sole ambition is connected with

profits and wealth will have an orange and red aura. If the auric body is encased in

a hard shell no one can break through it to approach the person and they will be

very lonely. Only the person himself can change it, by becoming more cheerful and

generous. Broadmindedness and generosity makes for pink in the aura. The

religious nature makes it blue. When the reds of passions have been lifted and

transmuted, they mix with the colors of intellect and may appear mauve. The colors

of intellect are charged with blues, sometimes lemon.

Saintly people who give of themselves for the good of others may have a

bright yellow aura. When one has been ill and is recovering much of the aura may

be light green.

There is an odic force connected with the aura and when in proximity of

other people we are taking in and giving off something electronic all the time. In

connection with this we know of an important member of one group upon whose

right no one ever sits or steps—and all are directed to the person’s left. It seems

that the person on the right takes in or absorbs some electronic something which is

essentially spiritual; while at the same time the person on the left absorbs in

exchange something essentially physical. No wonder it is so difficult to be in a

roomful of people for any length of time no matter how much we like to be friendly

and sociable. And no wonder it also depends so much on the particular group of

of 305

people (as well as where we sit or stand.) It would, in part, explain why the extreme

drain is felt from being in crowds.

From the children I learned a basic but fascinating fact the books don’t

mention: that the aura does not move as fast as its owner does, it trails behind a

little more slowly. It was suggested by an aura-seeing person present that an

objection to crowds by a sensitive might have, on that basis alone, a rational

explanation, since in a crowded store, one might be walking through the trailing

auras of many persons before getting out.

There is a way to develop auric sight. Take a magnet to bed and get in the

habit of looking at its emanations under the covers in the dark. To develop a better

awareness of colors you see in auras place strips of colored paper in different

envelopes, relax, breathe deeply and slowly till you can hold no more air, hold it,

bear the full lung pressure down on the pit of the stomach for a few seconds, exhale

gradually and all the time envision the seven main colors. Red, orange, yellow

green, blue indigo, and violet. Imagine a globe of light constantly changing color.

Then hold one of the envelopes in your hand or against the middle of your forehead

and try to visualize the color within it.

of 305


Soul Development

By Walter Devoe

The Creator is the Presence of Intelligence in every degree of nature; for all

nature is His Nature, and every form is a portion of His Intelligence. We have

senses which perceive His physical nature spread be fore us in inconceivable

grandeur. For He is every where, in the sunset, in the rainbow, in beautiful people,

in the mountains, in the seashores. We also have more or less developed spiritual

perceptions, which as yet but dimly perceive His spiritual nature and its angelic

inhabitants.

All forms of His Nature are Good in His sight, even though apparently evil in

our sight; because all are developing forms of’ His intelligence. Ignorance is but a

negative form of Intelligence. Ignorance begets experience, and from experience

comes wisdom. In all creation we see His Presence coming to consciousness and in

the Spirit of’ Understanding, we see as the Creator sees, that All is Good.

The great Consciousness of Jehovih is in your soul awaiting realization. Your

intelligence is good. All your good feelings are of the Creator — the Creator

acting, loving, giving out through you. When you express good feelings constantly,

you make those around you feel good, and awaken the Intelligence in them. Thus

you arouse their divine nature and attract them to the good in you and into

attunement with the Creator.

The Creator is an inconceivable power in you now, in your thoughts and in

your feelings; the very Power that enables you to will and to do.

You live from the Omnipotent Power day and night, and by the right use of

your thought and will, this creative Intelligence will come into expression through

you.

Think the truth that All is Good because all is the Creator’s nature, and He

will vitalize your faith and manifest in your life and affairs.

Feel Love for all and you will feel the very Life of your Creator blessing alt

of 305

creation through you. Your thoughts are receptacles, living cups for Healing, for

the Healing Spirit. When your thoughts are so pure that they see no evil, they are

luminous with Divine Intelligence, and enable you to see with the understanding of

a God into Jehovih’s purposes.

How do you develop faith? You can develop faith hourly by affirming

thoughts of Truth and generating feelings of Love. This is the hidden secret of how

to regenerate your entire mind and body.

The truth is that The Creator is in you, you can know His inspiration and you

can voice His words of power.

When you say “I Am” it is an affirmation and you speak the name and power

of Divine Being. This should never be said unless something very positive follows

it.

Your present mind, body and affairs may have been generated from limited

mortal thoughts and feelings and unless you are very high in grade indeed, this is

so. Then you take the name of your Creator in vain when you affirm the limited

beliefs of mortal thought and feeling if you say “I Am”, for example ~ Am” sinful,

weak, poor, sick, unsuccessful . According to this limited faith you have created

limitations.

Now you can re-generate or reform your mind, body, and affairs from the

faith born of the Thought of Jehovih, the Creator.

Your thought is your faith. Your faith has been as strong or as weak as your

thoughts. All the possibilities of a new, strong faith are opened to you as you

regenerate your mind by the development of positive thoughts of Truth. Do not

separate feeling from thought, for it is the life of thought. You can know the

Creator only through your own thought; only as you can conceive of the beauty of

His ideas, and express their quality through your own nature. But you can know as

much of Divine Love and Wisdom as you can generate through your thoughts and

feelings.

The possibilities, the potentialities of a God exist within you, and by daily

study and practice you can build yourself a spiritual temple of thought which will

of 305

reveal the Health, Beauty, and Perfection of a soul of Godlike grade.

Soul development requires as much study and practice as the learning of any

art or science. The student should consecrate part of his time daily to the cultivation

of his soul nature. He should retire into a room alone, or into the quietness of a

secluded retreat close to nature and nature’s peace. Material work and plans, and all

thought of material things, should be put aside, and the whole mind be given to

deep study; not in extended reading, but to the application of the lessons and

thoughts that strengthen the spiritual nature and give character and dominion.

As your mind, by the exercise of praise, prayer, affirmation and blessings, is

lifted from the negative to the positive state, from the mortal to the immortal range

of feelings, you will become aware that you are communing with the angelic

Beings who are the perfected Ideas of the Divine Mind. They will touch the inner

springs of your soul life as only awakened souls can. They will hold your mind in

the emanations of Divine Thought, and quicken your soul to a new consciousness

of its power as the expressed Image of Divine Wisdom.

As you cultivate communion with Jehovih’s Thoughts, and keep yourself

positive with the faith and love of your Creator — omnipresent and omnipotent

Love, — you will become one with the angelic Army of the Almighty, and grow in

the Power to serve all humanity.

of 305


LET THERE BE LIGHT

by Ann Wigmore D.D.

The honey bee takes nectar from the flower and change s it to sweetness. The

spider takes nectar from the flower and changes it to poison. This is how two minds

can create differences. If we have fear in our hearts, it should be changed to faith. If

we have hate in our hearts, let love replace it. If we harbor envy, let’s change it to

understanding. If we have anger in our hearts, let’s change it to forgiveness. If we

have greed in our hearts, let’s change it to generosity. If we have grief in our hearts,

let joy replace it. If we are disturbed, let patience reign. If we are guilty of gluttony,

let us discipline ourselves.

Such changes, mastery over impulse, will enable us to live happily and

helpfully. Eventually our spirit will make itself manifest to those around us and

create a better world in which to live. Soon we will take pleasure in reaping the

good from what we sow.

The Creator is manifested by life. The plants, the animals, and man reflect

Him. He is Love, Kindness, and Compassion. Some people visualize the Creator as

lightness and purity. Some see Him as the principles of Mother Nature’s laws.

Others prefer a characterization of merely unlimited abundance. Some designate

Him as the Creator of substance and order. The Creator is understood by some to

be the exemplification of Truth. Therefore, when we utilize the principles of truth

in our daily lives, we actually become God-like. An artist exemplifies the order of

line, color and form. A musician uncovers the law of harmony. We help a neighbor

with no ulterior motive of expecting something in return. This is what we mean by

finding the Creator through each other and discovering Him in ourselves.

We are created to express God by serving others. The Universal Creator is

the Creative Spirit of all life, the Creative Spirit of our individual life. Our bodies

are the instruments through which the Creator manifests His Nature as

individualized forms of life.

The unlimited potential of our individualized creative spirit is progressively

of 305

released and revealed as we develop proficiency in the use of the Creator’s

Universal Life Directing Law. We develop this proficiency as we resourcefully

direct and apply our skills, knowledge, judgment and possessions toward

improving everything and every form of life around us, and in directing each of

them toward perfecting and completing the Creator’s manifestation through us and

through all other forms of life on this planet.

The Creator’s Spirit within us is eternal. We disembody as we remove

outworn clothes or discard useless machines. One body after another lie in graves,

but the Spirit that used them is marching on, acquiring more and more creativeness

and understanding and expanding proficiency in the use of the law and in

manifesting the Creator’s Spiritual Nature as life forever.

We are in amidst of the eternal surge of becoming creatively self-dependent,

while also not hurting anything. Instead, we improve all things in form, in

usefulness, in function, and in relation to the completion of the Universal Whole.

Search for and create opportunities to test, to expand, and to refine your creative

skills and understanding in the use of the Creator’s gifts. Thus resolved and

engaged, our every moment becomes an edifice. We become true, we scorn trifles,

and we embrace the Creator’s aims.

of 305


The Reality Way:

PUTTING IT ALL TOGETHER WITH THE REALITY WAY

(“Evaluating every little incident in your daily experience to ferret out what

role some emotion is playing so you can extinguish it and enjoy more inner

freedom and power.”)

by Tom C. Lyle

Making a practical application of the principles of the Reality Way requires a

preliminary period of conditioning while you get the feel of the basic philosophy.

Practical use of the concepts will be easier as you become mentally adjusted to

non-reaction and free yourself from indulging emotions in any form ― whether

they are regarded as negative or considered desirable or positive.

The difficult mental adjustment to the Reality Way will be to accept the

reality that all emotions are unreal and phony. You are happy or elated only to the

degree you were prepared to be depressed. You can’t indulge a thought or emotion

except by acknowledging that you are indulging in the opposite also. The truly

effective and productive life is spent in the golden mean, that contented and serene

middle path in which you know, with the Power of Certainty, what is going on.

One of the immediate benefits from this sort of mental conditioning program

will be gained in your rest and sleep cycles. When you can’t relax or sleep, it is

always emotions as the cause. Without emotions, your whole body is free to relax,

rest or steep, as your particular physical needs of the moment dictate. Sleep and

relaxation are both vital to maintaining vitality and energy. This should be ample

proof to you that the perfect and natural way of life is one in which you are not

worried, fearful, excited, exalted, anxious or or elated. They all interfere with your

natural physical need for sleep. This is the scientific evidence that the Reality Way

is valid, proof that all emotion is artificial and fraudulent.

The key to natural sleep is mind control when you are lying in bed, all

thinking is in the form of daydreaming. What you are thinking is not happening, it

of 305

is completely an illusion. If you are thinking of things past, you cannot change

them. If you are thinking of tomorrow, it will never happen the way you are

imagining. You are simply wasting time and energy thinking about what is not

happening NOW, And you are losing out on the energy rebuilding sleep that you

need in this NOW if you are going to contend with tomorrow at all,

Tomorrow’s events will take place exactly in the manner you deal with them

when they happen ― tomorrow! So the only thing you can do during the right

before is to rebuild your mental and physical energy to deal with tomorrow’s

circumstances.

This often requires firm personal discipline. The little gremlins of thought

that trigger emotional reactions have had you enslaved for years, and you can’t

completely rid yourself of them in an instant. You need to methodically counsel

yourself about the illusion of idle thought. Bright your mind to firm accountability

now. When your mind drifts, brace it up again. Experience the tremendous

difference in your conscious feeling. When you focus your awareness to NOW,

you can physically feel every emotion drain away. Realize the complete freedom

from all emotional bondage so evident in our daily experience. We can have this

freedom only by abandoning all emotions.

The immediate question raised is what you are to do with your mind if you

suppress all thoughts. It will take some adjusting, but you will soon realize that a

mind Free from all imaginings becomes a receptor of symbols. You can just lay

there and observe what is screened for you.

These designs or objects should prompt no emotional reaction. In time, the

symbols being projected to you will become significant and meaningful as a source

of personal guidance. But it is first important that all emotional reactions be

eliminated.

You needn’t fear that your blanket rejection of all external controls and

influences will leave you in a state of chaos. The fact that an emotionless mind

drifts off into refreshing sleep is evidence that your true life style can be released

only through that same approach. When you wipe away the chaotic life style in

which you are now trying to exist, a truly serene and productive life experience will

of 305

be a natural transformation. You will find yourself being led and guided into the

perfect pathway. What is most important, you will experience a Power of Certainty

in which you will know it is right!

Emotionless sleep is the doorway to complete and perfect health for your

whole body. With all of its research and experimentation, medical science has

discovered that more than 85 percent of all illness and disease is emotion-induced.

Most of this illness cures itself when the victim is so emotionally exhausted

that natural forces are able to take over and heal. Clear away all of the emotions in

the first place, and your physiological system can correct itself of any debris, twist

or obstructions.

Your present world is a random crazy quilt with no design and no meaning. It

is the result of your acceptance and indulging the impulses and emotional

blunderings from all sources about you. You can’t order others to change their

chaotic living, as the power to change lies wholly within each individual’s personal

power to choose. But you can almost magically transform the world in which you

are living by understanding the mess that emotions are creating and by

methodically shutting them off from your experience.

You needn’t try to explain your new way of life or try to teach others about

it. In a very short time your results are going to be so dramatic that Reality Way

will make itself obvious to all who will observe. Don’t worry about whether or not

others will take advantage of what they can see to be a good thing. Wouldn’t you?

Once your mind is cleared of emotional rubbish, there will be no problem in

recognizing the difference between illusion and reality. To condition your mind to

keep your vision in this regard ever clear, just review the following few guidelines:

I will not accept any feelings of loss, separation or rejection, as they have no

power whatever except as I accept them.

I will not accept limitation, restriction or judgment. I judge no one else and

accept no one’s judgment of me. I do not crave or desire anything or anyone, since

the cost of such desires in loss of self-control through manipulation by others.

This new way of life can he applied to any situation or set of circumstances.

of 305

Just refuse to react to impulse in any manner. You can rebuild your burned down

house. You can recoup your financial losses. Emotions will never cure a hangnail,

but they will quickly freeze you into a helpless and immobile state in which you

can do absolutely nothing for yourself or for anyone else.

Let your inner forces express the greatest potential of your life experience.

Just don’t interfere in the process by projecting unreal and absurd emotions to

create a perversion of what your life is supposed to be. But you will never know

what that perfect experience can be until you allow it to happen. But to know what

that is, you must eliminate all the unreal rubbish of emotions.

It is understandable that some circumstances make it very difficult to remain

uninvolved emotionally ― such as practicing mouth-to-mouth resuscitation!

However, resuscitation is a perfect example of why it is important to condition

yourself to remain uninvolved, in every set of circumstances. The vital purpose off

the resuscitation has nothing to do with your personal emotions. Your success

depends to a considerable degree on completely separating the influence of your

physical efforts and any vestige of inner personal emotions.

The general concept is true of any of your efforts. Whatever you may set

about to do, it will depend how free you are from emotional distraction as to how

successful you may be in your endeavors. Emotions will always lead you astray, so

it is important to observe and to understand this truth. Recognize how foolish and

meaningless your daily experiences become as emotions operate to distort and

confuse you. Observing this will make it easier for you to decide to abandon all

emotions and to free your efforts to enjoy effective and meaningful living.

Practicing the Reality Way becomes a very effective and satisfying way of

life when you once make even a small start. You will be able to immediately see

the changes take place and will welcome each small improvement, As you feel this

change, you will be inspired to try harder. Nothing inspires you to success more

than being a winner. Proof is what you need, and the dramatic change which

involvement will bring into your experience will charge and recharge your efforts

in self-fulfillment.

A system which proves itself needs no hard selling and the Reality Way is

of 305

such a system. The more you try it, the more successful you will be and the more

motivated you will become, You will be evaluating every little incident in your

daily experience to ferret out what role some emotion is playing so you can

extinguish it and enjoy more inner freedom and power.

In every line of human activity you can make the same case for success

through firm control of emotions. Even in the “game of love” ― certainly the

emotional of activities ― those who are most ardently pursued are those showing

the least interest and the least involvement. It is the emotionally charged pursuers

who suffer nervous breakdowns , heartbreaks and general anguish. Success goes to

those least involved emotionally.

The secret power most ardently acclaimed by professional coaches and

athletes is complete concentration. And just what is concentration but the complete

banishment of emotions. It is the total and complete focusing of your attention and

awareness on the instant of NOW, focused upon what IS just this moment.

Remember that there is no reality whatever to anything else. The top professional

tennis player today has been known to blow his performance completely when for

one instant he allows a missed ball or close call arouse emotion within him. It is all

over, and the match is lost. This is an extreme case, but to lesser degrees this truth

governs your success in everything you will ever do.

What happens when two great athletes both achieve perfect awareness in

competition? If they are both perfectly AWAKE-AWARE throughout the match, it

won’t make any difference to either one off them! Why? Because neither of them

will react, no matter how the match goes. Each of these perfect athletes will know

that emotion is sickness, and that freedom from all emotional reaction is perfect

inner health.

Recent extensive studies by psychologist have confirmed that circumstances

or events have no direct or inevitable response in feelings or in attitudes. Identical

circumstances create different feelings in each person. The conclusion reached by

these studies is that each person individually chooses every feeling he has, and is

therefore completely responsible for his own happiness, misery, frustration or

contentment.

of 305

This also confirms the truth of the Reality Way. If you choose every feeling,

then all feelings or emotions are products of your thought patterns or imagination.

You can invent any emotion you choose, so all emotions are proven to be

imaginary and unreal.

Athletes who set records do so under the power of a concentration completely

void of all emotion. Anxious anticipation, fear of defeat or even desire to win, will

drain away the very energy you critically need to succeed. Ironic as it seems, you

can win only if you banish all mental concern about winning or losing. You can

win only IF you don’t really care one way or tine other. Your Power of Certainty

will make you so completely confident that your performance is meaningful, that

anyone else’s evaluation is irrelevant.

The Reality Way truth is that you will win when you decide that winning is

your personal right, and that you are going to let victory happen to you in a

completely natural manner.

Don’t be mislead by the appearance of anxious emotions in people

overcoming great obstacles. We can overcome anything with the Power of

Certainty, but no man overcomes anything in the throes of emotional effort, no

matter how it appears to be happening. He gets well from injury or illness or he

recovers financial losses only at the end off all that emotional display.

The perfect and balanced way of life for which you deeply hunger and pursue

can be experienced only under the unemotional Power of Certainty. This vital inner

force comes to the surface of your daily experience whenever you drain away every

vestige of personal emotions.

Victory or healing comes only after all of your emotions have been drained

out ― when the only choice you have left is to let yourself get well.

In gambling, the anxious loser continues to lose. The fearful cancer patient

watches as his deepest rears grow and overwhelm him. The man who fears for his

job hastens the date on which he will lose that job.

The scriptural advice to “be not concerned about what you eat, what you

wear, etc.”, is based on the Reality Way. This is no advocacy for poverty. Those

of 305

who teach the virtue off poverty are all liars. Understanding the Reality Way, one

can see that this spiritual revelation is telling you that abundance, victory and

perfect personal health is attainable only alter you lose all desire and concern about

them. Accept these things as the natural life style to which you are entitled.

Evangelists and faith healers pan up great emotional Flames with their

impassioned rantings, and they generate response from thousands at a time to he

saved from sin or healed of their diseases or physical disabilities.

Miracle healings do take place and some of them happen at revivals. But the

healing transformation can take place only after emotions are drained. All emotions

are unreal, so nothing real can happen until those emotions are gone. It is all just

that simple.

A constant question raised by students is, “What should I do in fulfilling the

Reality Way?” In the absence of emotions, inactivity is anticipated. But there is no

need to accept this.

A perfect life style will involve a contented interaction with others, with each

contributing the efforts of his personal talents and receiving all needed benefits

from others as they are able and led to perform.

For now, simply carry on your part. In the absence of many distorting

emotions, your Power of Certainty will present you with opportunities and

circumstances to perform. Just do whatever comes your way to be done, without

emotion or personal concern.

You can choose not to let others hurt you. Thinking affects feelings more

than external circumstances. We cause our own feelings by our reactions to others.

The same circumstances may upset one person and leave someone else quite

undisturbed.

We give others the power to make us fell bad, to hurt us, to upset us. If you

refuse to give others that power, then you will not feel these emotions. We also

need to get over any idea that we can hurt or upset anyone else. They can get upset

only when they choose to be upset. It has nothing to do with you directly, nor is it

the direct result of anything you may say or do to them.

of 305

The Reality Way in your life cannot be described here. Each person will

experience it differently. All I can do is urge you to eliminate all emotional

responses as completely as you can. Immediately, you will experience

improvement. The more completely you banish emotion, the more progress you

will make. This is the proof of the system. As you try it, you will sea how

effectively it will work for you.

Without emotions, we would have no disease, no violence, no crime, no

poverty, no competition, no defeats, no accidents and no “sins”. The new life style

will be that of complete personal contentment, ample abundance, inner peace and

total satisfaction.

Ideally, everyone will follow the Reality Way to make this earth a true

paradise, but in the meantime, you can transform your own life and experience a

personal paradise in your daily life. It is rot necessary for you to change everyone

else, and actually you cannot directly do so. You have the power within yourself to

chose the Reality Way and so does everyone else. This will be released when you

shut out the chaotic emotional world around you, and each parson must make that

personal decision or himself.

If at first you slip and react emotionally to some external event, never

condemn yourself or feel guilty. This reaction simply makes things all the more

difficult for you. Turn your mistake into a gain by noting how useless. This

emotion really is, and thereby make it easier For you to avoid such reaction the

next time a similar occasion arises.

Emotions are truly silly imaginary diversions, and your power over them

increases as you learn to see just how silly and meaningless every emotion really is.

Find satisfaction each time by rising to resist the temptation to react emotionally to

anything. All emotions are silly and you appear silly expressing them!

Study the Scriptures and you will recognize that the essence of Divine Love

for all people is the Power of Certainty. It is a love with no lust, no possessiveness,

dependence or manipulation. It perhaps complete personal freedom for self-

expression, fulfillment and effectiveness. When you let the Power of Certainty

function in your daily life you will be eager to let that power also function in the

of 305

lives of all the other people around you. It fulfills itself!

In the total absence of emotions, the Power of Certainty directs your

activities safely and with positive effectiveness. Your present emotion—charged

thought pattern is triggering and creating chaotic and unpleasant confusion in your

life. Only you can change that, Expressing any emotion demonstrates a variance

from your personal pattern of perfection. Emotions separate you from what you

should BE. Only complete elimination of emotions can restore your right destiny.

With emotions gone~ the Power of Certainty is in charge. Without emotions,

you can feel no doubt or anxiety. Your decisions and actions prevail and dominate

in oil affairs. Assorted pieces are drawn together in a jib saw puzzle. Your choices

are right because no emotions mislead or confuse you.

There can be no peace until you become ONE at peace with yourself within.

All emotion is inner strife, so eliminating all emotion leaves you in a calm inner

peace with the world.

It is vital that you not try to get rid of the emotions by suppressing them. This

only results in deeper infections. Emotions are without any meaning or substance,

and must be seen from that point of view. Each emotion must be eliminated as you

erase any written error, totally and with no spot left to indicate it ever existed.

Since over ninety percept of all diseases are emotion based, the Reality Way

makes all illness non-existent, Even accidental injuries are emotion caused, so the

Power of Certainty which takes over in the total absence of emotions will eliminate

accidents.

Decisions in financial or career matters are infallible so long as no emotion

disrupts, confuses or clouds your mind. The Power of Certainty automatically

directs every move, choice and action in a very accurate and effective manner.

The immediate results you will experience as the Power of Certainty takes

over will quickly convince you, and as your power grows in every facet of living

you will be encouraged in your effort. This process requires no rite or ritual to

make it work. All such religious dressings just work up emotions to the point of

complete exhaustion, and then only after this can effective things can begin to

of 305

happen!

The dramatic intellectual and technological progress in recent years has

directly produced an increased rate in mental depressions, divorces, suicides,

violent crimes and emotional illnesses. The great promise of a better life is farther

away today than ever, and is still drifting away.

of 305

Whatever the quality of an advancement, the people who should benefit are

even worse off. This is true because they react to everything! Reaction is

emotional. Therefore progress to a better life is forever blocked by emotions and

reactions.

Your future survival depends on emotional control, and will be enhanced by

being joined by others understanding the Reality Way. You received this treatise

because someone found value. In this teaching and wanted you to also benefit from

it. Each person who can be released from emotional bonds will improve the quality

of your own daily experience.

From a personal basis, your own progress will benefit if others close to you

are also Reality Way People. This can best be realized by your placing a copy of

this treatise in their hands. The spread of Reality Way teachings can be most

effectively promoted by just such a personal approach.

of 305


The Green Fruit

Recently have I myself experienced the depth of this principle.

The range of insight in the command Know Thyself can be further brought

from obscurity in the following analogy.

Try to imagine a person who has never developed inner awareness of his true

self. Through the years he has been influenced and molded by the ideas and

conceptions of those around him — at first by his parents and relatives, and later

through the various means of society.

Of course, each one of us has been so influence since childhood. However,

this particular person, lacking in inner awareness, may seldom if ever question the

influences operating in his life, He accepts other peoples’ views of the world.

He has finally formed a living internal personality in accordance with the

external training of his parental and society conditioning.

Whenever a stimulus from the external world is perceived, he will respond

like a machine, the correct response being determined by his social conditioning.

When he is asked about his thoughts and feelings concerning the diversified thing

of life, he will merely regurgitate what has been fed him. He fears that any

questioning of the accepted projections of society will meet with punishment and

reprimand: such declaration will be considered a malfunction and will be dealt with

in the appropriate manner.

Let’s say that at some point in his life, the barrier between his objective self

and inner self disintegrates and the subconscious comes raging through Perhaps

this is brought on by a sudden crisis, or a great change in his Lifestyle Within him

there is an inner world, a repressed one, full of emotions and perceptions and it can

no longer be denied out of existence. In panic he tries in vain to suppress the

ragging current but it is overpowering. in utter futility he tries to define the

undefinable within the limited objective conditioning of the world, Any attempt at

manifesting these subconscious emotions and impressions is met with Firm and

unrelenting opposition by the externally conditioned material self.

of 305

There are then two elements at war within. Needless to say, without help,

further understanding, or a seeking for answers, the ultimate outcome of this

condition will be great inner suffering and severe depression — possibly leading to

mental disturbance and or self imposed death.

It is necessary to rid the cove of earth from these impurities. At first only a

handful purify; later the whole of earth. Meanwhile, evil inspirations obtain power

to the extent that mortals and spirits act upon them. To many mortals, it is easier to

give-in, then shut the shame feeling through alcohol, drugs, and tobacco. This

prescription being temporary in effect, aggravates the situation as spirit rockets to

the extremes. Here on earth, many of these people will break down, longing for that

place of no pain. It is at this point the self-sacrifice of today’s Faithist reveals its

glory. In time to come, more and more of these broken people will find Jehovih’s

earthly fraternities already established by those who suffered Satan’s torments

without succumbing.

These torment us — why? Because man errs, man suffers the bitterness of his

own fruit. Because man’s forbears erred, man suffers the stings of retribution

according to his surroundings and own make up. Yet who can blame one’s parents

– for did they not also desire the love and peace? Had they not their own inherited

patterns to deal with? Surely our children will have to work on mending our errors.

To find the best way, is this not Kosman?

It is well known that one reassuring caress can erase a child’s frightful terror.

Jehovih granted man the ability to lift the heavy concerns from the minds of his

younger brothers and sisters; to divert them into more, productive channels.

Conversely, the young are created to rejoice at wending the errors of their elders.

When the problem is solved, the young are blessed with greater harmony and the

elder are blessed with rest because someone helped them with their abundance of

work.

When someone is helped, fresh love is created, and this is the true food that

all need. This is it from which everything else springs. With new love, one gets a

different look at life.

This new insight means more comprehensive understanding of life. Wisdom

of 305

is the fruit of more comprehensive understanding. Moving wisely, then, results in

growth of power. More power means a greater ability to help more people, which

results in more fresh, pure love. Love-Wisdom-Power. The cycle repeats eternally.

From this it is easy to see why the first heirloom of the God of this earth and her

heavens is the sacred triangle, and why in the book Oahspe, the Love, Wisdom, and

Power concept is so often used by Gods, Goddesses, and other high people. With

this understanding,

of 305

The Kingdom Within

To March ― even to a monotonous sound is better than not to march at all ―

for it brings order out of that which was void.

To Build ― even toward a very loose association of aspiring people is better

than not to build at all ― for it brings the beginnings of affiliation where there was

nothing before.

To Work ― even a small part of the time to improve the condition of others

is better than to work for self alone ― for from, such work others are inspired to

begin to lift themselves.

To Develop ― even the slightest new talent ― is better than not to learn

anything new ― for as you grow you improve the condition of all mankind.

To Live ― even the smallest step closer to your ideal is better than to rest on

past accomplishments ― for you are drawing closer to your Creator.

To Grow ― even though it be for only a minute of one day cut of an entire

year is better than not to grow at all ― for all growth in spirit once gained is never

entirely lost.

To Give ― even though it be but a single word of encouragement to the soul

of another ― is better than not to give at all - for in the giving your own soul

grows.

To Worship ― even though it he only the faintest prayer ― is better than not

to worship at all ― for it raises you above that which surrounds you to a realization

of a power greater than yourself.

To March ― To Build ― To Work ― To Develop ― To Live ― To Grow

― To Give ― To Worship ― These are small things in themselves ― yet given

thousands of years you could change the face of the earth ― even if only by

moving one grain of sand at a time. And you have not thousands of years, but

thousands of millions of years ahead of you. Wouldn’t it be more satisfying to

build on a larger scale than with a single grain of sand.

By yourself you can do only so much ― Isn’t it more fun, and isn’t more

of 305

accomplished when you work with others for a common purpose? Only a short

time ago in the history of this country such a thing was common knowledge ―

canning bees, quilting bees, barn raisings, house raisings, cooperative threshing.

Too often we have looked for the Father’s Kingdom ― where it will be ―

and what day, month, and year it will occur ― But there’s a simple reason why we

cannot seem to find it. It is within ourselves that it will be established. No matter

where we are and it will be when we get together and forget about building for

ourselves ― But start building toward the resurrection of the entire world. Not just

for our generation ― But for all the generations to follow.

Faithist Author Unknown

of 305

MEDITATION BY THE ELOISTS

We would generate feelings that are on the side of love and faith, and not on

the dark side, O Creator. There is much in our daily lives and personal affairs that

can be upsetting. Part of our job is to so adjust or control our thinking, our attitudes

and opinions, that they do not keep us in a negative and disturbed state of mind.

There is no doubt some connection between our natures and the world work which

can make us feel disturbed; and therefore disturbances are not always an individual

matter. But we can always relate them to some of our self attitudes, opinions or

propensities, it seems. And if we try to treat a disturbance as an individual matter

— even though it may not be — treat it as something we can get under control by

taking the right stand, we find that we have a greater capability for rising above it,

We affirm the soul, and Thy Presence in the soul, and give forth Thy love to bless

everyone we can reach, We say to people, silently: “You are divine and beautiful

souls, one with your Creator. Love all things. Love to love. Give thanks for the

power to love. Feel compassion for all who do not know that they are one with

Universal Love. Love is the vitality of the Creator’s Presence, and the joy of living

and creating. What better inspiration can we give them from Thee, O Creator for

their encouragement and upliftment? “Generate faith and love with purpose to

serve Jehovih above all else. Give praise and thanks for the blessing of being alive

in Him. Go forth to serve the highest good of all the world, to help bring the light

of the etherean angels to mankind. Cultivate awareness of oneness with the All-

Person, practice attunement throughout every day; generate faith, give love, lose

self in service. This is the way of escaping the darkness of the world and creating a

new order of peace and goodwill on earth.

of 305

WORLD PEACE

World peace and brotherhood begins with us. This is about a daily meditation

for the earth and the fact that we can do something!

We ask you to assist in the formation of an invisible INTERNATIONAL

MEDITATION PYRAMID in cooperation with Individuals comprising 6,000

World-wide participating groups projecting LOVE and LIGHT energy at the

SAME TIME every evening (11:00 P.M. EST to 8:00 P.M. PST). Our collective

spiritual visualization can be alive, strong and powerful — its aggregate action can

serve invaluable assistance in counteracting present negation on earth. By 6,000

groups of well-intentioned individuals meditating at the same approximate time

every day, a Universal chain of positive visualization and affirmation can be

created. Our daily meditative procedure symbolizes an active and constructive

extension of the Universal master-mind principle — “If two or more among you

gather in harmony and share a common benevolent purpose, it shall be done.”

We come together in peace; for peace, for the healing of the races, for the

healing of the nations, for the uniting of diverse paths sharing in unison and

seeking in a united endeavor toward Light and Love that blends all things into

spiritual Oneness. It is truly the time for all of us to work harmoniously in close

cooperation and amalgamate Universal Goodwill and the world-wide assimilation

of Light and Love into the mass consciousness.

How we can meditate for the benefit of the planet: create an image of a large

pyramid of Light over planet Earth. Inside the pyramid, envision World Leaders –

of all nations, religions and philosophies; economic, financial and energy officials,

sitting in a large circle holding hands (symbolizing Unity and Goodwill for all

peoples). After affirming Unification with all other people participating in the

Meditation Pyramid, repeat this affirmation: “All decisions reached by World

Leaders will be made out of Love and Light and in accordance with divine will.”

Clearly visualize all World Leaders and all peoples everywhere in the world

joining hands in a great circle of Humanity, in this spirit of true understanding,

peace and sister/brotherhood; each man, woman and child sending Light, Love and

Spirit to everyone and everything on earth.

of 305

Let each person and Light group form a Light pyramid for themselves and

consider our individual pyramids as facets of an earth-covering pyramid of LIGHT.

Just as the great pyramid of Gizeh has many chambers, let our individual

meditation units serve as many chambers within a large pyramid that covers the

entire planet and acts as a focus of Light for Universal energies. ENVISION ALL

EXISTING INHARMONIOUS CONDITIONS AS BEING IRRADIATED AND

LOVE-FILLED AND ALL CONFLICTING NEGATIVE ENERGIES

DISSOLVED BY OUR CONCERTED PROJECTIONS OF LIGHT AND LOVE.

Please encourage your friends, relatives and members of your religion and

philosophical group to also meditate every evening with us and link together our

symbolic pyramids and further strengthen the bonds of friendship and goodwill

world-wide.

BLESS ALL! “Darkness is simply the absence of Light.” So, that which is of

the darkness disappears when sufficient Light is generated and sent forth.

Remember the first fiat of creation, “Let there be Light.” NOW is the time for that

proclamation from every Light Bearer of this planet. Stand firm in the realization

of the bright LIGHT that comes to you and be in the vanguard of projecting that

new Light. Love enfolds you and the plan IS being fulfilled! Rest assured that

upliftment of human consciousness comes as surely as the dawn!

In the spirit of Universal Unity and Sister/Brotherhood All peoples dedicated

to the Spiritual Unity of Nations

Coptic Fellowship International

of 305

RELIGIOUS FANATICISM THE MARK OF A FALSE RELIGION

By Don Pickard

We do not point your attention to the familiar words in your own sacred

books that illustrate this as it was in the life of the last iesu, Joshu of Palestine. We

bring you more up to date, showing that the spirit in other religions is no different.

Religious fanaticism, unchecked, negates all that is best in that religion. One

president, remembering that the one whose head the zealots demanded, befriended

him in his hour of need, acts out his highest religious beliefs and gives the former

autocrat a home, and the prospect of living his remaining days in comparative

peace.

And when death comes to each, the noblest spirits in heaven who lived by

that faith to their highest light, will welcome them, because love, tolerance, and

forgiveness was the thing that counted. Death will come to the leaders who incite

others to extend religious beliefs by war, and before them will rise in spirit the slain

who died to no purpose; these will cry cut: “you who were our leaders, hell shall be

your portion, for you deceived us.” Nor will any power in heaven prevent this

descent into darkness.

Some will question the justice of heaven. Why should the autocrat go free?

See how many of our brothers his secret police tortured and put to death!

But the autocrat will not be free of judgment, no more than they will be. It

will be weighed on the scales, the good he sought to do, the questionable means

used to bring a feudal state into the twentieth century, his fear of communism, and

the one will be weighed against the other in his own spirit-judgment.

Many spirit eyes will regard him with hatred. Many will be not so hateful.

Some will remember the good he sought to do, and be glad they did not have his

responsibility thrust on them. Some will love him. All these factors will be weighed

up in his judgment, and he himself, and not another will work out in heaven his

own compensation ere his heart and soul can know deep peace.

Nor will those who demand his sacrifice now, achieve anything, because the

of 305

hatred generated by religious zealots will not rest, but will then look elsewhere for

some other enemy to hate. Nor will they perceive that this will but increase the

same judgment on them in a few years hence.

The wisest will cry halt before it is too late. The unwise will bring their

religion into contempt in the eyes of those whom they regard as the infidel.

The president of your country considers the options available, and his

advisers all have different solutions they advocate. All these options are cast about,

but no man can see the effects and causes many jumps ahead, so it is all

speculative, depending on causes and effects working out as supposed.

In none of these deliberations will men recognize a need to turn to powers

beyond them, or admit that of themselves they are helpless as to really know what

to do. They see not, nor believe in, the spirits all around who labor to negate

darkness wherever it is, and promote the good.

In this position, any mortal would succumb to the temptation to do

something, to have some action put in hand rather than this waiting with almost

beyond human forbearance.

Yet if you will but cast your thoughts into the great powerful vortex of

prayer, asking help and guidance of your friends unseen, and invoke the sacred

name of E-O-IH, The Great Spirit, many things would take a different turn.

Do you not see, only the powers unseen, have real potency to impress

thoughts so they register on leaders and statesmen and all who have authority?

And should not the obvious dilemma of impasse lead you to consider the

unseen powers, when it is proved to you that a problem faces you that has

consequences of the highest magnitude.

Fear not any authorities amongst men. Real power is not with them.

You think it otherwise, keeping a wary eye on the bear in the East who seems

bent on conquering all by force of arms.

Again we say, he may foolishly believe his position mighty, and even rejoice

in your discomfort yet remember, as he was raised for a purpose, so will his power

of 305

diminish when that purpose is fulfilled.

Nor forget not the mighty power of Spirit within the young. It can only be

halted for a time. In the end it will burst all barriers, and only we in Spirit can

direct the history of the world in which you live, to an end and purpose beyond the

understanding of mortals.

The only danger for you lies in being provoked to retaliation on the grounds

of using force to overcome force, which will only be counterproductive; because

the reason that seemed to justify it would soon be lost, and you would be at war

against a whole religion, to whom any evil under the sun would be justified under

the guise of a holy crusade. Therefore be not provoked whatever evil seems poised

to strike at you,

Ask yourself, in reading the history the history of the past; what good ever

came of holy crusades? And as no good came of it when Kriste’s soldiers fought

the unbelievers or in Kriste in the middle ages, so no good will come of hatred in

any age.

History proveth both the good and the foolish actions of mortals. Of what

advantage to record it all, unless you have the spiritual capacity to wisely discern

and profit thereby?

Whoso amongst your nation’s best men will turn their thoughts in the

direction we have suggested, will of’ themselves not only create a vortex of light

above your land, but link it to higher powers for good who will be greatly more

powerful because you had faith in them, and believed they had power to handle a

matter beyond your powers to solve.

Nor have you lost face anywhere or been made to feel humiliated by such a

procedure, even though to the zealots it will seem a puzzling thing which you do. Is

it not written that if’ you approach in the

Nor will Islam, for all its senselessness at the moment, ever recover. Its own

faith will be shattered as people perceive that the voice of the zealot only turn them

away from seeing their own economic weakness in which the zealot, for a time,

always seemed able to provide a suitable scapegoat.

of 305

In time, all the accepted faiths will die, and with them will die the power of

the fanatic to stir up passions and compel mortals to betray their own higher selves,

the god-to-be that is in them. Nor is this period a long way off in history.

In no religion is real spirit power to achieve lasting good, yet the essence of

the good lies somewhere in all of them. Of a greater faith than any of these do we

speak, when the word Religion is said, and it abounds throughout the universe.

Therefore, for wisdom to know what to do, turn your thoughts to The One

greater than all your sacred and established names, for it is only the Power of the

Great Spirit that moulds history on any world such as yours. And you will surely be

answered. But remember, wisdom in the Spirit-Worlds, is not by any means, that

which seems wisdom in the understanding of mortals.

Be wise, my friends. Be not provoked. Only in this can evil anywhere be

overcome. If you cut off its head in one place, it will sprout a new head in another

place. Be wise, because only wisdom triumphs over evil.

The Peace of the Great Spirit E-O-IH be with you in your hour of need, and

be your consultation always.

of 305

Notes

Dear Kasandra and John:

A couple of weeks ago, I wrote the following in my notebook:

“I believe the statement in Oahspe that says spirits have engrafted themselves

upon all mortals. I am determined that the spirits with me shall follow my lead. I

am the soul, the rightful occupier of this body. I am a Faithist in Jehovih, devoted

to doing His will; therefore, I am in control. The spirits with me are now willing to

lose self, willing to leave the earth, willing to rise to higher heavens and serve the

Creator. They are aware of their divine potentialities. They want to express peace,

love and the joy of being. They want to follow the light of the hosts of the

Almighty. Their souls are strengthened and enriched by their association with me

and the Eloist group.”

I think that any Faithist who wants, badly enough, to rid himself of psychic

pressures can help himself by adopting this kind of attitude. But I know it isn’t

easy. In the beginning, reactions can be very severe. As time goes on, however,

they grow weaker and weaker until they disappear altogether. This is true of any

stand taken against the psychic forces.

Best of love from all of us.

Al Holmes

of 305

PRAYER FOR MORAL STRENGTH

given to Belle B. Sundgren 1978

Father, Thou host created me; Thou host fashioned my body and its powers.

Thou host also given me the gift of Thy Spirit by which I am moved to use these

powers in ways that are good and right in Thine eyes. May I remember this at all

times and in the presence of every temptation. For wayward fancies and base

passions often tempt me to seek a passing pleasure at the expense of my enduring

happiness and divert me from the purpose to perform Thy Will. Give me the

strength to banish thoughts and desires which I know to be wrong. May I do

nothing that can bring dishonor on myself, on those I love or on any human being.

May I not degrade the physical, mental and emotional powers that Thou host given

me by dissipating them in intemperate and self indulgent behavior. Create in me a

clean heart, my Creator, and renew a steadfast spirit within me that I may be

worthy of those blessings which flow from a clear conscience and a pure love of

Thee and of Thy children. Amen.

of 305

Use Your Will Wisely

by Dr. Ron Anjard

Many people know that change is needed for the proper building of their

tomorrow. Most would agree about the need to change their habits of critical words

and thoughts toward others. Yet the task of self-discipline is lacking and often little

is accomplished.

The Creator within you does work through the physical-spiritual Center

called the “will”. Certain mental thoughts and words release the energy within this

Center. Through this center the soul finds release and accomplishment. Meditation

and disciplined effort opens the door of the will. Through the “Center of the Will”

you are able to release energy into various thought forms for constructive results.

Through the will you rightly begin to unfold your higher potential. Through this

part of your make up you are able to release spiritual power.

One of the secrets of esoteric healing is that renewing energy flows through

the Will for the healing of the spiritual body and in turn the physical receives help

and assistance. The Divine Will in operation through self-mastery releases the

current to attract better conditions to yourself. The Divine Will, the God Power, the

Cosmic Consciousness, working through your will knows no limitations nor

boundaries.

You may feel that your own will is strong and yet still be dissatisfied with

certain conditions of your life. There is no doubt that your “will’ is always working

to bring about the current conditions of your life, but the question is whether your

will is working in full cooperation with the Creator. If you are dissatisfied with

yourself today, then you can develop the will not only in in its strength to achieve

but in its attunement to God, and so improve the conditions for yourself, and

indirectly, for others in your life as well.

Communication with the Divine Will, will result by your own efforts.

Releasing the energy of the will, of the Divine Will in your will, is accomplished

by wiling, choosing, and living according to the highest spiritual revelations and

inspiration you have received. Working with the plan for your soul can take place

of 305

whenever you consult these aspects of yourself in Meditation.

SKY WRITING: A GAME FOR CHILDREN

By Lovie Gasteiner

You may ask, “Just what is sky writing, and what will it do for me? What

benefit is it?”

If we practice sky writing faithfully, lovingly and joyously, we can soon

begin to feel and know great changes are taking place within us ─ the power of

imagination, concentration, vision and memory Increase. Negative, destructive

thought and feeling such as anger, hate, fear and ill will leave us. In their stead we

cultivate sustaining power of peace, love and good will toward all people.

To do sky writing, we use seven colors, rays or lights ─ white, blue, rose,

gold, green, lavender and orange. Memorize and use these in order given, and think

of them as vivid, radiant, sparkling life energies. Use whole arm movements from

the shoulders. Keep arms straight. Do not bend elbows or move fingers or wrist in

limited motion.

We write letters, words, numbers and sentences but let’s begin with this

sentence: ─ I desire to feel peace, love and good will toward all people. Write once

or twice in white, using the left arm. Next in blue with the right arm. Then in rose

again, the left arm, gold with right arm. Green with the left arm, lavender with the

right arm and orange with the left arm. Use this method with anything that you

skywrite. If possible get out under the sky and feet its vastness, infinity. Speak the

words aloud once or twice or three times, then sing them, and most Important, hum

them. Make your own tune, but hum and hum. This humming is soothing, peace

giving, harmonizing every atom, cell organ of the body in a unified whole.

In sky writing, use any good thought. You will make amazing progress.

Before you begin, see yourself as living light in any one of the seven lights. See the

radiant white going out from your arm writing in the sky. Make letters very large,

and after writing visualize the whole sentence, letter by letter.

Out under the sky, vision a circle of moons around you, in seven lights, very

of 305

large moons.

People your sky with angels, great beings that you know are real and see

them in the seven lights.

THE LABEL WAS MISSING

by Julie Watts

Many years ago, maybe sixty, I took a course in psychology that claimed all

power came from within. By developing this power, all things were possible.

Today, as I read OAHSPE, I find that we have limitless power due to HIS

PRESENCE within.

Had I known sixty years ago, that the source of all power was the

CREATOR, how wonderful and effective that knowledge would have been. I could

have accomplished so much more

I was taught that the world within was governed by the mind - subconscious

mind - and that all solutions for all problems could be found. IF I HAD KNOWN

the SOURCE of all power was the CREATOR, I would hove believed it and

allowed miracles to take place.

No doubt I developed a positive attitude and so profited greatly due to my

studies. But if only I had known and grasped the significance of’ it all, how

wonderful it could hove been.

And now, if I were to stand on a hilltop and proclaim loudly the MIRACLE

of HIS PRESENCE and power within, who would stop and listen?

How could I say that the result of lack and limitation, discord and

disharmony, Is the result of wrong thinking? That harmonious and desirable

conditions are obtained by right thinking? That the SOURCE of all power is the

CREATOR within.

WHO WOULD LISTEN?

of 305

THE LOVING CREATOR

by John Harden

Evening shadows gently fall,

Loving voices softly call;

All creation, full and free,

Singing praises unto Thee

Softly blows the evening breeze,

Over hills and verdant lens;

Over all Thy hand will bless,

Like a loved one’s sweet caress.

Darkness falls at Thy behest,

Heaven is touching earth with rest;

Happy those who understand

The marvels of Thy mighty hand,

Skies alight with evening glow,

Beauteous tones around us flaw;

All Thy works Thy wonders tell,

Listen to their tidings, “All is well.”

When, at last, our work is done,

We’ll behold life’s setting sun;

Upward to new worlds above,

There to share Thy matchless love.

of 305

ALONE

By Richard E. Byrd

The day was dying, the night being born — but with great peace. Here were

the imponderable processes and forces of the cosmos, harmonious and soundless.

Harmony that was it! That was what came out of the silence — a gentle rhythm, the

strain of a perfect chord, the music of the spheres, perhaps.

It was enough to catch that rhythm, momentarily to be myself a part of it. In

that instant I could feel no doubt of man’s oneness with the universe. The

conviction cane that that rhythm was too orderly, too harmonious, too perfect to be

a product of blind chance — that, therefore there must be purpose in the whole and

that man was port of that whole and not an accidental offshoot. It was a feeling that

transcended reason; that went to the heart of man’s despair and found it groundless.

The universe was a cosmos, not a chaos; man was as rightfully a part of that

cosmos as were the day and night.

of 305


ONE LIFE

By Alfred Holmes

One Life is everywhere.

It is breathing you.

It is the reigning power of the universe.

It is in every living creature.

It is the Great Spirit.

Rejoice in Life and give it your love,

The Presence of Life in mankind carries the all-highest light.

Here, it is most creative, most sacred, most beautiful

Be kind to one another.

In loving kindness can be found the healing of All human ills.

Practice peace and goodwill, and be a co-creator with the Almighty for

building a better world.

of 305

WING ANDERSON LOOKS AT THE FUTURE

Evil is but unripe good; were there no green fruit, the ripe could not be.

Death and life, evil and good, are opposite poles of the same things; negative flows

to positive, darkness flees at the entrance of light. Let us look to the East and hail

the dawn of a new and better system of education, economies, government, and

religion; spend our energies in rejoicing at the birth of the new, not in grief at death

of the old.

Today the world is one, tomorrow the peoples will know that all men are

brothers and the nations of the world members of one big family. Why grieve that

peoples turn away from their false gods and false religions. Mohammedanism,

Buddhism, Brahmanism, and Christianity will all go down, as have the religions of

Osiris, Baal, Ashtaroth, and others of days long past.

There can be no unity throughout the world as long as mankind worships

different gods. When man turns to his Creator as his source and salvation and

knows that he is but a cell in the body of the All One and that each and every man

of every race and color, moves, lives and has his being, in the body of the Great

Spirit, then, my friends, will pace good-will and brotherhood rule the world!

Therein may be found the answer to the persecution of the Jews, Masons, and

Labor Unions by Fascist groups throughout the world, no matter where found. Jews

are worshipers of Jehovih, the Creator; Masons recognize the authority of the

Architect of the Universe and Labor Unions are a step towards the equality of man.

The Communists (Communists, in fact, not in name only,) are trying to make

manifest God's kingdom on earth as it is in heaven. They will be persecuted,

abused and destroyed by every savior worshiper, whether he be Christian,

Mohammedan, Buddhist, Brahaman, or what not. It has been so in every world

cycle, and is so in this. A man's religion determines his every action. The religion

of a nation contains the answer to every national policy. It is as true today as ages

ago, "As a man thinketh in his heart, so is he."

of 305

"God said: I have heard thy prayer, O man; Thy kingdom come on earth, as it

is in heaven." Hast thou considered thy words? And art thou prepared for it? Hast

thou fulfilled the commandments? Lovest thou thy neighbor as thyself? And hast

thou done unto the least, as thou desireth thy Creator to do unto thee? Now, behold,

the Creator Jehovih hast sent me, thy God, to answer thy prayer.

"I demand of thee that thou hast no favorite doctrine above thy neighbor; and

that thou art servant unto no God, nor Lord, nor Savior, nor church, unacceptable to

any man in all the world.

"But, that thou servest Jehovih with all thy wisdom and strength, by doing

good unto thy fellow-man with all thy might.

"That, because thou art strong, or wise, or rich, thou understandest that thou

shalt use these excellences for raising up such as have them not, believing that

Jehovih so provideth thee to that end.

"Consider, O man! Thou hast a kingdom (government) already. Wouldst thou

have two kingdoms?

"Behold the kingdom of man has its power in armies and ships of war. The

kingdoms of thy Father have not these, but love, wisdom, righteousness and peace.

"Art thou willing to sacrifice thy time and money and self interest for sake of

Jehovih's Kingdom?

"Use thy judgment, O man! Since the time of the ancients till now, the only

progress towards the Father's kingdom hath been through sacrifice.

The Kosmon Faithist Journal 2002

of 305

OUR ONENESS WITH OUR CREATOR

by Julie Watts

I have often thought of my relationship with my Creator! THE LEAST, me,

can communicate with the GREATEST, OUR FATHER! As I meditate on this

profound mystery, I am deeply moved. I am so filled with reverence that I am

hardly aware of my own existence. HE is my very LIFE! But He Is letting me

develop to the point that I realize the meaning of ONENESS.

It Is such a SACRED realization that HIS LIFE is the life that functions

within me. He has given me the REINS, so that I may guide myself to the

awesome realization of His Presence. His Nearness, and eventually to the total

awareness of ONENESS with the CREATOR OF ALL!

I realize that He didn’t STOOP to inhabit this body, but that I have to RAISE

myself to discover His Glorious Presence! To meditate on this great truth Is deeply

disturbing. HE IS ALL, and I am nothing without HIS LIFE AND PRESENCE. I

have started on a long Journey where I have to realize that WE ARE ALL ONE,

because of His Presence. My sacred duty is to accept this ONENESS, and to strive

to purify myself, so that I may truly express HIM in ALL I do: every word I utter,

every action I perform, and most important, EVERY THOUGHT I THINK! I have

taken up the reins, and I am on my way to prove HIS PRESENCE within me, and

within ALL HIS CREATIONS! ALL LIFE IS HIS! ALL GLORY IS HIS! ALL

PRAISE TO HIM! OUR LOVING FATHER AND CREATOR!

of 305

A FULLY MATERIALIZED SPIRIT SPEAKS TO HER DAUGHTER

When she stood before her daughter, in a fully materialized form, she said:

“The flesh-body is but a shell, or a house, in which our OWN PERSONAL SPIRIT

temporarily lives.”

Dear Mary, I want you to realize that I am with you many times, and I can

read your thoughts, and know your desires and your deep love for me. O do not

grieve for me, I am very happy in my new way of life here in this wonderful spirit

world, in the heavens surrounding the earth.

I can clothe myself in the garments of earth to enable me to appear here

before you. I also can partake of the essence-substance of fruit and other earthly

foods, I can handle flowers and smell their perfume. I am as fond of these things

now, as when I was with you.

I am the same SPIRIT with the same likes and dislikes. So-called DEATH

has not changed these feelings. But I am growing into a Higher Light of Wisdom

and Understanding of Life’s eternal Progression. I am gradually being taught

greater knowledge of the higher spiritual laws of life, and of the CREATOR’s

Infinite Love for all of HIS Creations. His spiritual laws under which I now live.

Death of the flesh-body does not change the Spirit. When the Spirit returns

and takes on again the materialized of its former flesh-body, IT IS THE SAME

SPIRIT THAT LEFT IT.

Author Unknown

of 305

WHAT IS REALITY?

by Alfred Holmes

When you’re having a bad dream, it can sometimes get so bad that you can

willfully open your eyes and become awake to the reality of your physical self and

the safety and security of your home. Humanity as a whole is having a bad dream.

We need to wake up to the Reality of the Creator’s Presence with us, and know that

His Love, wisdom and power are available for our use. Every individual is living in

his own bad dream which is part of the whole nightmare humanity is experiencing.

Our dreams are getting so bad that a lot of people are opening their eyes to Reality.

How about me? Are you and I willing to accept the reality of light, and fight the

pull of world darkness?

Yes, it has its attractions, but we pay a big price for this. The price is

bondage, sickness, pain, and possibly despair or insanity. We need to wake up to

Reality now, before it is too late Reality, with a capital “R”, means, the presence of

the Creator’s love, wisdom and power. We only need to affirm it, to believe it and

to train ourselves to live in attunement with it. Also we need to grasp a most

important principal of life: namely, that we reap as we sow; and then we must

adapt ourselves to it, knowing that we cannot have a heaven on earth unless we

express heavenly qualities. Many examples may come to mind of selfish, corrupt

people who seem to reap great benefits. Don’t believe it. They are losers. In the

end, they find themselves in a hell of their own making. You and I can come out of

our own bad dream by opening our eyes to the Reality of the Creator’s Presence. It

is within ourselves, waiting to be given an exit. The Almighty has created a

beautiful universe to which we have been blind. We can find it, and live in it, if we

will try to be beautiful ourselves. Rather than wait until our dream is so bad we

can’t take it anymore, let’s start now.

of 305

MEDITATION

by Alfred Holmes

What can we do for Thee, Jehovih? This is our oft repeated question. We are

here to serve Thee, and for no other reason. Of ourselves, we don’t know what to

do, so we need Thy inspiration if we are to do Thy will. Thou art the All Person.

Thou art everywhere. Let a person in the depths of hell call out to Thee, and Thou

wilt hear him; and according to Thy judgment, looking to his soul development,

Thou wilt answer. We do not pretend to any great wisdom. Although we have

written much that might be called inspirational, it is from Thy Presence under

certain favorable conditions. Wisdom is in the way we live, in the decisions we

make, in the way we act and speak and create from moment to moment every day.

We are nothing without Thee, Jehovih. We see the wisdom of cultivating

awareness of Thy Presence, and attunement with Thy purpose; we see that Thou art

the One Supreme Authority, the Ever Present Intelligence, and All inclusive Love

— Creator of all the living, and all that exists in the universe. We see the wisdom

of praising and thanking Thee and seeking to serve Thee. We see that Thou hast a

plan of upliftment for the people of earth in this day, and that we can hear Thy

Voice in respect to it if we will listen. We see that all things perish but the soul

which is the immortal divine individual, the everlasting reality of our being. This is

the extent of our enlightenment in basic truths. As minds we are always trying to

create the best possible philosophy to live by. What we find may help us, even

though it is only a degree of light. There is no one form of wisdom suitable for

everybody. It comes to us by degrees according to our needs. We seek perfection in

all things, and never quite make it; and our frustrations drive us to seek ever further

until we are finally living from Thy direct inspiration, having purified ourselves of

all self-seeking. Getting back to the original question: What can we do for Thee?

Perhaps this is the best philosophy of life, to be forever questioning, trying to

become more perfectly attuned with Thee. In trying to help others, perhaps the best

we can say to others is – The Creator is present with you, and if you will seek His

inspiration, desiring to serve Him, He will respond; and you will be shown the

remedy for your ills, and for all the ills of the world.

of 305

MEDITATION

by Al Holmes

What is awareness, O Creator? We shall try to answer our own question, and

will know that Thou art giving us inspiration according to our capacity to receive it.

Awareness is the consciousness of one-ness with Thee. It is the opposite of the

state of separateness in which we formerly lived, which is the condition of most of

mankind on earth. It is a sense of kinship with all life, and a way of inwardly

communicating with Thee and with every living thing. It is harmony, and goodwill,

and willing helpfulness. There are no barriers in awareness, no clouds; everything

is clear, clean and beautiful. It is a calmness; and a feeling of strength and control

in unity with Thy Hosts. One feels that Thy inspiration is direct and unfailing for

the fulfilling of Thy purpose of upliftment. In trying to imagine the ideal state of

attunement with Thee, we get a picture of what our awareness can be. Of course,

there are degrees of awareness. We mortals do not expect to experience the state of

consciousness Thy angels know, except perhaps in occasional flashes of

extraordinary realization. Awareness of Thy Presence and Power, Jehovih, is what

mankind most needs. Cultivating awareness is the greatest practice for

development of a happier life and a better world. Some mortals may be very

humane, charitable, kind, compassionate and selfless; yet, without awareness of

Thy Presence and Power, their accomplishments are comparatively small. Without

recognition of Thee as the All-Life and One Source, there are insurmountable

barriers to the kind of soul attunement and expression needed for the building of

Thy kingdom on earth. Such people live from a kind of exalted self consciousness.

Conscious oneness with Thee is necessary to the mastery of self and the casting off

of limiting concepts which, unknownst to mortals, bind than to the rulers of the

darkness of the world.

of 305

The cultivation and development of awareness opens channels to the

inspiration, support and protection of the Higher Beings, Thy angels, and makes the

mortal individual one with a Host. The protection of the Higher Beings is necessary

to mortals who would break away from conventional, church doctrines, from any

form of orthodoxy and traditional ways of life which stultify the soul. Otherwise,

the battle is lost before it is begun. That is why conscious awareness and

attunement is so necessary. It enables a person to accomplish the seemingly

impossible through affiliation with Thy legions of the All-Highest Will, Wisdom

and Love.

of 305

THE TRUTH ABOUT OBSESSION

by Josephine Possi

As Jehovih’s channels of light impregnate the consciousness of man at this

time of earth living, we find a more receptive attitude towards the things of spirit.

Man must know the truth: that the physical and spiritual worlds are united as one,

that is that the lower heavens, which revolve with the Earth, are part of the Earth.

In the dawn of Kosmon greater illumination pertaining to the realities of life

is necessary in order to cope with new conditions.

One of them is humanities indifference to the necessity of spiritual

enlightenment while living in the physical body. Fortunately to offset this we have

Oahspe. But this book is such that in the main, it can but reach intellectuals in this

age.

Many others will also feel the impact of the Light that is a part of the dawn of

the Kosmon Age. The influx of spiritual force is stimulating the psychic, or soul

centers in man, and with the conjunction of the two planes, spirit and matter, much

discord is taking place because few are prepared mentally, emotionally and

physically. Many persons are becoming mediumistic due to these highly charged

elements that are in the atmosphere. They are opened up and receptive to the influx

of spiritual communication from around themselves, and they do not know it. Some

are becoming obsessed. It calls for attention. We should give it some thought

because unless we do, it can be a very sad story for many families for in those

families are those who have mediumistic tendencies and do not know how to use

them.

In this time of reckoning, many on Earth are being touched by the

conflagration of souls that are earthbound, seeking to give ideas and projecting

strong thoughts and desires into the consciousness of man.

The atmosphere of Earth is loaded with these discarnate entities. Some may

be called good — they lead man upward, lead him into wider awareness, lead him

toward the Creator and toward becoming better, wiser, more unselfish and better

of 305

educated in every way that ultimately matters. Some may be called bad — they

lead man down, into ignorance, sensuality, selfishness, cruelty, war and away from

the Creator.

Some are extremely vicious. They remain in the aura of the Earth because

their desires when they lived an Earth life were principally physical and physical

appetites and after passing on, they continue to seek further gratification of those

appetites.

Not knowing how to get out of the Earth’s atmosphere, they attach

themselves to those with whom they associated in the physical life, with those they

liked or those they disliked. (to gratify their feelings of revenge), and even move

about in the same houses and localities.

These spirits do not seek light or deliverance from their deplorable state but

are glad to bring confusion into the minds of all those that are touched by them.

We know that in the spirit planes it is necessary to desire help before one can

receive it. In passing through the threshold of death, we find ourselves in a spirit

counterpart of the physical body we have just left. This might be called our body of

desires.

Now the free will we exercised on Earth is no longer at our command. Those

who failed to control and refine their spirit or emotional body while they had the

opportunity on Earth, will find that they are slaves to their baser instincts when

they function on the spirit plane, until the process of purification can take place.

Therefore we are creators of our own heaven or hell.

Naturally those souls who have vicious desires will try to gratify these desires

through the body of anyone who will permit them to stay in his aura. This is what

accounts for drink, smoke and sex obsessions and contributes enormously to

cruelty, intense anger, jealousy, suicide, insanity, and many other failings that

humans of Earth are heir to. Many times one’s sense of physical exhaustion is due

to nothing else but a discarnate entity, a druj in one’s aura, following one around

and absorbing ones vital energy in order to “survive”.

Many Earth-bound spirits are pathetic cases. Most people do not realize that

of 305

after passing on, souls who were sick, crippled or diseased in the mortal body often

retain that idea in the mind when they are Earthbound, thus manifesting the same

infirmity in their astral bodies.

In such a pitiful state they remain earth bound through their own ignorance

and become aimless wanderers in the vicinity of their earthly haunts, some

completely helpless in a semiconscious state. These spirits are lonely but seldom

malicious. They fail to respond to help by spirit missionary workers because they

cannot discern them — manifesting on a lower grade.

Whether on the battlefield or otherwise a great many people who have died

are unaware of the fact that they have passed on, and the effort to prove to them

that they are what mortals call “dead” often assumes a pathetic, and sometimes

amusing aspect. They often resort to a stupid and nonsensical argument, through

the instrumentality of an entranced medium, or through the obsessed person

himself, to prove that they are not dead.

They ignore the suggestion to “will” to see some departed relative or friend

or a spirit helper who can assist them into higher conditions.

Usually they are not aware of the harm they have caused the one whom they

are obsessing. It is only after enlightened guidance and persuasion by those on

Earth who have been trained to work with these entities that they finally “awaken”

to their true condition.

There may be legions of helpful spirits standing by, but the desire for help

must emanate from the soul in distress, the earnest cry from the heart must go out

before freedom and elevation can take place. In this manner the unripe spirit raises

the direction of its grade to communication with Jehovih and His channels of light,

some of whom it can then behold. Then it can be assisted by Missionaries of Light

into a higher plane where it is taught the ways and laws of spiritual light.

If all the lower discarnate entities could be taken from the atmosphere of

Earth a great burden would be lifted from humanity’s shoulders and many of

mankind’s troubles would be solved permitting peace and harmony to reign

throughout the world.

of 305

How do we attract entities? NOW let us turn our attention from the plight of

the earth-bound spirits to the manner in which sensitive people become affected by

these retarded souls. Before a discarnate entity impinges on the aura of a mortal, it

is sometimes attracted by a magnetic light emanating from that person.

This psychic “light” is especially attractive to ignorant spirits because of the

semi darkness which enshrouds them. It is comparable to the attraction of a light

burning at night for moths and other insects. In persons with a greater degree of

psychic sensitivity, the attraction is augmented because of the increased brightness

of the “light”.

It is the sensitive person who is unconscious of mediumistic faculties that

usually becomes the victim of obsession because ignorant of psychic and spiritual

facts, yet with the psychic centers of his soul open and unguarded, he permits these

invisible intruders to enter in.

How many of us are aware that most of us are sensitive to a degree? We are

all potential mediums. Ill people, especially when delirious, or those overworked or

on the verge of a nervous breakdown, are easily obsessed. Victims of obsession are

sometimes entirely robbed of their normal mentality and are classed as insane.

Nevertheless their own soul mentality is there, and the fight for complete

possession of the body ensues, causing external reactions and symptoms which

those unaware of these psychic undercurrents termed `insanity”.

How unfortunate then, when a psychiatrist on learning there are 2, 3 or more

personalities fighting for possession of the body uses his time, education and will

to help the “best” personality take possession of the body, instead of the rightful

owner.

Not only are there many forms of insanity, but epileptic attacks and similar

conditions are widely due to obsession. Removing the obsessions, removing the

spirits possessing one, promotes the cure and gives palpable proof of the fact of life

after death and of the dominance of spirit over the corporeal, to the beholder.

Even when a complete healing is not brought about by this work of extraction

of the intruding spirit, at least it removes the underlying cause and leaves the way

open for medical procedure to complete the way back to better health.

of 305

The greatest number of obsessions are found to be with drunkards and drug

addicts who attracts entities of a similar type, and grade. Lacking will power they

are unable to repulse those entities whose sole desire is to satisfy their burning

appetites through the bodies of their earthly companions.

On the other hand a large percentage of the insane come from the ranks of

religious fanatics. During the time of meditation and devotional prayer, their

psychic centers open. When this takes place, unless the person is well-balanced and

is living a high moral life and spiritual life, there are bound to be repercussions in

the form of obsessions — spirits hanging around who intrude.

Quite often, their loved ones are at a loss to understand why such a “kind,

religious soul” should suddenly become insane.

of 305

THE POWER OF LOVE

by Eva Bell Werber

As you blend with the power which is Mine, lifting it to the altar in the throne

room of your heart, it will go forth as a penetrating light to help those who need the

love it carries.

The great love thus engendered, is such power as removed mountains, either

within your own consciousness, or mountains of difficulty from without. It will

overcome any barrier, for love is the key to every problem of life.

As you breathe in the breath of life, transmuting all that is negative into love

for the world, you will be working with the most powerful force in the universe.

Love is indeed the atomic energy of the soul. As you bring this love force into

activity, you will take on something of the likeness of the Father and will radiate a

light from this great love generated within you.

When you out-breathe love, you radiate rays of light over whose pathways

come messengers from the Father Who is Love. They surround you with their glory

and sing for you celestial music of beauty beyond any of earth. Its harmonies will

fill your innermost being, though the outer ear be unaware of it.

These messengers also bring you wisdom and guidance and their presence

guards your path. You will learn to serve those with whom you are in contact by

the power of unselfish love. Let me repeat: As you work with love, you are using

the energy of the Creator of all.

No impassable barrier will obstruct your way. Those with whom you work

and live will sense your power through love and you will share its power and

beauty with all who are able to receive it.

of 305

VOICE OF THE GREAT SPIRIT

(Adapted and edited from the Dead Sea Scrolls by Rick Cafero)

I am the source and wellspring of all power and wisdom, saith Jehovih. I

stretch out the heavens and command My hosts to do My will. I created the spirit of

man to last throughout all time, for ages infinite. And I assigned tasks to men’s

spirits, moment by moment, throughout their generations, season by season, age

after age.

Shapen of clay and kneaded with water created I man. And with a spirit, and

with judgment. And I gave man knowledge to do works of righteousness and tell

forth the glory and secrets of My Truth.

To those who arise and stand upright before Me, there is no deceit nor

delusion, for they are pleasing to Me and walk in the way of My presence. To them

I have fortified to stand against affliction; for they are stayed by My grace, and

illumined by My Light.

All who have faith in Me I have set firm in heart My deep truths. As they

have pledged themselves to Me, so have I sheltered them against all distress of soul

and bitterness of spirit. My angels minister unto them and lead them naturally, and

they walk eager in the ways of right-doing. And when they come before Me in

Covenant and prayer, My angels bear witness for them and their righteousness, and

I see their good deeds written in their bodies, and in their spirits, and I bless their

souls and they rejoice in heart.

I am the River of Life that flows without ceasing in the Infinite Garden of My

Creation, All who invoke me I preserve forever. All who delight in Me I raise

upward forever, to higher and higher worlds Give ear unto Me, O ye of the earth

and the heavens, for I have opened the way for My Voice upon the souls of the

faithful for all generations. Let the righteous proclaim Me for I am even now on

My way to pass judgment on all deeds.

of 305

My blessing is upon all people who give heed to My counsel and. walk not in

the way of the ungodly. My countenance is upon the righteous who walk in the

path of life; for they, in My presence, find the fullness of joy and their souls see not

corruption. I AM the light and the salvation, saith Jehovih. Rejoice in My name,

forget not My commandments, for My word is right; and all My works are done in

truth.

of 305

THE VOICES OF SPIRIT FRIENDS SPEAK THUS

by Don Pickard

With words of gentleness we come to you, full of encouragement. The spirit

of the world ever presses upon you, from all sides this influence that ever negates

The Great Spirit and prevents your thoughts dwelling, on us, is most powerful.

Therefore the tone of voice we present, which may by some be considered

sentimental or weakness is not so; it is the voice of wisdom, suggesting that which

is profitable to consider and than leaving the choice with each to make, as seemeth

right to them.

From the view of things seen by us, each little group of followers seeking

more of light, is to us as a rare and precious diadem. It radiates a light. The auras

reveal colour blending and these are indeed beautiful because they spell out to us

the word “harmony.”

Though in the near future words of harmony, peace and good-will will be

sung by many people; you will have to take our word for the fact not much of it is

of the quality that endures, but will evaporate as the morning mist a few days after

your festivities are ended.

It is of the quality of things that endure we wish to be concerned with in our

labors with you, because if we were to labor for “things of the passing hour” shall

we say, you would not thank us when you crossed over and became acquainted

face to face with those who taught and guided you.

Our words come with the wisdom of The Great Spirit because the policies

that we seek to lead you towards accepting, have indeed been tested and proven

over the course of thousands of years. Therefore not as the preacher who hammers

the converted do we come to you, but as the spirit of The Eternal Mother, to whom

each one is loved in something after this manner. We come with gentle words,

words that encourage, words that are kind and thoughtful, because we have a view

of life more expansive than that the mortal possesses.

As you grow older, times will come when the thought will register with you:

of 305

these our friends are saying the same thing over and over again to us. Why do they

constantly reiterate that which they told me twenty years ago? And the answer

comes down to the fact – the deadly spirit of the world will ever strive to wean you

away from the things of the spirit, and so we counter this in the way described:

gentle words, eyes of pity, reluctance to judge sins and errors on the part of anyone,

and ever hoping, ever keeping fingers crossed, knowing we have to surround and

guard and protect you all through your life if the labor is to expand outwards and

bless others who are also earnestly seeking for the light.

Many brothers and sisters meet in circle or in fellowship, and we doubt if any

actually realize just how valuable, how important, is each one of you in the sight of

the many loves who guide and overshadow you. And the reason is this: ─ Thought

─ Spirit, as such, is potent and all-powerful, that power needs be channeled through

the proper avenues, and that is, through persons, those mortals living now in the

earth-body.

Imagine therefore a line of light stretching into the distance, and is then lost

sight of. In that chain of spiritual light will always be hundreds sometimes

thousands, unseen loves ascending and descending on the sons and daughters of

mortals, ever seeking to impress and guide them to go in such and such a direction,

or to do thus and thus, with liberty open to any to ignore it all and go or do

something entirely different, even opposite if they so choose.

Therefore it will be obvious that the hopes, fears, shall we say, of many in

our worlds will rise or fall on this factor ─ how strong the bond that exists between

us and our mortal protégés at the corporeal end of that chain of light. And you have

to imagine in your mind that thousands of these chains of light all criss-cross, in

many countries all over the world. To great extent you remain strangers even to

others on the path of life, and again part of the labor is to cement the bonds in every

age so that gradually the strangers become brothers and sisters.

Once you see as we see, the labor in hand appears as a thing of gigantic

proportions, so that you pray often to The Great Spirit for more labor’s, both in Es

and in corpor, to come and help you with it, lest you sink under the load of heavy

responsibility.

of 305

So the gentle words come as a result of a true evaluation of the worth of each

individual person who shows the slightest interest in this labor for a harvest they

may well never live to see, come to much in the earth life. Behold, then, the folly of

hammering the converted, saying in effect, “you are against evil”, and saying so as

if they too needed to be convinced, to think the same kind of thoughts. And the

possibility is that, coming into our presence, needing strength and comfort, they

heard a type of sermon that left them unsatisfied, they would not come again. In

many years hence that would be laid on our doorstep, if it were indeed that our type

of preaching ended with this disastrous result.

Therefore dear spiritualist brothers and sisters, observe in your dealings with

all mortals that to be able to truly comfort and give solace, you need a heart that is

soft and pliable as well as head that is clear to read into the soul of things. Blend

these within yourself and many indeed shall be blessed and comforted, uplifted

beyond measure.

By Steve Conniff

May the light in your mind raise you above all worries and doubts, material

conditions below; for as the spirit of truth and love grows, heavens abundant

supply of the eternal fills in all the emptiness and sorrow that for so long held us

captive. From that light, which takes us from the old natural being to the inner

angelic being, cones a destiny that swells the heart and the will with a

determination and force that must create that peace that “passeth all

understanding;” a new world order to replace the old, a heaven here on earth and

the little children shall lead them. This is the place that will soon be the throne in

all hearts.

of 305


MEDITATION

by Alfred Holmes

Divine love is your greatest possession. And it is inexhaustible. The more

you give it away, the more of it you possess. It wants nothing, because it is

everything. It is the happiness of celestial beings. It is your happiness too, the only

real and lasting happiness. It survives all troubles, pains and sorrows. It lives

through youth, old age and death. Nothing can defeat it. lt is what is left of you

when everything else is gone. It is your security above that of all material things. It

is more enduring than gold or diamonds, more enduring than the earth itself. It is

eternal. It is the ruling power of the universe. It is the Creator. Learn how to

cultivate it. Make it your most persistent study, effort and purpose. You will be

inspired as never before. You will have the help of mighty angelic beings. Bringing

forth the divine love from within starts when you try to be harmonious, not

combative, not argumentative, not competitive, not opinionated. You will have to

come apart from the world, to some extent, to live like this. But if you have to live

and work in the world, if you are not able to get out of it, you can cultivate divine

love in private. In your silent prayers to Jehovih, make it your chiefest aim and

purpose, your most cherished dream. Somehow the way will open for you to

achieve it. You are touching heavenly spheres of exalted beings, attracting their

support, their inspiration and guidance. Divine love is what you ARE. You have

found yourself when you begin to express divine love. This is the sweetest feeling,

the greatest pleasure. It is creative. It is beautiful. Once you have felt the thrill of

divine love, you will cease wanting things, you will cease acquiring things. You

will not need things. You will be secure and fulfilled in your own divine self.

of 305

HOPI DECLARATION OF PEACE

It is in the Power or the True Hopi People to unify the minds and spirits of all

true peace seeking peoples of the earth . . .

“Hopi” means “Peaceful People” and the truest and greatest power is the

strength of peace . . . because Peace is the Will Of The Great Spirit.

But do not think that just because the True Hopi People have been told by the

Great Spirit never to take up arms that the True Hopi People will not fight even die

for what we know to be the right way of Life.

The True Hopi People Know how to fight without killing or hurting.

The True Hopi People Know how to fight with Truth and Positive Force In

The Light Of The Great Spirit.

The True Hopi People Know how to Educate by clear thoughts good pictures

and by carefully chosen words.

The True Hopi People Know how to show to all the world’s Children the

True Way of Life by setting an example by working and communicating in a way

that reaches the minds and hearts of all people who are truly seeking the methods

of a simple and spiritual Life which is the only Life that will survive.

THE TRUE HOPI PEOPLE PRESERVE THE SACRED KNOWLEDGE

ABOUT THE WAY OF THE EARTH BECAUSE THE TRUE HOPI PEOPLE

KNOW THAT THE EARTH IS A LIVING . . . GROWING PERSON AND ALL

THINGS ON IT ARE HER CHILDREN.

The True Hopi People Know how to show the Right Way of Life to all the

world’s people who have ears to listen who have eyes to see and who have hearts

to understand these things.

The True Hopi People Know how to generate enough Power to link up the

forces of the Minds and Spirits of all the True Children of the Earth and to Unify

them with the Positive Force of the Great Spirit so that they may put an end to

affliction and persecution in all afflicted places in this world.

of 305

THE TRUE HOPI PEOPLE DECLARE THAT HOPI POWER BE A

FORCE WHICH BRINGS ABOUT WORLD CHANGE.

THE PATH OF LIGHT

First: There is but one supreme being, our Creator.

Second: All of humankind is a part of creation, not separate from creation.

Third: No portion of humanity is inferior or superior to another. All are equal

in the sight of our Creator.

Fourth: To live in peace and harmony with all of creation is to follow the

path our Creator has provided us.

Fifth: That which produces the greatest harmony and productivity in society

with the greatest freedom of individual choice is the path of light.

Sixth: So long as any individual is denied freedom of choice, darkness will

exist. To eliminate darkness within the body of society is the task of mankind.

Seventh: No individual, no state, no government has the right to impose death

or destruction of property of another individual, state or government. To do so is to

deny the gift of life from our Creator.

Eighth: No individual or organization of men may dictate the worship of any

deity, including the Creator. All must be free to worship or not as determined by

each individual conscience.

Ninth: All men and women created alive are the Creator’s. No person is the

property of another —- nor is any person the property of the state.

Tenth: That way of life which produces the best health, mental and physical,

and which provides for the spiritual growth of the individual is a part of the path of

light.

Eleventh: That way of life for a community which is in harmony with

creation and which maintains an equal or greater quality of life for generations to

come, is a part of the path of light.

Twelfth: Those courses of action undertaken by organizations of humanity

of 305

which deviate or prevent suffering or hardship on the part of any other portion of

humanity or the whole of humanity also are a port of the path of light.

Thirteenth: No course of action may be undertaken which will sacrifice any

portion of humanity for the sake of the “survival” of the remainder. Such course is

of darkness.

Fourteenth: Every human being has the potential of an immortal soul.

Through service to others, that potential becomes a certainty. Each may choose to

serve light or darkness. Even for those who choose darkness the opportunity to

return to the path of light exists.

Fifteenth: To seek out the cause of crime, war, disease, poverty, famine,

drought, flooding, all the ills of humanity and to discover ways to prevent them is

part of the path of light.

of 305

MEDITATION

By Al Holmes

Thou art the Whole, Jehovih, the All, the One Eternal Being, Ever-Present

and All-Powerful. There are a thousand names or figures worshipped as gods in the

world, but only One sustains life and guides the galaxies in space. Only One

Supreme Intelligence rules the destiny of man. No man comprehends Thee in Thy

completeness. Even the highest of human beings, souls of hundreds of thousands of

years of experience, look upon Thee with awe and wonder. We mortals need more

than anything else to recognize Thee, and attune ourselves to Thy will, wisdom and

love. There are some who will come awake, and work with Thee, and begin to

build a new order, patterned after Thy heavenly kingdoms. They will not try to

persuade mankind to a new way of life, but will go to work, and build an example

of the perfect type of society in which there will be no war, crime, poverty and

disease. To become builders and workers with Thee, Jehovih, What must we do?

We are but partially, awake and attuned; — like little children who have grown to

the point where they will not do any wrong, but still are not able to do any great

good. We are trying to see the way more clearly, and attune ourselves more

perfectly. Thy heavenly kingdoms are not places of idleness and ease. The

inhabitants are progressive, and eager to work and learn. They are not free of

problems; but they are free of tension, fear, hatred, jealousy, greed, lust, egoism,

and all the propensities that make beasts of men. We mortals need to work to free

ourselves from these hidden causes of disharmony and suffering. We don’t want to

be critics of the world or reformers. We just want to help heal its ills. But if we

can’t heal our own ills, where do we stand? We know Thou art planning for the

world’s regeneration, O Creator. Somehow, we can be part of Thy plan. Let it be

whatever is in accordance with Thy will. Alone, we can do nothing; so we must

tune ourselves to the highest possible inspiration and source of power. Thou hast

said in Oahspe; “I have given Thee Thyself, O man.” But we would give ourselves

back to Thee. We do not want to own anything, even ourselves, but to give all to

Thee, lose the lesser self, and express all our talents and powers in Thy service, for

Thy glory and the good of all.

of 305

MEDITATION

by Alfred Holmes

There are days when we are uninspired, when we feel just like an ordinary

separate self. When we try to commune with Thee, O Creator, our mind is a blank.

We feel nothing, neither praise nor thanks, nor any kind of good feeling. We know

that love, purpose and awareness have not died within us; but nothing is getting

through to the outer consciousness. What is the reason for this? Is it our own fault,

or is it caused by some influence or circumstance beyond our control? We know

we sometimes fail Thee, ― not because we purposely turn away, but because of

lack of good judgment, and failure to see the pitfalls; perhaps too, because of

weakness of will when the pressures are great. But we are still Thy instruments,

raised up to serve Thee. And it is our purpose to serve Thee more and more

perfectly, and rid ourselves completely of everything that tries to shut out Thy

light. The writing of a daily prayer has become a habit which we do not wish to

give up. We form lots of habits in a lifetime, most of which are of the lesser self,

and need breaking; but if we ever formed a good habit, this is it; and it will be the

last to be discarded. We are trying to uncover and express certain good qualities

which we know are within, but which keep eluding us. The soul that we are is

gentle, loving, kind; strong in purpose, yet light-hearted and joyful. We feel we are

too much on the serious side to be well-balanced, not radiant with the joy and

goodwill of our fullest possible awareness. The true self, the soul, rejoices in its

existence. It is overflowing with love and faith. It gives of itself continually. It

pours forth. It is beautiful. It shines like a sun. Each of us can say, “I am that. I am

kind and loving to all, giving blessings to everyone.”

of 305


I AM NEVER ALONE

By Harold Sherman

I am never alone.

God, the Father, is always with me.

My soul, my identity — that something which says, “I am I” to me — is an

eternal gift from God, the Great Intelligence.

I can never lose myself because this self is a part of God.

I am a part of God, and God has a great purpose in life for me which He is

revealing day by day as I grow in strength of body, mind and spirit.

I am well and strong. I have the power to overcome all things within me.

In God’s care, no harm can befall me.

I now give myself over to God’s protection and I will follow His guidance

day by day.

of 305

MEDITATION

By Alfred Holmes

We would be positive in awareness of Thy Presence, O Creator, so that we

override all that is negative in and around us. We would transmit our positiveness

to others who are striving, and help them sustain their awareness and faith. We are

a host. We have the Power of Thy Angels expressing with and through us. We

affirm our unity and oneness with Thy Hosts. We are part of a great organization of

Benevolence. It is Thy Will, O Creator, Thy Presence and Power, which is

functioning here on earth for the upliftment of all its people. It is Thy Light in our

souls, which breaks down the barriers and shines through us to touch and awaken

other souls. Thou art doing it! We give our faith to Thee, to Thy Angels, to Thy

Presence in every soul. We sing a song of praise to Thee in our hearts every

moment of the day. Thou art blessing the world! And we are part of that blessing.

We are Thy instruments, and we are thankful, and humble, and full of rejoicing that

Thy time has come on earth, and all will be made new.

MEDITATIONS

by Alfred Holmes

To praise Thee, O Creator, is the highest wisdom; to serve Thee, the greatest

joy. This thought keeps returning to our consciousness. It is a most helpful

affirmation. We would do well to ponder it, and use it often. And try to put it into

practice as objectively and as fully as we can. Man habitually praises the wonders

of “nature” and the “universe” as he sees them. But he fails to recognize, publicly

at least, that Thy Presence is the All-Supreme Intelligence, that Thou art the All-

Person, creating and inspiring all forms of life, that there is a singleness of purpose

uniting all, and that love for all is the one foundation upon which he would do well

to base his own existence. All of us fall short of recognizing the truth of Thy

Presence, Thy Power and Thy All-ness. We need to cultivate greater and greater

awareness. This is the most important thing we can do. This is the Light of the New

Era upon this world. When man does this in sufficient numbers and applies himself

in consecrated affiliation to practicing Thy Inspiration, he can wipe away the

of 305

causes of all human misery.

KOSMON NEWSLETTER

Dear Friends:

In what way can the Faithist Fellowship and the teachings of Oahspe profit

you? What is the Faithist Fellowship?

The Faithist Fellowship is the association in spirit of all who worship their

Creator and who endeavor to harmonize their own lives to His purpose.

For you were not created by chance. You are designed as an instrument of the

Divine Being essential to the plan of His Universe. At present you are serving your

novitiate. You are undergoing a period of training and trial. Your progress will

depend entirely upon yourself. Nevertheless you will at all times be under the

guidance and control of supremely devoted and capable angelic mentors, so long as

you are one with the Faithist Fellowship.

Which is no small organization. Indeed, it is the largest and most powerful

organization in the universe. The Master Soul or God in control of this planet is a

humble member, for instance. So are all who work under his direction in the affairs

of heaven and earth.

Notice there was no capital letter for the “his” in the last bit? Our God here is

our elder brother, not our Creator. He desires not to be worshipped.

In time to come you will pass through successive planes of eternal life into

positions of infinite knowledge and tremendous power. Power over yourself, power

to control and shape the world around you. Power in the service of the Almighty.

On a dark night, far away from city lights, out on the wild or in a ship at sea,

gaze upwards into the galaxy in which our sun has its being. In that mighty

concourse of a hundred-thousand-million stars there is work awaiting you that will

keep you occupied for quite a time. There are also just as many unseen, etherean

worlds wherein the immortal soul has its being, and where too there is great work

to be done, vast responsibilities to be shouldered, as well as beguiling delights to be

shared and endless beauty to contemplate. When you have finished with the affairs

of 305

of this galaxy, a hundred thousand million more await your leisure. Perhaps you

will yourself partake in the labor of creating new ones.

Physical planes of being on this planet and others like it are the seedbeds of

the immortal soul. The moment of conception is the moment of the creation of a

new being in the universe. Every human soul born now is capable of eternal life.

Every soul can attain to eternal life by his own will and desire and effort. The road

to eternal death is not a pleasant one.

Perhaps the best aid to success is through prayer. By this means guidance is

given and strength obtained to overcome the frightful problems and to carry the

crushing burdens and to face the darkness of our human lot. By faith and prayer

these problems are indeed solved, our burdens lightened, our darkness illuminated.

Those who separate themselves from the Fellowship of Faith are they who bring

frightful suffering and wickedness into human life.

“Beloved Brethren, it is given unto us to seek the Heavenly Father’s aid at all

times, that we may he equipped on the path of our unfoldment; nurtured by His

Immortal Love; strengthened by His Grace, and aided by those who watch and

minister from the heavenly worlds beyond.” So reads the Faithist missal.

Be sure that you will live after death. The question of deep concern is, in

what state will you find yourself? There are planes of spiritual darkness as well as

planes of light, for even the wicked live after death, if only for a season. But the

angelic forces of the Fellowship of Faith are ever prepared to help you now and

always to surmount weaknesses and conquer temptations, to control the darker self

and to set an example to others to do the same. If only you could realize how

decisive your own quiet example could be to the world around you!

of 305

You have a tremendous destiny to fulfill, a destiny that begins now on this

planet and unfolds eternally into an infinity of heaven worlds above. You cannot

fulfill this destiny however without God’s fullest help and guidance. So whenever

you may he in need of Divine aid, form in mental image and in golden light, the

Sign of the Sacred Name, thus:

(Eoih’s Symbol)

Fraternally yours,

Gus Cahill

of 305

THOUGHTS ABOUT LOVE

by Alfred Holmes

Love is the most beautiful word in any language. Love gives meaning to life.

It is the reason for our existence. Cultivate the seed of love in your soul as God’s

most wonderful gift. Of all the seeds He has planted in the souls of men and

women, this is the most glorious. It is the perfection of His Voice which speaks in

every human being.

The love of Thy Being, O Creator, is the highest love. The love that we feel

for our fellowmen is the love of Thy Being. Thou art the true object of the love we

feel.

Teach me how to love, O Creator. Inspire me with Thy all-inclusive love. I

want to make the giving of love from Thee the chiefest aim of my life.

I want to cultivate this beautiful feeling which is Thy love within me, O

Creator. I want to express it for all people I know and meet. I want to help others

all I can, with a deep and intense desire to awaken them to Thy Sweet Presence

within themselves.

of 305

YOU HAVE WHAT IT TAKES

by Mary L. Kupferle

If your life seems at times to be too much for you to handle, remember, dear

friend, you have what it takes. You have what it takes to be patient and steadfast, to

see your direction and know the road to travel, to regain your well-being and

strength and be staunch in faith and to trust Jehovih.

You have what it takes to be successful, happy and fulfilled, to feel the peace

that passes understanding within your heart, to live courageously arid victoriously,

facing every situation and condition with an overcoming attitude no matter what.

At one time in my life when demands made upon me seemed overwhelming,

when the many decisions needed were difficult to make, it seemed impossible to

relax and let go. Thoughts crowded faster than I could make affirmations and there

seemed to be no let up to the pressure of events.

Then, when kept awake at night by doubts and questions, I found that a most

healing thought was, “I have what it takes to relax and let go. I have what it takes

to trust Jehovih.” Knowing this, I was able to relax and go to sleep quickly.

During the day when the demands seemed relentless, again I found it helpful

to remember, “Whatever wisdom I need, I have it; I have what it takes.” This

thought sustained me and gave me assurance that saw me through crisis, changes,

and challenges. I found I did have what it takes, and as a result all things resolved

themselves, good came forth, and I was better in every way as a result of the

experience.

You too, dear friend have what it takes. You have what it takes to face every

task, every demand and to know that through the Ever-Present Spirit of the

Almighty in you, you are with Him, are equal in every way to anything you have to

go through.

You have what it takes to face all before you, knowing that through the spirit

of Jehovih within you, through you, you can accomplish all things with ease,

wisdom and success. You have what it takes to know that the only presence and

of 305

power is The Ever-Present, the Creator. Your mind has what it takes to be divinely

illumined. Your soul has what it takes to be poised, relaxed and free.

When you think you do not have the patience and await the answer to your

prayer, you have the strength and all it takes to know the answer will come in due

time, When you think you do not have another ounce of strength to see a situation

through to the right conclusion, you have what it takes; the added strength is there

at hand. When you feel that you can never again be happy, you have what it takes

to refuse to believe this and to know that a new door of life and happiness is

opening to you.

Yes, dear friend, you have what it takes to relax and let go, to give the

burden, all burdens to the Almighty.

You have what it takes to respond to the Great Spirit’s healing power, to

demonstrate prosperity, abundance, to trust in the Ever Present and let His plan

unfold in your life and in everyone’s.

You have what it takes to face change and upheaval with faith and serenity.

You have what it takes because built into the depth of your soul is the ability to

handle victoriously every challenge of your life.

of 305


Eloist Meditation

I want no teaching, nor faith nor religion, given me by another person or

church, which is for the purpose of helping me, as a separate self, to success,

prosperity, good health or happiness. I recognize that mankind is in darkness, that

his combative instincts and systems of competition breed hatred and separateness,

extreme wealth and poverty, greed and crime and warfare and disease and every

kind of tragedy and misery imaginable. I recognize that I am a part of humanity’s

darkness, and that my first steps should be in the direction of self-purification, not

seeking to GET something, but to lose something. I recognize that there is no

separate salvation, no separate achievement of any kind; and that I trust only to

identify myself with Thee, my Creator, to unite consciously with Thy hosts, and

work for world change and upliftment, losing my ego, forgetting self-desires and

ambitions, becoming nothing that Thou mayest be all through me.

I must conquer the self that is my mortal heritage, and uncover Thy

inspiration within my soul; not accepting all suggestions that enter the mind but

discriminating carefully, judging every thought and idea as to whom it serve, self,

or Thee; and steadfastly casting away all things not in tune with Thy Will.

I will accept nothing from men nor gods nor spirits nor angels, without

consideration. I will judge all things, making sure that I follow only that which is

from the inspiration of Thy Presence.

of 305

THOUGHTS ABOUT LOVE

From The Eloists

You may think you cannot give love unless you feel love. But you ARE love

in a sense. If you affirm love, you are its instrument, even though you are not

feeling it. By affirmation, you are giving faith to the Creator’s Presence, and He is

doing the work. Do not, in your mind, exalt love-for-all as something beyond your

capacity. In its first stages, it is nothing more than common goodwill.

Respect is akin to love. If you cannot love all people, you can at least give

them respect, remembering that the Creator made you equal, not superior, to your

fellowmen. Remember too, the potential beauty and perfection of the soul within.

Like a plant that thrives on sunshine, so the soul needs love for growth.

No one needs to be without love. Many lonely old people suffer because they

believe no one cares about them. Is it because they have always expected love to

come to them from others? Is it too late for them, O Creator, to awaken to Thy

Presence and start bringing love forth from their souls? Universal love wants to use

you for the upliftment of humanity. Even though it may seen absurd, affirm: I am

Love, going forth to bless everyone in my world. Try not to be a leader or teacher.

Be love! Remember how you felt as a little child when you knew only beauty and

goodness. Radiate love through every cell of your being. You ARE Universal

Love!

The truest and best healing method: — to praise the Creator and all creation,

and to radiate love to everybody.

In a search for truth, the mind wanders into many fields, but it always comes

back to the practice of love as the basic means of understanding and enjoying life.

The ability to bless people with the Creator’s love under all circumstances

should be cultivated. It is the great easer of tension. It soothes and smoothes and

heals.

The substance of our being is love. Love is what we’re made of. If we knew

the whole truth about love, fear, pain and grief would be eliminated from our lives.

of 305

All there is, is the Creator, and He is love. Therefore, I am love. I will affirm

nothing that denies it. Love is all I want to be, love guided by the all highest light.

If you cannot see love expressing anywhere in the world, you can at least

discover it in yourself.

Whenever you are annoyed by someone, silently affirm from the higher self,

“I give you love.” Affirm it over and over until the annoyed feelings are dissipated.

This simple declaration can work wonders,

All of nature responds to the love we express from the Creator’s Presence

within us.

I do believe that Love is the ruling power of the universe, that Love can heal

all ills, that Love redeems or releases mankind from darkness.

of 305

THE INSPIRATION OF ANGELS

by Don Pickard

I have not been in the heavens very long. How long, as to earth years I cannot

say, because time and the way time goes by, cannot properly be compared to earth

time. It is one of many things so difficult to speak about, other than to say it is not

as it is with you.

Some things are like they are on earth and these we can explain so you

understand. Other things are different.

And the cat is staring at me with a puzzled expression as if he is thinking,

“What is the problem? I can at times read your thoughts as if you spoke words

aloud. Why can’t he?” (referring to me).

Oh never mind that cat. He is just being difficult. Go to sleep, you!

Did you have pets on earth? They do say the spirits of these pets recognize

you when you cross over. Crossing over, I must tell you about that. It was like

coming out of a mist. Some people describe it as being a kind of long funnel, or

tunnel, and they have the feeling of lightness, floating, like a piece of driftwood on

the waves. I only had feelings of impressions in between gaps, far as I remembered.

But everyone was so kind. They all seemed to have a job to do, and everyone knew

what it is they had to do. I think I woke at times like a baby and then fell asleep. I

remember someone saying:- “We cut the cord,” and later I found out what was

meant. But it really was in some respects same as the other birth. Faces, then

smiles. It was hard for me to accept the fact I had died. I had always said: - “When

you’re dead, you’re dead.” How to explain to earth people that when you’re dead

you are more alive than ever before.

They suggested I go back to school. I laughed. Why? “To learn again how to

read, how to write words,” I was told. “It is a bit harder on this side to do it because

you cannot let your thoughts wander from what you are doing or the letters go all

over the place. Nor can you go and catch them. It requires concentration and

thoughts must be more controlled. A bit annoying, my dear, at first,” he said, “but

of 305

after awhile you’ll get used to the new way. And then you can go in any of the

libraries and read a book. We have copies of all the books on earth that have been

published. Does this surprise you?”

I said, “So far, it’s all been one big surprise. Do you think if I told them back

on earth they would believe?” A few might, but the many would laugh, or put it

down to fantasies. And this factor creeps into conversations many times. If I told

them thus and thus, would they believe? Let us inquire of others as to what they

were told when they crossed over!

“Excuse me but when you died to the earth life, what did they tell you on

arrival?”

“They had a record of my earth life, and seemed to know everything about

me. One man asked if I knew where I was and I told him I think I am in the

heavens. He looked at the records and knew I was a plain down to earth working

man, so he did not ask me a lot of difficult awkward questions.”

The angel with the records in his hand smiled encouragingly. “We have

wonderful libraries here,” he said. “All the works of the masters are in the libraries,

and I think you will be fascinated at how much one can learn in this. The color

range exceeds that of earth, and the tints and overlays can be multiplied greatly in

various combinations.”

I spoke to my father a few months after he had passed on and asked, “What

are you doing at the moment, Dad?”

“Drawing,” he replied, and a few days later my friends found him doing

some sketching, they said, in a large library. Later on he was shown around the

hospitals that had been established by those who love the Great Spirit and Dad’s

eyes were opened.

Another man we inquired of seemed a silent type and spoke in a slow and

measured way. “I have kept my eyes open and learned,” he said. “There’s such a

lot to learn here. The poor, what I suppose you would call the ordinary working

class, who had a hard time of it most of their lives, come here and find it truly is all

they hoped heaven would be. I have spoken to quite a few, and all are agreed, never

of 305

would they want to return to the old conditions. Some do go back to see how things

are, but after awhile many of them lose interest in the concerns of mortals, except

those who have people who know about our world, who keep in contact.”

“But as regards those who had it cushy on earth,” he continued, with people

to wait on them, these are the ones who get the surprise of their lives here for it

seems to them that everything is topsy turvy. Some get angry and feel there is no

justice. Then along comes someone who knows how to handle these people and

tells them that most certainly there is justice in heaven. And they whip them of I to

schools of education. They have television that reels of I pictures of their own

memories. How they do it I don’t know. They are always working on electronics,

here in heaven. At any rate, those who had it cushy on earth take a longer time to

adjust in heaven. It isn’t that they are bad people in themselves. They just got a

philosophy of life that is all haywire.”

“Excuse my butting in,” said a nearby spirit, “but I was in electronics in the

earth life and I think we, that is a gang of us, are working along the right lines in

this subject. The present method of contact via the clairvoyant and the clairaudient

is too restricted, too limited to reach out to the many and make a deep impression

on them. The medium can do much good, but only on a small limited scale.

Without going into technical detail too much, the problem is one of adjustment to

two variables in rhythmic vibrations, and finding a method of toning down ours to

their rate of vibrations and sort of speeding up theirs to be adjusted to our higher

frequency.”

“We are,” he continued, “and have been working on this for some time, but

our own progress has to tie up not only with the date of our solving this problem,

but their own development and understanding of the two kinds of spheres of

manifestation, theirs and ours. We are handicapped in this from the start. Most of

our own people have a blind spot when it comes to imagining the simple fact that

their colleagues carry on investigating into electronics when they cross over. And it

is not just a matter of technical invention, but of bridging gaps in comprehension.

You probably know the pitch of each voice is of different frequency. If you

tabulate ranges of frequencies, determine the pitch of each voice, register it as in a

central exchange, then you can operate after the comparative way of a complex

of 305

telephone central exchange. Simply exchange the notion of dialing a number to the

notion of the pitch of a voice, and a method of adjustment to line up the variables

in frequencies between spirit world and earth world.”

“Some of our friends think when we cross over our skills go overboard and

we become simpletons.”

“The old funnel shaped thing in the center of an arena, with a complex

invention to set up before we could do voice recording direct, may be likened to

television in the early days, where you had a picture that was only clear and sharp

in focus at times. Today we are in a similar position.”

“We attended a lecture in a nearby college of higher education. A special

teacher from planes higher than us had come to our area by invitation of those who

organized things. He spoke of cycles or ages, and said, `In one age you can preach

till you are weary of trying to explain things, and in another period you say but a

few words and the multitudes flock to hear you. You have to take into

consideration as to whether the time of your labor ties up with the heavenly

pressures falling on mortals. For example in one age they will desire all passion

and earthly desires. In another age the opposite. They will neglect the matters of

earth and give all their energies to spiritual matters. Your inspiration you direct

upon mortals and the type of inspiration must bear these factors in mind. Could I

say success or failure of your venture, hinges on a thorough understanding of this.

I suggest you coordinate your labor with those beyond, and they will give you

guidance for they can draw on the records going back thousands of years.’

“Much later it occurred to us that our work was known in the regions beyond

ours and that it had received blessing. We were told the Father spoke of this to his

son God of Paradise, and had promised that as it was a good labor we had in hand,

the chain of light would connect us to higher worlds.”

“The most persistent of all angelic inspiration comes to you from those who

are your guardian spirits, who change the watch as the changing of the guard on the

days of the moon, but never leave any of you devoid of heavenly guidance. The

guidance is imperceptible, themselves kept strictly in the background for they must

not make themselves known to mortals. Persistent pressure, yes, but the mortal

of 305

operates with freedom to do as he wishes. Heaven is most adamant that mortal

freedom shall be a true freedom. We cannot do anything that could be judged as an

infringement of this liberty. But we read mortal thoughts. And here is reflected the

wisdom of the earth. Our labor is one of gentle persuasion, to walk the straight and

narrow way. It leads to your greatest happiness eventually, although on a short term

basis you may think it a restriction. It is the wisdom of the earth that speaks in the

question asked, because the man knows not that, left to himself, he would be pulled

down by the adverse influences surrounding him, and would gravitate into a

darkness that would be the very opposite of the light his soul would have had by

virtue of treading the straight and narrow. All earthly wisdom takes the short term

view of things.”

“Don’t forget to say a few words about spirit healing, will you?” says a spirit.

“Many earthly institutions are still suspicious of any form of healing that is outside

their own knowledge. And when we do good spirit operations to shrive! up a cyst

or a growth, they just scratch their heads and mutter that nature restored the

balance. Anything but attribute it to the source it came from. But I mustn’t

bellyache; what does it matter who heals, as long as a person is restored to health

again?”

“Spirit healing is not distinct, or should not be, from the orthodox as you can

medicine and surgery, but the two ought to be working partners. If you go to root

causes of things the best form of healing is to have conditions of harmony in your

life so that sickness cannot get a hold in the first place. Do this, and more good will

come to the many than thousands of patch and repair operations they do each year.

But I do not suppose they are ready to hear us.”

I asked further details. “What is there about spirit healing that is better than

surgery, do you think?”

“Welt, to start with, we do not always have to cut a person open and peer

inside and do a messy job and hope it comes alright by the natural body healing

tendencies. We can see clairvoyantly better than the X-ray photograph. We see the

actions of the living tissue, the effects being produced by the cause that is out of

harmony with the other parts. Then we can take the ethe, that is a hundred times

of 305

more subtle than the coarse electricity and concentrate specific dosages to a given

area. In this way a growth can be shriveled up without any messing around with

cutting operations inside the patient’s body. And another thing, because there is not

such a shock to the sys- tern in our approach, the healing tendency in-built into the

system gets off to a flying start. You see, we can direct all this power around us by

compounds as you make up compounds on earth, and then directing them by the

will power of many in agreement, and although the principle is different to the

earth way, nothing of the orthodox approach is wasted or of no use when we cross

over. It is simply a base upon which we extend our skills and knowledge.”

“We pursued further inquiries into this subject and found that others had

already been laboring immensely in this field for there were about twenty five

hospitals in the Summerland under the control of the higher ones, and these were

specifically designed to meet special needs of the mortals who came over before

living a full life, some needing to be healed of habits and drugs that had taken a

hold and injured their spirit body. Many are ardent believers in Jesus and come

here expecting to see a throne with Peter and James sat either side of the master.

They also expect the more horrid scenes of revelations enacted before their eyes.

And patiently we try to explain that God had nothing to do with that. He is love,

etc. But while they admit He is love, there is a part in them that also believes He is

hate. Some have their favorite hymns, and the 23rd Psalm is one, but if you read

the words carefully, how can God be love and also find joy in the discomfiture of

supposed enemies?”

“Many of these ardent religious types have a rigid form of heaven in their

minds and expect to find a heaven in reality somewhere along the same lines. It

takes a lot of patience and years of training to push these nonsensical ideas out of

the mind and lead them, with the carrot and string approach, towards wider views

of the universe.”

“And it is not only the Christian who is adamant about his convictions and

faith. All the others are the same. They live in separate localities for a long season

in heaven. For you see, as they never integrated on earth, they are not likely to in

heaven. So the reality of life here declares that before our eyes, so provision is

made in this to reduce friction on religious grounds to a minimum.”

of 305

“After a few years the mind gets accustomed to the fact that it is different

here from the views they had when they crossed over. No one forces them to get

shut of these untrue beliefs. They just drop off on their own accord in time. And

then, when they ask questions wider in range of vision we take them to the libraries

and colleges where they become acquainted with true factual historical records of

their world over thousands of years and work from that basis, In the end they all

come to embrace wider views of tile. You cannot tell them much about the Great

Spirit at first because it runs counter to their belief in Jesus.”

“So they live with that faith for a season. But in time the questions come.

They rise up from the soul within, ever asking questions, just as children do. So we

bide our time. No point in putting pressure on them. In the end they all get to see it

as it is, but alas, for some, that may be even hundreds of years into the future,

although many make the transition more easily than we would have thought

possible a few years ago.”

“So you see, my friend,” not only mortals have blinkers on but angels also as

concerns the beliefs they picked up on earth. But Heaven and the Person of The

Great Spirit, is much bigger than anything put forth in their supposed sacred

books.” Another said, “Boyo!” That’s what he called me — Boyo. He looked me

straight in the face and said, “Don’t underrate yourself. Everybody’s got talents.

Job is to spot them and encourage them to send out shoots. You know, Boyo, like it

is in the country.

“Me,” he continued, “I make ‘em laugh. When I see some looking a bit

miserable or lost in their own thoughts, I deliberately set out to say something to

make ‘em laugh. Humor. That was what they gave me when talents were handed

out. And it took me a long time to find why they gave me that and nothing else.

Mo, Boyo, I deliberately, set out to make myself look daft. I know it sounds daft to

even say this, but I got a motive for doing it. If I can set about lifting them out of

the doldrums, you know, Boyo, like it do in nature, well, then, I’ve used the talent

given me.”

“I haven’t any time for people who say things about standing on your dignity.

I am happy in life just being my natural self. But I can’t quite see if `what I told

of 305

you is inspiring you anyway. Still you might remember Liter on, Boyo, what I said.

Don’t matter if the others reckon I’m daft. The Creator who gave me this one

talent, He knew what Life was doing.”

“Drop the seeds you have gathered. Most of us fulfill the task of the sower

going forth to sow. But don’t eagerly wait for a harvest. You will, at best, see but a

few seeds sprouting and showing signs of growth. Be patient. I know many of your

own teachers counsel patience and it’s one of the hardest of all virtues to acquire.

Remember, the mortal likes to have results quickly, but you cannot do labor in

Spirit with that view in mind. Your work does not cease when you have succeeded

in planting your thoughts in the mind of the medium.”

“You have to watch how the work progresses, when it is all finished and

copies in circulation. Then you have to discover the mortals to whom the work

would be most profitable, that is to say, from the viewpoint of their own

unfoldment in spiritual knowledge. Then you have to inspire them with the desire

to first of all, gather in knowledge of the world of Spirit, then you have to make

certain they read and understand in the way intended.’.

“These are my thoughts, dear friends. I see you have much hope, plenty of

enthusiasm. But please remember, projects for the Father are going on all over the

world. Much of it is labor put forth in hope and with prayers for Spirit power to

bless it. But the lasting worth is not in quick returns, but in patient, methodical

work, and hearts and minds prepared to plod on for many a long year, just

expecting that a harvest WILL come of it some time in the future. If you have this,

and faith in the Father, and the merit of the work, then you should not fear or

become discouraged. All will be well. Now I must continue on my way.

of 305


AN ACT OF WORSHIP

by Don Pickard

Prayer of Invocation

Jehovih, who rulest in heaven and earth, hallowed by Thy Name, and

reverent amongst men. Sufficient unto me is my bread; and, as much as Forgive

those that trespass against me, so make thou me steadfast to shun temptation; for all

honor and glory are Thine, worlds without end. Amen.

Chief

We have invoked the name of the Great Spirit in the Words of Joshu. We

have made the sign of the sacred name E-O-ih. It is the password unto the worlds

of Es. The angels of the Lords of Wisdom gather in our midst, to elevate our hearts

and minds. It is better we rise to them than desire to bring the spirits down to our

level. In all that we do together, let our first thought ever be the Praise and Glory of

the Great Spirit. Unto none other shall we bow in reverence. Let us therefore

confess before our unseen friends the Faith that is beyond the range of time itself to

measure.

The Faithist Declaration

I Declare unto Thee, Jehovih, in the presence of the Faithists here assembled,

that henceforth I will worship none but Thee, Thou All Highest Creator, Who art

variously named by mortals, Jehovih, The Great Spirit, The Almighty, The Eternal

Father, The I Am, The All Light, Eolin, Ormazd, The Architect of the Universe,

Ever Present in all, and yet above all, unto Whom none can attain forever.

I declare that I will henceforth turn from evil and strive to do good, that I

may come into at-one-ment with Thee, Thou All Father, Life of all Life and Soul of

all souls, Who art to the understanding of all the living even as the sun is to the

light of day.

I promise to abnegate self and dwell in harmony with my brother and sister

Faithists; also to respect the authority of the Chief of the Community.

of 305

I promise to put aside the uncharitable tongue and not to perceive evil in any

man, woman or child, but only in the limitations of their birth and surroundings.

In Thee, O Jehovih is my trust. Amen.

Prayers

O Star of Infinite Light within each soul, we come with thankful hearts for

that light which casts its rays of many colors into the darkness of the past, to be

today a perfect lamp unto our footsteps. Inasmuch as this star within has

manifested its own mysterious glory to our understanding, we acknowledge this

light thy priceless gift, and not the words we ourselves have done. Kindle Thou, O

Father this sacred light that for Thy glory it shall shine.

O infinite Love, transcending human thought, of Thy Loveliness shall our

souls perceive, and with Thy vision of truth and beauty we too may see the hidden

beauty even in the apparently unbeautiful. Tune to our hearts and minds to see the

soul of things to the end others shall catch in us a glimpse of that which is truly

inexpressible, yet is called Infinite Love.

O voice within the silence, thou speakest in the gentle breeze, the tender love

of the Mother Infinite. Attune our hearts to feel this all embracing consideration

unto all, that in our blending of hearts and mind and soul we may be at one with

Him who is Mother and Father in One.

Hymn

Let us spend these moments in silence in which the private thoughts of each

shall ascend to Him unto who is All Light. For it is not right and meet to speak all

prayer in public, and those from the deep of the heart are often nearest the Heart of

the Beloved One.

Meditative Silence

(Spoken quietly) O Peace Profound, whose angels of light stand ever ready to

bless and impart this peace, forgive thy children who have stood before the Light of

Higher Judgment and judged themselves. May this Light that seeth all hidden

recesses of the soul, leave its Peace in thy children’s’ hearts. For they have in all

of 305

sincerity called upon Thy Holy Name.

Beloved Children of the One Great Spirit, receive the Peace of Him who

dwells within each soul. Let none rob you or disturb the thoughts by anxious tear or

doubt. For this Peace is most potent to heal every wound inflicted on the soul.

Receive this Peace and be at Peace with all.

Reading from Oahspe

Hymn of Consecration Prayer of Consecration.

Deepen Thou, O Great and Mighty Spirit of Eternity, the desire to do Thy

Will, that the love of doing Thy Will shalt become a mighty oak from such a small

beginning. For in this do we see the way Thy Kingdom is to be founded, in the

consecrated laborers who shall bring to pass the ancient prayer. So may Thy

Kingdom come, O Great Jehovih, established in the hearts of many, till come a

time when all shall know the name that is above all other names, O Great and

Mighty E-O-lh.

O Lords of Wisdom through whose mighty power the spoken word surpasses

the potency of the sword, grant us the wisdom to comprehend beyond all words the

Living Spirit and the sense of truth conveyed.

Address.

Closing Hymn

Benediction of Peace and Farewell to Angels

of 305

Fraternal Greetings:

Thanks for forwarding the letter re the article en I’Ching I. Ehsron Neknom

(writer’s name) used the Box number in Royston B.C. while here in Canada during

1984-5 when writing the article, and studying I’Ching and Oahspe, etc. He went to

Japan and China almost a year ago, he is expected to return shortly. His friend from

the Pentagon visited here last summer, when he extensively cross-examined one on

the depth of the I’Ching

Your article on I’Ching in the Faithist Journal was appreciated. In `More of

Oahspe” by Jim Dennon it mentioned that we are now in “the Arc of Suis”.

Therefore, we will be gradually more and more suis as time progresses. I’Ching I is

an aid to develop Suis. In our life, we are only answering questions daily. These

questions can be expanded, and developed by asking the cards. I’Ching II to VII

has been printed.

of 305

LAND OF SHALAM

by Marjorie White

Reprinted from True West magazine Dec. 1964)

One of the strangest colonies ever founded in America was the “Land of

Shalam,” established in 188k, in the Mesilla Valley, a few miles north of Las

Cruces, New Mexico, by a group of spiritualists called Faithists. The colony,

according to its promoters, was intended to start a “new world and new

civilization” with orphaned infants, raised apart from the evils of mankind, who

would serve as progenitors of a better world order. It was incorporated as the “First

Church of Tae” in articles filed with the secretary of the New Mexico Territory,

December 12, 1885. Foundling babies of all races were to be brought up on a strict

vegetarian diet, taught useful trades and occupations and given religious training in

Faithists principles. Through group living they would learn to be helpful,

cooperative, and loving toward one another. Why was this spot chosen for the

location? Nobody knows. The Faithist Bible, OAHSPE, outlined plans for the

colony to he set up along a river, which was called Shalam, According to reliable

sources, Dr. John Newbrough, leader of the colony and founder of the Faithist

movement, came to Las Cruces in the summer of 1884. After consulting with

brother Masons about available land for the colony, he purchased 1200 acres in a

scenic bend of the historic Rio Grand for $4,500. In October, 1884, Dr. Newbrough

and twenty followers encamped in tents on the land until laborers from the nearby

Spanish-American village of Dona Ana could build the structure called the

Fraternum, which was to house them all, meanwhile, receiving homes were set up

in New Orleans, Kansas City, Chicago and Philadelphia, where unwanted babies

could be left, no questions asked. The first ten children came to Shalam in 1887

and more came at intervals during the succeeding years. They were cared for first

in the Fraternum, then moved in 1890 to a separate two story brick children’s

home. All records of previous identity were destroyed and the children were given

new names taken from the Faithist Bible — Thouri’layah, Whaga, Fiatisi, for

example. Each child was deeded a share in the colony. Shalarn’s physical setup

was elaborate, when it was completed around 1891. The largest building was the

of 305

Fraternum which housed the adults, nurses and teachers for the children. It had

forty apartments opening onto a courtyard, lavish with trees and flowers, and was

furnished with such luxuries as a library and a steam laundry, operated by a

Chinese servant.

In addition to their separate home, the children had a schoolhouse with a

bubbling fountain in the courtyard. There was a circular Temple of The with a blue

star studded ceiling. This building collapsed mysteriously in 1900, surrounding the

buildings were acres of vineyards, orchards and gardens, watered by an extensive

irrigation system. More than a half million dollars was dissipated in the project,

which lasted until 1907 (23 years). Each child had his own nurse and his own

teacher, and a private porcelain bathtub! The vegetarian diet was relaxed to permit

milk for children under five years of age.

All residents of the colony dressed alike in white, sack like garments and

sandals, hats were taboo. The men wore beards and let their hair grow long. The

children had a gymnasium and plenty of pets, birds, dogs, ponies. Faithist New

Year’s was celebrated like Christmas with presents of toys ordered from eastern

stores. Ads in Faithist papers and periodicals attracted many converts during the

years of the colony’s existence. Some were sincere, some fanatic, some mentally

defective, others emotionally disturbed. Those who came in good faith were often

discouraged by the rigors of ascetic life and the hard work of caring for children

and maintaining the farm land. Several disgruntled colonists instituted suits in the

New S Mexico Territorial Courts in the 1900s to recover investments which they

had made in the project. The Territorial Supreme Court ruled that the litigants were

of normal intelligence and went into the deal with their eyes wide open. Dr. John

Newbrough founder of Shalam, has often been called a charlatan and a

mountebank. He was none the less a remarkable man for his time. Born in 1828,

near Springfield, Ohio, he was educated in medicine and dentistry, but deserted

both professions to follow the gold rush to California in 1849. From there, he went

on to Australia, still in quest of gold. Back in the United States, he practiced

dentistry in New York. A wealthy man, he was also charitable. He helped many

struggling young dentists, and invented a cheaper substance to make false teeth.

The New York Supreme Court reversed a lower court’s decision against him in a

of 305

case brought by the Goodyear Company which owned the patent ont he material

then used for making false teeth. In the `70s, Dr. Newbrough became interested in

the wave of spiritualism that was sweeping the country and found that he possessed

unusual psychic powers. He became a lecturer and founded several colonies of

fellow believers in the East.

The voices of the spirit world commanded him to buy a typewriter and then

dictated a fantastic history of world religions, called OAHSPE, which was to

become a Faithist Bible. Three thousand copies of this book, called the world’s

most extraordinary example of automatic writing, were published in 1882, a second

edition in 1831. The name, according to Ur. Newbrough, is Paneric, meaning earth,

sky, and spirit. Paneric, he said, is a dead language, known only in the spirit world.

It originated on the continent of Pan which once lay between Japan and North

America, extending from Australia to the Bering Sea. Pan was submerged by

floods 24,000 years ago, he said. Many sections of OAHSPE are written in Paneric

and the entire hook shows a strong Oriental influence. OAHSPE prescribes a

vegetarian diet, recognizes one supreme Creator, Jehovih, urges world citizenship,

eternal peace, and equal sharing of wealth. There would then be no need for

government, laws, leaders or preachers. Dr. Newbrough and several of the children

died in a flu epidemic which hit the Shalam colony in 1891. Andrew Howland, a

well to do wool merchant, formerly a Quaker, had been associated with Dr.

Newbrough in the founding of the colony, he had been commuting between New

Mexico and his New Bedford, Massachusetts home and business On news of the

doctor’s death, he gave up his secure, comfortable New England existence and took

over active management of the Shalam colony. Dr. Newbrough was a handsome

man, six feet, four inches tall, weighing 27) pounds, a forceful speaker, who had

attracted converts by his dynamic, almost hypnotic personality. Andrew Howland

was not so dynamic, but was even more sincerely dedicated to the project. So long

as he had it, he spared neither his money nor his physical energy for Shalam’s

success. Howland build a huge reservoir and irrigation system, powered by eight

windmills. ted more orchards and gardens, imported a purebred dairy herd from

Wisconsin, and bought a flock of several thousand chickens, he sold butter, eggs,

and milk (pasteurized in Shalam’s own plant) in the neighboring cities of Las

of 305

Cruces and El Paso. When he found that laborers were being charged high prices

for commodities, he put in a community store where food and clothing were sold at

cost. For families who wanted to live together, he built an adobe village, which he

called Levitica, allotting, with each house, land for cultivation.

Levitica was one of Howland’s first mistakes. The colonist quarreled and

refused to help themselves. They let 1,000 chickens freeze in one night. Some of

the livestock were stolen. Precious water leaked out of cracks in the wooden

irrigation ditches. Orchards and gardens withered and died from lack of water and

care. Howland eventually sent them away with prepaid railroad fares and spending

money. Before long, the school had to be dosed for lack of help; and the children,

sent to public schools, enjoyed the freer life of the outside world. A couple of the

older girls eloped. Other youngsters rebelled against the yard work and strange rites

of the colony in 1901, after arranging for the legal return of the property to himself,

Howland placed twenty one of the twenty five children under fourteen years of age

then at Shalam, in orphanages and private homes. Booker T Washington is said to

have taken one bright Negro boy. Howland peddled dairy products, vegetable

foods, cookies and potato chips in Las Cruces to keep the home going for the four

remaining children. On November 30, 1907, he gave up, locked the doors of

Shalam, and moved away. There was a woman behind the Shalam colony too. Mrs.

Frances Vand de Water Sweet, a young divorcee, came with the founding group in

1884, bringing with her an eight months old daughter, Justine. She married Dr.

Newbrough in Faithist rites, September 28, 1887, and then married Andrew

Howland, June 25, 1893, after Valley residents had spread much gossip about “free

love” in the colony. She was the one constant influence in the colony and is known

as the “Mother of Shalam.” The Shalam lands were sold in 1908 for $60,000.

The Howlands went to California for a couple of years but returned to make

their home in El Paso, where Mr. I-lowland died in 1917, at the age of eighty three.

Mrs. Howland died in 1922. Justine, using the pen name of Jone Howlind wrote for

an El Paso newspaper. Now eighty, she is reported to be living in Los Angeles and

is grandmother to eight or nine offspring of her three children. When Shalam was

closed, Justine moved the body of her stepfather, Dr. Newbrough, from the plot on

the colony grounds which had been used as a burial place, to the Masonic

of 305

Cemetery in Las Cruces. In 1952, a group of Faithists placed a granite monument

on the grave, honoring him. All that remains today are the childrens’ home,

recently used to house farm laborers, and the schoolhouse which was remodeled for

a barn. The bell from the Temple of Tae was donated to Our Lady of Purification

Church in Dona Ana and now calls Catholics to worship. Residents of Dona Ana

recall that the Shalam grounds were used for concerts, dances and picnics for

several years after the Howlands vacated the colony. Gradually, through disuse and

vandalism, the buildings fell into ruins. Fire ravaged the beautiful Fraternum and it

was razed about fifteen years ago. The original acreage of 1,200 shrank to 900 after

floods from the Rio Grande in the early l900s washed away land along the shores.

The Howlands sold it in 1908 to an agricultural syndicate. Since then, the

land has passed through a succession of owners, being gradually cut up into smaller

farms. Now then, in deep plowing the fields, present day owners dig up pieces of

the pipes that carried water from the Shalam reservoir to the buildings. With

irrigation from Elephant Buttle Dam, the site of the unusual Shalam experiment

now grows some of the finest cotton and alfalfa in the Mesilla Valley. Dr.

Newbrough prophesied eighty years ago that it would someday blossom like the

rose.” Shalam is a memory, but the Faithists live on among scattered groups in

various parts of the world, in England, South Africa, Japan, and in numerous states

in America. Faithists communicate with each other through a newsletter. They

follow a vegetarian diet and the precepts of OAHSPE, knowing that someday their

beliefs will he universally accepted, when “the existing religions of the world are

but myths.’

There are two sorts of people in the world, who with equal degrees of health

and wealth, become the one happy, and the other miserable. This arises very much

from the different views in which they consider things, persons and events; and the

effect of those different views upon their own minds. Franklin.

of 305

MEDITATION

by Alfred Holmes

Thanks to Thee, O Creator, that we are able to sustain an awareness of Thy

Presence and Rulership. And that we are able to find good in all things; and not be

overcome by the deceptive appearances of failure. We could easily believe that

darkness rules the world, and that the majority of humans are depraved and

unregenerate. But, we have faith in Thy Presence in every human soul; and in the

great truth that the soul of man is destined to be triumphant over all evil and

darkness. Once, we were at the point of despair, seeing no good in anything, ready

to give up the battle. But Thy Voice spoke within us, led us to a place of

inspiration, and revealed to us the truth of Thy Presence in every soul. We were

shown how to work with Thee and for Thee, how to develop our own higher self

and help others do the same. Since then, there have been many changes for the

better in our lives, both inner and outer. We are thankful. We rejoice because to the

good we can do, and the good we can see ahead for all people as Thy Plan unfolds.

MEDITATION

If a man feels that he should not be ruled or possessed by others, he should

feel also that he should not try to rule or possess others. In reality, man can own

nothing, not friends, nor loved ones, nor wealth nor status, nor power, nor even his

own physical body. All these things can desert him, or be taken away by a higher

authority. It happens in this world that most men are not even in possession of their

own souls. What exists, then, with which man can identify himself, and find his

reason for living? Only his Creator, Jehovih, Who is Ever-Present and All-

Powerful. A man can always say within himself, “I have Thee, O Creator; and

Thou hast me,” and know that He is in the realm of truth. Do you know, O mortal

man and earth-bound spirit, that since the earth began countless millions of her

children have grown to become gods and goddesses, servants of the Creator, living

and working in perfect unity in this realm of truth where you may find your

identity? Though you lose everything, and seem completely deserted and forsaken,

you are never alone. The Almighty and His Angel Hosts are your close companions

of 305

in love, strength, light, faith and purpose of benevolence.

MEDITATIONS

by Alfred Holmes

Thou art showing us, O Creator, how to be courageous, how to endure

without fear, how to be thankful for the bard experiences as well as for our

blessings. We have been affirming that Thou art the All-Doer, doing all for the

good of all. If we truly believe and live this, we will never complain against

anything that happens, but will always be strong in faith and willingness to serve;

and will see the good in every experience. Thou dost not stand as a judge over man,

dealing out rewards and afflictions to individuals according to their good or had

deeds. Yet Thou art the inmost, first Cause and Origin. Thou art back of all things,

working over long ages for the development of the whole body of humanity. And

Thou art the Essence and Substance of all being, the Intelligence, the Energy, the

Will, the Order, the Beauty, the Love. Thou art the inspiration of every living

creature – Ever–Present. In reality, Thou art experiencing with us all things that we

experience, for we are one and inseparable. Both light and darkness are

experienced by every soul. We will go on serving Thee persistently, the best we

know how, and take our experiences as they come, and make the most of them, for

Thy sake and the good of all.

of 305

MEDITATION

We become self-centered at times, O Creator, and concentrate upon our aches

and pains, trials and tribulations, and feel that we are most unfortunate, without

realizing that we are tuning to a very low condition of mind, and are not being

faithful to Thee. We say, “Oh, if only I didn’t feel so awful! If it weren’t for my ills

and troubles, I could bless people and do some good in the world.” Are we not

intensifying our difficulties by the attention we give them? Are we not cutting Thee

off? Compared to the great mass of underprivileged people in the world, we are

most fortunate. Why do we not give thanks for our blessings and benefits, and feel

compassion for those who are denied them? Compassion is so much more worthy a

feeling than is self pity. The spirit of thankfulness dissipates it completely. Praise is

like sunshine, warming, healing and uplifting. Recognition of Thy Presence is the

beginning of love for all, and is the starting point for the building of a new order of

peace and goodwill. No matter what the old self is feeling, we will ignore it, and

give Thee praise and thanks, O Creator, and be a blessing for all in our world.

MEDITATION

Millions of angels are blessing millions of souls on earth. Millions of earth

bound spirits are being uplifted. Thy Hosts, O Creator, are working in unison. All

are attuned to One Keynote which is, Thy Supreme Intelligence, Authority and

Love. Or, to use a single term. Thy Supreme Being. We are part of Thy Work, one

with Thy Hosts. We have the responsibility and obligation to be loyal to them and

to Thee. We are determining to be loyal; and to continue trying to see how we can

be better instruments for thee, so that a greater and greater work can he

accomplished through us. How wonderful it is that we are learning to rise above

discouragement and depression and to overcome moods of darkness! Now, we

need but to affirm Thy Presence and the magnitude of Thy Works, and our oneness

with Thee, to dissipate the clouds and stand in the Light with Thee. This is no

personal achievement for personal glory. This is the power and glory of Thy Being

coming into expression through many souls in this Day for the establishment of a

new order of peace and goodwill on earth.

of 305

MEDITATION

By Alfred Holmes

Thou art showing us, O Creator, how to be courageous, how to endure

without fear, how to be thankful for the bard experiences as well as for our

blessings. We have been affirming that Thou art the All-Doer, doing all for the

good of all. If we truly believe and live this, we will never complain against

anything that happens, but will always be strong in faith and willingness to serve;

and will see the good in every experience. Thou dost not stand as a judge over man,

dealing out rewards and afflictions to individuals according to their good or had

deeds. Yet Thou art the inmost, first Cause and Origin. Thou art back of all things,

working over long ages for the development of the whole body of humanity. And

Thou art the Essence and Substance of all being, the Intelligence, the Energy, the

Will, the Order, the Beauty, the Love. Thou art the inspiration of every living

creature — Ever Present. In reality, Thou are experiencing with us all things that

we experience, for we are one and inseparable. Both light and darkness are

experienced by every soul. We will go on serving Thee persistently, the best we

know how, and take our experiences as they come, and make the most of them, for

Thy sake and the good of all.

Our blessings and benefits, and feel compassion for those who are denied

them? Compassion is so much more worthy a feeling than is self pity. The spirit of

thankfulness dissipates it completely. Praise is like sunshine, warming, healing and

uplifting. Recognition of Thy Presence is the beginning of love for all, and is the

starting point for the building of a new order of peace and goodwill. No matter

what the old self is feeling, we will ignore it, and give Thee praise and thanks, O

Creator, and be a blessing for all in our world.

of 305

TOWARD SOLVING THE PROBLEMS IN OUR LIVES

The pressures of living in an evil society can get to us. But there is much to

hope for in the midst of apparent hopelessness. Life’s crises and injuries happen to

us all, the loss of security, of the support and closeness of someone important, of a

career or job with scant chance of replacement, the difficulties of rearing tempted

teenagers in light, the loss of a marriage and breakup of a borne and its

disorientation, the loss of health, being bedridden. These and other things can strain

the human spirit and effect our ability to be cheerful, optimistic and courageous

about life. But we are never alone. Jehovih is ever present, there and available for

constant communication, hearing our every prayer and we know it when, amazed,

we see how fast our prayers are answered. He is loving and merciful and His loving

caring angels do intervene in our lives. He can lift us from despair and hopeless

situations with His unseen power to change circumstances in our lives. Each day,

no matter how difficult, holds the possibility of some help, some change, some

breakthrough, a change of direction, a new approach, some light on the matter,

maybe a new attitude. We are not alone in going through difficult times in the

world — the world is going through the difficult time of early Kosmon when those

in darkness react to unaccustomed light. Each day brings the world closer to the

end of mans’ darkness and false god inspired ways of war, of dictation, of self

motivated greed and arrogance. There will come a time when precisely what you

wish were world conditions will be the true world conditions but here we are living

in the present. At least we are fortunate not to have been born into the times of

witch hunts or the Christian Inquisitions where Faithists were thrown to the lions or

worse. The awareness that better limes are forthcoming can put strength into us as

we continue on with our lives and we are determinedly cheerfully courageous

against adversity until changes do come. Our example of living in light will gain

due reward in time so let us continue to be charitable though what we practice is

unseen, unsung and appears to be unappreciated by those around us — but not

unappreciated by the Creator. We can trust that in time those choosing to live in

their highest light will be rewarded. There are tunes when for prolonged periods we

seem to struggle by ourselves and we reach and pass through times when we can

hardly bear to live arid we feel the depths of despair and discouragement. hut

of 305

because we not only believe in the Creator but act according to His wishes we are

Faithists in Him and therefore survivors one way or the other. There are times

when all we seem to get for our labor is opposition and hardship. Then, to go

through what we must suffer, we must become pretty good at picking ourselves up

after beatings that sometimes bring is close to death. Why is this a part of lift?

What do we go through this? Because to learn what we are here to learn we have to

experience both the depths of despair and the heights of joy, to rebound back to

cheerful courage and faith enough times to sustain courage and faith and strength

through it all!. So there are times when it seems that the Creator lets us struggle

alone and other times when His angels personally intervene and lift our spirits.

Aren’t we fortunate to be able to expect the Creator to directly intervene in our

lives. Because anything is possible to the Creator and to His God, things that to us

mortals are not possible are possible after all and easy and of no great consequence

so we can entertain high hopes. We will not be deserted by the Almighty so

consequently we will be attended by His Angel Hosts and we may attract inspired

mortals and be a chain in all this ourselves and perhaps therefore our painful

experiences make us better fit to understand and help others. Each day brings us

closer to a time when the seeming hopelessness of today will be past. Keep

cheerful and smile am your awareness of the Almighty power of the Creator. All

the cheerful courage you get to face the challenges of these tough times come from

Him.

of 305

JEHOVIH THE CREATOR

Veronica Halley

Who or what created things seen and unseen? Who other than Jehovih the

Creator who has always been. His Power moves in both great and small; His

Precious Life is in each and all No matter what is our call His life exists in each

and all.

Be ye black, white, short, or tall, Jehovih’s Source exists in each and all.

In man, beasts, birds, and trees, The earth, the sky, or the seas; Whatever is

seen or unseen, Jehovih is the Architect of all and has always been.

MEDITATION

Thoughts and feelings of a selfish nature are constantly playing upon our

consciousness. They belong to the darkness of the world. Earth bound spirits

impinged upon our natures want us to keep tuned with world darkness, for this is

their delight. When we attune ourselves with the higher beings, to serve the

Almighty, the spirits are disturbed and miserable; and this is the source of our

misery. In order to save ourselves from these disturbing reactions, we try to avoid

certain efforts of a mental nature which directly oppose the thoughts and feelings of

the impingements. We feel that we can concentrate upon awareness, on breathing,

without thought and without bringing our wills to bear, and this will be effective in

the work of the Almighty. Shalt we use our willing and reasoning faculties more

than we do? Shall we use words more? Shall we affirm more? And not be afraid of

reactions? Shall we directly oppose the spirits — each one within himself — with

greater force of will and reason?

Answer:

Use every possible means of opening the door to higher inspiration, but let

each one decide for himself. Let no one impose his will or opinion on others. The

mental faculties are given to us to be used, Thinking is as much a part of life as

feeling. The soul must eventually get complete control of the brain. Let the soul

begin now in the degree that it is able, to use all faculties of will, wisdom and love.

of 305

Let the soul be the thinker. Let the soul ponder, reason, meditate, question, and

probe into the deepest recesses of the mortal consciousness. If the soul doesn’t act

in these areas of the brain, they remain under the control of the self; that is, the

psychic world of mortals. Let the soul bring its will and purpose into expression

through the brain areas where spirits have lodged themselves in order to control

mortals. Use affirmations wherever, whenever and however you can, creating new

ones constantly. Have faith that the Almighty is handling and controlling the

reactions of spirits. Use meditative prayer. Ask yourselves questions and get your

own answers from within yourselves. Feel that you are talking directly to your

Creator. Stand before him in complete candor, honesty and sincerity of selfless

purpose, willing to lose all in order to serve the good of all. You, as divine souls,

now have the ability to use your own brain faculties of the will and intellect. You

can grow in knowledge through reason. The research scientist thinks and thinks and

searches deeper and deeper, learns by trial and error, until finally he comes up with

the answer he is seeking. When you reason on the level of the All Highest Good,

your attunement is with the All Highest, and your answers will be from the All and

Soul of all souls, Who art to the understanding of all the living even as the sun is to

the light of day.

of 305

MEDITATION

We become self-centred at times, O Creator, and concentrate upon our aches

and pains, trials and tribulations, and feel that we are most unfortunate, without

realizing that we are tuning to a very low condition of mind, and are not being

faithful to Thee. We say, “Oh, if only I didn’t feel so awful! If it weren’t for my ills

and troubles, I could bless people and do some good in the world.” Are we not

intensifying our difficulties by the attention we give them? Are we not cutting Thee

off? Compared to the great mass of underprivileged people in the world, we are

most fortunate. Why do we not give thanks for our blessings and benefits, and feel

compassion for those who are denied them? Compassion is so much more worthy a

feeling than is self-pity. The spirit of thankfulness dissipates it completely. Praise is

like sunshine, warming, healing and uplifting. Recognition of Thy Presence is the

beginning of love for all, and is the starting point for the building of a new order of

peace and goodwill. No matter what the old self is feeling, we will ignore it, and

give Thee praise and thanks, O Creator, and be a blessing for all in our world.

MEDITATION

If a person is critical of us, O Creator, acting superior, and demonstrating a

lack of faith in us, shall we defend ourselves? What should our attitude be? It

seems that we must react in such a way as to awaken in him a higher feeling. We

must try to get a response from Thy Presence in him. How can we best do this? By

demonstrating faith in him. But not speaking resentfully, argumentatively or

defensively. By being light hearted and humorous, not serious, by showing

willingness to take criticism. Have we not ourselves criticized others at times. Do

we not at times feel superior to others? If we are serving Thee, O Creator, we will

serve Thy Presence in the other person, not ourselves. We do not want to make

another feel inferior or in error. We want to delight the other person, raise him up,

make him feel more divine, more close to Thee. We do not want to exalt ourselves

in anyone’s eyes, but to help them awaken to Thy Presence within. Yet we do not

want to appear merely to be flattering them or currying favour. We look for Thy

guidance, O Jehovih.

of 305

THOUGHT

Thought may be one of the most significant, yet least understood factors in

human spiritual growth. The process of thought is generally believed to be a purely

private matter having a momentary bearing on themselves alone. Actually, because

high spirits work to raise those under them on every level, thoughts come from

without.

The great majority of people have formed the habit of listless thinking, which

makes them incapable of holding onto any subject until it is thoroughly mastered.

Although thoughts which flit through the mind may be good, bad, or indifferent,

mostly the latter, the mind does not usually hold on to any one of them sufficiently

long to learn its nature. Thought control is often very difficult to attain. Once

attained, however, the possessor holds within his hand the success in whatever line

he may be engaged.

Thought force is the most powerful means of obtaining knowledge. If it is

concentrated upon a subject, it will burn its way through any obstacle and solve the

problem. If the requisite amount of thought force is brought to bear there is nothing

that is beyond the power of human comprehension. So long as we scatter it,

thought force is of little use to us but as soon as we are prepared to take the trouble

necessary to harness it, all knowledge is ours.

Many people contend that we have a right to think what we will, and that

wicked thoughts, if not translated into wicked deeds, are not harmful. This is far

from true, and the power of wicked thoughts, just as the power of good and

beneficent thoughts, is great indeed. Through the course of centuries, for instance

man’s evil thoughts of fear and hatred crystallize into what we know as bacilli. The

bacilli of infectious disease are particularly the embodiments of fear and hate, and

therefore, they are also vanquished by the opposite force, courage. If we enter the

presence of a person infected with contagious disease in fear and trembling, we

must assuredly draw to ourselves the poisonous microbes. If on the other hand, we

approach that person in a perfectly fearless attitude, we shall escape the infection,

particularly if we are prompted by love. If a tuning fork is struck and another

tuning fork of the same pitch is in the vicinity, the second one will ring in concert

of 305

with the first. Likewise, when we think a thought and another person in our

environment has been thinking along the same line, our thoughts coalesce with his

and strengthen him for good or evil, according to the nature of the thought.

When we go into a jury box and see the criminal, we behold only the act; we

have no cognizance of the thought which prompted it. If we have been in the habit

of thinking evil, malicious thoughts against someone, these thoughts may have

been attractive to that criminal.

On the principle that a saturated solution of salt will require only a single

crystal to make it solidify, so also, if a man has saturated his brains with thoughts

of murder, the thought of murder that another person sends out may prove to be the

last straw and destroy that last barrier which would have kept the murderer from

committing his evil act.

Therefore our thoughts are of vastly more importance than our acts. If we

always think right, we shall always act right. No man can think love to his fellow

men or can scheme about how to hold them spiritually, mentally or physically

without also acting out these thoughts. If we cultivate such thoughts, we shall soon

find sunshine spreading around us; we shall find that people will meet us in the

same spirit we send out.

If then we see meanness and smallness in the people whom we meet, it would

be well to ascertain if we ourselves are not causing such qualities to emanate from

us. The man who is mean and small himself radiates these qualities and whomever

he meets will appear mean to him because his thoughts will have caused something

of identical pitch in the other person to vibrate.

If on the other hand, if we cultivate a serene attitude and thoughts that are

free from covetousness and are frankly honest and helpful, we shall call out the

best in other people. Therefore let us realize that it is not until we have cultivated

the better qualities in ourselves that we can expect to find them in others. We are

thus most certainly responsible for our thoughts. We are indeed our brothers’

keepers, for as we think when we meet them, so do we appear to them and they

reflect our attitude.

of 305

If we want to obtain help to cultivate better qualities then let us seek the

company of people who are already good, for their attitude of mind will be of

immense help to us in calling forth our own finer qualities.

It does not always appear easy to rid ourselves of evil thoughts, and most of

us cannot help but encounter people or situations which call forth negative

thinking, try as we will to fight it. But there is a simple way of dismissing such

unwanted thoughts which does not involve fighting them at all. Both like and

dislike tend to attract a thought or an idea to us, and the added thought force which

we send out to fight evil thoughts will keep them alive and bring them to our mind

oftener, in the same way that quarrelling may cause a person we dislike to waylay

us for spite. Instead of fighting, therefore, let us adopt the tactics of indifference. If

we turn our heads the other way when we meet a person we dislike, he will soon

grow tired of following us. On the same principle if we but turn away with

indifference when thoughts of evil come into our minds, and apply our minds to

something that is good and ideal, we shall find in a short time that we are rid of the

evil thoughts and have only the good thoughts we desire to entertain.

Only when mankind comes to an understanding of the true nature and proper

use of this divine force can humanity free itself from the fetters of materiality and

continue the upward path towards becoming a self-conscious Creative Being.

Walter Devoe

of 305

SLEEP

According to Oahspe, we are spoken to in our sleep for a very good reason.

That reason is that Ashars have the job of teaching mortals the way. Do you find it

difficult to sleep through the night, and toss and turn? As a result to you awaken

tired instead of refreshed? If instead of allowing thoughts of yesterday and

tomorrow to harass you, you make your awake time, a time for meditation and read

or think positive messages, prayers or etc., you will gain as much from such time

awake as you would from sleeping time. Sleep takes up about a third of our time on

earth. It can be useful time. What stops us from realizing our objectives is our

failure to feel that we are already what we strive and wish to be, we already have

that which we seek so much. Our subconscious gives form to our strong desires

only when we feel our wishes fulfilled. We draw conditions to us. We draw out of

the atmosphere not what we wish so hard for but that which we are and we are

what we feel ourselves to be.

AN ARGUMENT IN FAVOR OF SOUL-MATES

by Belle Brand Sundgren

One day while wondering how I could explain soul-mates so that it would

make sense, I heard an Etherean speak. Our conversation went like this:

Etherean: Why are you troubled?

B: I just need a better way to explain soul-mates so that it will be believable.

E: Who created you?

B: The Creator — Father of us all.

E: Is the Creator all male?

B: No, the Creator would have to be male and female

E: And how does the Creator create souls?

B: As I understand it, “he” gives of himself. We are a part of him.

E: And that self is what?

B: (Beginning to see the light) Both male and female!

E: Exactly so that the soul has to be both, being from the Creator — male and

female.

B: And then what?

of 305

E: The loo’is must find physical bodies for this male and female soul and so

they are separated and these physical bodies are found. It matters not when each is

born but you will find that their likes and dislikes are the same and that their lives

will parallel each other. Eventually they are destined to meet. Either here or there.

B: But what happens to the part which is being held back?

E: It is in abeyance and is absorbing. That is what makes geniuses of some of

those held for any length of time.

B: Mozart for instance.

F: Oh, yes.

Whether you buy this or not is up to you but I did. I think it’s just great and

makes a great deal of sense. Our Creator is loving and kind. He knows, left to our

own free will, there are many mismatches and unhappiness because of it. So He

gives us this to which we can look forward. Oranothon once said, “Without soul-

mates there would be no peace in the heavens.” And who should know better?

MEDITATION

In affirming Thy Presence, O Creator, we are not trying to make something

happen, but are trying to keep ourselves awake to what is happening. In answering

our critics, we do not want to explain or defend ourselves, or talk about ourselves

for any reason, though we may do so at times. It is not our purpose to be examples

to others of superior soul expression, but to help awaken others to Thy Presence in

themselves, to help them see how they can conquer their fears, and become

happier, healthier human beings; doing this not for the sake of the self but for Thy

sake, O Creator, and the betterment of humanity as a whole. As long as we think

about ourselves, talk about ourselves, and plan for ourselves, we are not striking

the right keynote. Our effort must be to constantly think and talk about Thee, our

Creator, to build up our awareness so that we are able to see Thy Presence in all

people and all things, being willing to accept whatever comes our way and make

the best of it. We affirm for everyone that Thou art with them, speaking in their

souls; that Thou art victorious in them now and forever.

of 305

MEDITATIONS by The Eloists

We cannot tell people, O Creator, what Thy angels are trying or planning to

do, but we can tell them what we are trying to do. Would it not be right to say that

we are trying to learn how to love our fellowmen rather than hate them, to praise

rather than criticize them, to uplift rather than burden them, to practice good works

toward them rather than be forever competing, and to replace our fears with faith?

In the matter of worship, why can we not say we worship the Creator of all, and try

to serve Him in our daily lives? And say that we feel in our efforts that we are

contributing something worthwhile to all humanity? We can say, perhaps, that we

are not ambitious to be recognized, to make a big splash in the world, or to get

anything from the world but the necessities of life; and that the success of our

efforts depends more upon privacy than publicity. It is undercover work, is it not?

A sort of secret service? To tell the world all about it would be to invite opposition

and court disaster. Only Thou knowest, O Creator! We feel we have Thee on our

side, for we are on Thy side. Praise and thanks to Thee for the work Thou hast

given us.

of 305

Praise

Praise to Thee Jehovih! We rejoice in Thy Presence in us. We give our faith

and devotion to Thy Presence in every soul. We know Thou art present every

moment, that Thou art the All-Doer in and through us. Yet, we need to make an

effort to express Thee, to help conquer the darkness of the world. We need to

exercise our talents and faculties. Dark thoughts and feelings rise up in us, and we

must bring our will, thought and feeling to bear to counteract or dispel the

darkness. There are no two people alike, and we will each work somewhat

differently, but the purpose is the same — to help lift the darkness of the world.

Sometimes we use words; sometimes no words, but motion or action; sometimes

both; and sometimes neither words nor motion, but stillness. All this is to help

purify us spiritually and to develop a new consciousness, the awareness of Thy

Presence and Rulership. We are serving one another physically as well, helping one

another in every needful way. This is part of Thy work, too, in which we find

development of our natural abilities for creating and serving, and help to make our

world better. Thou art the true Doer, accomplishing through us, O Creator. All

praise to Thee.

Prayer

How can we help relieve pain in another, O Creator? All we know is to give

faith, love and strength to Thy Presence in him. We can affirm Thy Rulership in his

body, his mind and his soul. Express for him the same as we would. were we

ourselves. pain, not pitying self, but proclaiming Thy Presence and Dominion. We

do not see all the causes of pain, but Thy angels do; and we can generate the kind

of atmosphere in which they can work. The causes are long standing and deep

rooted. The individual is a victim of age old darkness, and is not to be blamed,

though he does have the ability to help heal himself and free himself. We know

only one course of action, O Creator and that is to praise and rejoice in Thy

Presence, to love Thee and serve Thee, to try to emulate Thee and to act as Thy

instrument of upliftment for all in our world. We feel we are helping all; yet at

times a single person close to us may need individual treatment. This is what we

question. How best can treatment be given? To cure a specific ailment? We have

of 305

faith that Thou wilt direct us wisely.

Prayer

Many a man has felt, O Creator, that his words are deathless, that his

messages ought to be written in the skies for all to see. But they never are. There

are great books of wisdom and truth in the world today but they are ignored by

mankind. For, with Thee, it is not words, but deeds which count the most. It is the

action people take, not their words, which will transform the world, or wreck it. So

we ask that we may be moved to action, not foolishly or impulsively, but to do

whatever it is we are capable of doing. We see our limitations, and we know that

unless we are purified and transformed, we cannot accomplish very much. All we

can do is hold our ideal and purpose before us, and keep working toward it, having

faith that Thou wilt use us according to our capabilities. We do not want to be

leaders. We only want to do our best, not for self’s sake, but to glorify thee. The

possible value of words is that they tan inspire people to action. They can awaken

inspiration that is latent. They can strengthen purpose. So we will continue using

words until we know how to do better in other ways.

But as for it being a fundamental axiom, it is nothing of the sort. There never

as a beginning and there never will be an end. The life of Jehovih always was. Man

thinks in his heart that death is something diabolical and he links it with an

imaginary Satan in his thinking perceiving not that it is an act of love and wisdom

on the part of the Creator who created death so that he may enter, in Spirit the

worlds of immortality. And if man would use the Divine faculty of reason within

his own thoughts, he would eventually come to this conclusion for in no other way

can the spirit of man enter the world of endless duration but through the door of

death that marks all things of the corporeal dimension. “I am The Life, the One

Life of all,” the Great Spirit JEHOVIH said. “Because I am Life, My children shall

live in My life and forever will I sustain them, who am the Life of all forms of

life.” O Man! What is a thought? Is it subjective? Or objective? Is it of the

tangible? Or is it of the intangible? Thou knowest not. Wilt thou guess? Then let us

say unto you, it is of the tangible and is of the real. It is dropped as a seed into the

ground and seems to die and then sprout into life. So with thoughts. And by the

of 305

power of thoughts are things both created and uncreated; and of all things in the

universe, most powerful of all is this:-thought! Thoughts expressed create a thing

of beauty. What man has achieved or created anything but first he thought and

conceived it in his mind? Without thought he could not conceive nor create, and

life as he knows it would be without expression or comprehension or meaning at

all. Therefore thought is the substance whereby all things in manifestation come

into being. O Man, thy capacity to think thoughts if of Me, and in itself is proof of

My being and My Person.

of 305

PRAYER FOR THE DIVINE LINK, FOR THE UPLIFTING ENFOLDMENT OF ALL

O OM, Divine Mother, Mother of all Life everywhere, the only source of all

pure love and perfection, we Thy children turn to thee, that thou mayst fill our

hearts and minds with Thy eternal love for all Thy children in all creation.

Our Father, Who in Thy wisdom, hast created and shall create all that is and

ever shall be, with foresight and loving Concern for all, anchor Thy Light of

wisdom within us, that we may become co-creators of Good with Thee.

Help us co-ordinate Thy Light, on the spiritual, mental and physical planes,

harmoniously, to fulfil Thy Holy Will on all levels of consciousness. Make us

conscious, of the meaning of Thy Cycles and our Times and of the Times to come,

so that knowingly we may co-work with Thy masters of the cycles, thus

understanding and accepting the ever increasing changes in and around us and

fulfilling our places in the plan of redemption of Earth, happily and gladly.

Being aware of the ever new creating rhythm of the universe and gladly

turning ourselves to become a harmonious part of it all.

Liberated from mental limitations, no longer laboring under the wrong

impressions of others, nor wishing to be rewarded by others, for our labors for

them, in any sense or form, sublimely dedicated to the sacred cause of Uplifting

Enfoldment of All, of which Thou alone art the Limitless Source.

When material things exert their influences upon us, remind us, O Eternal

Wisdom and Love that there is no reality in material things alone, and by doing the

spiritual, the material will automatically fall into its rightful and orderly place.

When we feel the needs of Thy children, yet unable to go to their aid,

physically, let us not suffer in needless frustration, but through Thy endless Love,

unite us with our enlightened brothers and sisters of the white ray, whose Love so

like Thine, descends to all levels of need, uniting our powers with theirs, bring

solace and spiritually based new beginning to them. Then they shall hear Thy

golden voice of silence and in Thy Peace, understand Thy assurance of eternal

Love and Care for them.

of 305

Help us to accept willingly all positions in life where Thou has placed us,

unquestioningly accomplishing that which shall be for the greater good of all. Fill

us with true Humility and Spiritual Strength, knowing whatever the outward

appearance of the opposing forces may be, thou art within them also, though

hidden to all visible means, yet ever clear to the True Vision of the Soul. Being

aware of Thee within all, including ourselves, the sweet music of Harmony shall

increase through earth, and earth shall sing with Thy Glory. Amen.

of 305

VOICES FROM THE SPIRIT WORLD

DON PICKARD

To do good because it is right to do is good. It brings its own prize to us in

the awareness that we have lived to our best and highest light, and the satisfaction

of knowing that is greater than any other reward that could come our way. It is

sufficient that we hear the Voice of the Father within us saying, Well done my son,

My daughter. All the prayers that rise to the Father are answered to the extent the

prayer thinks in, acts in, lives in light. Prayers are answered immediately, prayers

are answered sometime later, some are yet to be answered. Every prayer and

request for wisdom and guidance is answered and none forgotten. Sometimes the

answer is not the kind of answer we expect to get. The end result of it all may be to

redirect our footsteps in another way. But just as a father and mother give deep

thought and concern to the problems their own children bring them, so the Great

Spirit, the Father of all the living, gives the same care and attention to mortal

prayers. The weapons men use in wars on earth are well known to all of you. But

the weapons used in spiritual battles are these: pity, gentleness and examples of

tenderness. This is the difference between the earth armory and the armory of the

holy angels of the Great Spirit in the higher worlds. The true beginning of wisdom,

for man, is to desire that wisdom and to prize it highly. First comes desire for it,

then the growth from the root system in the soul. This shall spring up and give of

its blossoms eternally. This springs initially from the desire to become wise. The

foolish man says, I am wise. The wise man says, I am beginning to understand

what wisdom is. There is a wisdom of the earth and there is a wisdom of the

heavens, and the two are not the same. The source of all wisdom is of the Creator,

the Great Spirit. A man hath but to become as a child, and ask for wisdom. This is

the easiest of all paths to take and the most sure and certain as to its results. The

wisdom of the earth would be but the blind leading the blind, were it not for the

work of heaven. The wisdom of the heavens is the wisdom of those with true sight.

Each mortal has two birthdays. One is the date of birth, your entry into mortal life,

and the other day is the date of your death in mortality. To us who watch these

proceedings, that second birthday is also cause for much rejoicing., for ever onward

of 305

your birthday will be the second date. Great is the rejoicing when you hear the

mortal child give vent to a cry or a shout soon as the air comes into the lungs.

But as for it being a fundamental axiom, it is nothing of the sort. There never

as a beginning and there never will be an end. The life of Jehovih always was. Man

thinks in his heart that death is something diabolical and he links it with an

imaginary Satan in his thinking perceiving not that it is an act of love and wisdom

on the part of the Creator who created death so that he may enter, in Spirit the

worlds of immortality. And if man would use the Divine faculty of reason within

his own thoughts, he would eventually come to this conclusion for in no other way

can the spirit of man enter the world of endless duration but through the door of

death that marks all things of the corporeal dimension. “I am The Life, the One

Life of all,” the Great Spirit JEHOVIH said. “Because I am Life, My children shall

live in My life and forever will I sustain them, who am the Life of all forms of

life.” O Man! What is a thought? Is it subjective? Or objective? Is it of the

tangible? Or is it of the intangible? Thou knowest not. Wilt thou guess? Then let us

say unto you, it is of the tangible and is of the real. It is dropped as a seed into the

ground and seems to die and then sprout into life. So with thoughts. And by the

power of thoughts are things both created and uncreated; and of all things in the

universe, most powerful of all is this: — thought! Thoughts expressed create a

thing of beauty. What man has achieved or created anything but first he thought

and conceived it in his mind? Without thought he could not conceive nor create,

and life as he knows it would be without expression or comprehension or meaning

at all. Therefore thought is the substance whereby all things in manifestation come

into being. O Man, thy capacity to think thoughts if of Me, and in itself is proof of

My being and My Person.

But on the second birthday you hang around, full of grief, and at a loss, not

knowing exactly what to do. But the same scenes of love repeat themselves in a

different setting as the spirit is born through the top of the head and carried

lovingly away to homes of rest and peace, while the adjustment is gradually made

to acclimatize the spirit to the life of spirit. And in many respects there is this

similarity in the same helpless state for the first birth. So likewise is often the

second birth, but to most mortals the moment of our rejoicing is the moment of

of 305

their sorrow and deep grief. Even so, it is good for This reality to be proclaimed to

you, so that in the hour of your mourning the loss of a loved one, you may also

catch a glimpse in the mind, of the rejoicing there is in the spirit worlds. in the

early days I gave My angels charge over you so that whether you fail forward on

the face or backward, or sideways, they will be there to help you stand upright and

learn to walk; and when you cross over into the life of Spirit, these same loving

angels will continue this ministry of love, which they do in My name unto each

soul I create and bring into life. Only those who choose to be alone in life shall be

so. Those who long for fellowship and affiliation to them it shall be, according to

their desire. No man, no woman, no child, shall ever be long unto themselves, other

than by choice. Words are but coins of speech and are approximations to truth and

reality. For example you use the words, “in the beginning” but we say: What do

you mean by this terminology? What beginning? For the Life always was! There

was no beginning. There is no end. And in your thinking, any reference to a

beginning can never be other than an approximation to a reality beyond the finite

mind to comprehend. Providing this is understood this qualification observed, it is

in order to use this particular coin of exchange as to ideas.

of 305


MEDITATION

Praise to Thee, O Jehovih, Creator and Sustainer — In Whom we live, move

and have our being! Thou hast given us many faculties through which Thou canst

inspire us, both corporeal and spiritual. When we think arc! reason, search and

question, meditate arid pray, we are inspired by Thee. When we are loving and

sympathetic, kind, generous, friendly, cheerful and faithful, Thou art inspiring us.

When we are strong land purposeful, persistent, courageous, willing and

determined, Thou art inspiring us. Through the five corporeal senses, Thou are

inspiring us every waking moment. And there are spiritual counterparts, and

faculties within faculties, yet to be developed. In our present knowledge, we are

touching only the surface of things. According to our attunement and development,

art Thou inspiring us. We ask for self’s sake, and we are answered from the self

worlds. We ask for Thy sake, and we receive from Thy angelic worlds. Thou art

the All-Doer, doing all for the good of all.

of 305


PROPHECY

by Fred Almquist

This world has seen many prophets and holy men since the beginning of its

time. Few of us are acquainted with more than the few which follow the lineage

from Abram through Moses. There were two other holy men contemporaneous

with Moses. One was called Capilya, a lawgiver, and he restored the worship of the

One Great Spirit. He was a native of India. The other holy man’s name was Chine,

after whom his native country was named, “China.” He was a lawgiver, and

restored the name of the Creator, Jehovih.

The actual presence of these holy men may be confirmed by anyone through

a search of ancient history. The presence of these men on earth is a fact, but the

greater import is the conviction — that the Great Spirit who created us, has always,

and will be always developing His creations. We find this Spirit present

everywhere, at all ages, and at all times. It is not limited to one certain person, or

one certain organization, or one certain nation, nor even to one certain world. It is

universal and yet personal.

The realization of this boundless extension, should remind us of our own

puny position. Our earth is only a tiny pinpoint speck in our solar system. As we go

beyond the solar system, the earth would become invisible. Try to imagine yourself

as a certain part of this earth. You can’t do it actually. When you get only a mile

high, the people become invisible, and this earth is 25,000 miles in circumference.

But we know the Spirit is here with us because we can experience it.

A prophet or a holy man is like any other person, but he has discovered a

secret and by using it, he becomes stronger in Spirit.

The man or woman “in Spirit” will develop more of their natural ability than

the ordinary person does. This condition is also expressed as “being in tune with

yourself.”

Truly, if a person could realize all that he had ever learned, in a moments

of 305

time, he or she would be wise indeed. And this condition is yours if you want

There is a very definite pattern for this development, and a worthy goal to

aim for, If one desires to go beyond the ordinary, he must first be in tune with

himself. Such must be your wisdom. Second, you must be in tune with your

immediate surroundings. This second condition involves inspiration, and cannot be

properly executed until you are fully established in the first condition.

(constitutional) Third, you must extend yourself beyond the earth and even beyond

the solar system. You must comprehend the magnitude of creation. Fourth, you

must be in tune with Jehovih, so that you move, act, and comprehend Him in

harmony. This is at-one-ment with the Almighty.

Every prophet or holy man knew and kept these four rules. Without them, no

matter what you have accomplished, you are nothing more than any ordinary

person. You have every faculty you need right now. All you need to do is give in.

Stop right where you are. Close your eyes. Relax. Look into the light, gather up all

the courage and determination you are capable of, and offer yourself body and soul

to the Father’s service. Give all. Don’t hold back anything. And when the Spirit

manifests, keep it with you as long as you can.

To him who attains this development, things past and things to come are as

an open book. You might even look back to your beginning in the world, or even

beyond. We can become so saturated with Spirit, that no matter where we look, we

can see and hear even as if the matter were here and now. No matter how many

books or sermons we have contemplated or read, never before has this matter been

placed before us so clearly and understandably. We have been told many times,

that we should become one with God, but what good is that advice to a person who

is blind or wandering around in the dark?

Man consists of two bodies and the two are one person or personality, the

material body and the spirit body. The twain are married. To live in harmony with

yourself, you must give equal consideration to your spirit body, which must have

nourishment else it will not grow. The physical body must be nourished or it will

not grow or be sustained. They are one body and are interdependent.

of 305

When a man and a woman get married, they set up a joint partnership, and

create what is called a home or a family. Every person has his or her own private

thoughts, desires, habits, loves, personality etc. If one of them becomes abusive or

overbearing, the harmony between them is destroyed, and the home becomes a

place of discord, abuse, hatred, bitterness, hostility and destruction. These

conditions are so common among us, we might wonder why so many of us fail to

profit by the examples.

Our mind is the controlling agent over our behavior and if we neglect to form

the habit of discipline and control, we will not have peace and happiness in our

home or within ourselves. Self-control should be our first and most cherished habit.

This is the key to wisdom, peace, patience, harmony and perfection. Self-control

must be mastered.

When we first start practicing relaxation, we usually find that we must make

a special effort for each operation, in order to overcome the needless strains we

may have been using. We may overcome this excessive straining habit in a few

days or a few weeks. Then again, it may take some of us months or even years to

realize the full benefit of relaxing. But no matter how long it takes, it must be

accomplished. This is co-ordination of the physical body.

Some religionists believe they must abuse the body, in order to be holy. Such

a theory must be the product of a mind in darkness. If you are one of those who

holds this theory of self torture, then please, please, make a double effort to find the

light. In the light there is no misery, torture or abuse. You don’t have to be poor

and ragged in order to be holy. You don’t have to be poor or ragged for any reason

under the sun. Many true prophets were lawgivers and they were members of the

elect families. They had everything that money and position could offer. Moses

abdicated the throne of Egypt. Confucius abdicated the throne in China.

We could go on and on quoting these incidents as they occurred among the

ancients but the only way we can get any real good out of this knowledge is by

testing and testing. A body that is above its normal heat, also cannot function

properly. Watch what you do to your body. Watch your food. Watch your

disposition. Practice love. Love everybody. Love everything. Love your work. But

of 305

don’t take on the animal nature and try to imitate the dog or the hog. If you do this,

you must take the consequences.

We are what we are because we want to be that way. But any time we

become dissatisfied with what we are, we can change ourselves into some other

condition. But first, you must be in tune with yourself. Your body and thoughts

must be synchronized (in tune) with the Spirit within you. Second, you must be in

tune with your associates which has to do with your spiritual influence upon others.

Third, you must extend yourself beyond the finite. Having some knowledge of the

relation and influence of substance upon and between all substances. Fourth, you

must be in tune with Jehovih. This is a positive recognition of the Spirit of

Creation. To know that the Spirit within you is Jehovih. In the final analysis, all

four of these rules are one condition.

Love is the greatest and most cherished asset among all people. It is a cure

for all pain and misery when we learn its full extent. We do not need to grow long

whiskers or carry a long face to be a good man or a good woman. Neither do we

have to tell fortunes or predict the future.

When we give ourselves unconditionally into this project, the Spirit will

guide us wherever we desire to go, and we will know the good or evil outcome of

our theories even before we put them to a test. Be alert and listen for that small still

voice. This guiding Spirit does not always manifest in the same way. Sometimes it

is an inner feeling, sometimes a vision or a dream. Sometimes you may hear a

voice, or you may be led to read a book. A line in a newspaper or magazine might

give you the thought you need. But all messages should be proven before they are

fully accepted as true. When we receive a true message we know it. by the feeling

of assurance we get with it. The sheep recognize the voice of the shepherd. If this

assurance is not with your message, its origin is doubtful. Always be on the alert.

A person with alcohol, dope or animal urine (uric acid in meat) or animal

fever in his system cannot function property in Spirit. It takes a sensitive body and

a properly sensitized mind, to conceive these spiritual functions when they occur.

These are not supernatural phenomena, as many are lead to believe. They are

perfectly natural for every person born into this world. But the people who dwell in

of 305

darkness, cannot see nor hear. That is the difference between a prophet and a new

spiritual aspirant, a true and false God and so on.

Physical death does not change our accumulated knowledge, wisdom or

personality. Physical death is transition, nothing more or less. If we have good

habits, we carry them with us, but bad habits go along also. Many spirit people

learn to communicate with their kinfolks and friends. We must know the origin of

all inspiration. This is important.

Keep up your relaxing exercise. Look for the light. Expect to feel the

presence to the Spirit. Don’t just wish for it. It is always with you. Feel its

presence. Bathe yourself in the light. Keep it flowing through your whole body.

Everyone has this ability. Do this often. Breathe deeply and pray. Expect your

request to be answered and your prayers cannot fail.

PRAYERS IN CONCERT

Glory be to THEE, Thou ALL Light! Because Thou hast created me alive; I

will strive with all my might to he upright before Thee; I have faith Thou created

me wisely: And I know Thou wilt show me the right way.

Make my eyes sharper to see into my own soul than all else in the world. I

will discover its dark spots and wash them clean. Seal Thou up my eyes from the

sins of others, but magnify their goodness unto me. that I may he ashamed of my

unworthiness before Thee.

This day will I run quickly to the distressed and helpless, and give them joy

by some deed or word. Seal up my tongue against slandering any man, or woman,

or child, for they are of Thy own creation, and of Thy own handiwork

What Thou feedeth me with, sufficient is it for the day thereof. Complaint

shall not escape from my mouth. Quicken me all day. O Jehovih, with this, my

prayer, that I may become a glory in Thy works. Amen.

These gradually cool and harden and continue to orbit around their central

sun. The planets provide souls with places to learn and grow. Human souls thus

find paths for winning their way to higher levels of existence — to their “place in

the sun”. The various planes of consciousness up through the etheric, emotional,

of 305

mental and spiritual realms are symbolized in this painting by wavy lines. Their

vibratory rates and intensity increase as they rise. Colors are used to indicate this

progressive change — from red at the lowest level, to violet at the highest visible

frequency. The soul is provided with the path for unfolding innate capabilities —

for ever fuller development of talents and virtues — and saintliness. This is the

purpose of earthly incarnation — and it occurs as a natural outgrowth of the

development of suns and souls. Thou hast brought us together, O Creator, in an

environment which is conducive to spiritual growth and soul expression, We are

brothers for one another, and dependent upon one another. Without the power

generated through affiliation we could not express our progress as we are doing.

Put us, separately, in a worldly environment, and we would retrogress rapidly; and

would become victims of our surroundings, serving the darkness of the world. We

see that the obsessions with which we were born are still with is, but are being kept

under control here where the right conditions are made. If we were left alone, and

not guided and protected by Thy Angels, we could only express what we are as

mortals. Thy Angels are inducing us to follow a higher way. They have convinced

us of the need and value of losing self, and consecrating our lives to Thee? our

Creator. We are not noble in what we are doing. We are merely blessed with

enlightenment because it is part of Thy Plan for world upliftment. We are not

superior in any way to our fellowmen, just very, very fortunate.

Great ruling Spirit of the Universe! Praise to Thee! We acknowledge Thy

dominion, and Thy Alt — ness and we give ourselves to Thee in service. Our

hearts and minds are open to the inflow and outflow of Thy inspiration. We might

be mistaken in some of our concepts of this work we are in, but we are not

mistaken when we praise Thee, and affirm Thy Presence and Power. We might be

mistaken in the advice we give, and in our personal opinions and philosophies, but

we are not mistaken when we give forth love and faith from Thy Presence in us to

Thy Presence in others. We might be in error in some of our methods, but we are

not far off when our effort and purpose is solely to glorify Thee, and help uplift our

fellowman. Praise to Thee, Jehovih! Thou art functioning through us here and now.

We know this is true because we have cast away our self desires, and made this our

only reason for being here. We know Thou art using us in everything we do, for we

of 305

have made it our purpose to serve Thee in everything we

of 305

Praise to Thee, O Creator! Thanks for life and all its gift. We are forever

asking questions as though understanding were everything. We want to know

everything there is to know. Supposing Thy angels revealed all to us, answered all

our questions explicitly, let us look into the spiritual and soul worlds without

hindrance? Would we then be better human beings, more loving and more willing

to serve Thee? Would we be less selfish, less egotistic, and freer from the darkness

of our corporeal natures? The ability to feel compassion for our fellowmen, the

faculties of love and faith and charity, have been neglected. We seem to want to

advise, teach and preach more than we want to practice good works, or

Meditations from the Eloists

By Thomas Paine

As we see it now, O Creator, it is our job to, no matter what the appearances,

or how we are feeling, stay in attunement; to hold to our awareness, affirming and

proclaiming Thy Presence and Power though everything about us denies it; praising

Thee, giving thanks for our blessings, rejoicing in life, even while aware of the

miseries which afflict us and all humanity. To do this, we need to build up our

consciousness that we are in essence imperishable, divine souls, co-creators with

Thee, that our potentialities are unlimited, and that we are destined to grow forever,

unfolding ever-greater beauty and perfection. We are continually searching,

analyzing, questioning, knowing Thou wilt give us the intelligence we seek. We

know we are not going to be raised up above others, or gain any personal acclaim.

We are part of humanity. And it is in the upliftment of the whole that we will be

uplifted. If we are seeking personal benefits, we are not Thy servants. Thou art

using us as we are, and in this we are content.

of 305

INFANTRY

Editors’ note: The originator of this article wishes to remain anonymous, but desires

that the basic message be promulgated.

One day as my body lay resting quietly on its bed, I decided to plunge into

hada, the lower atmospherean heavens of the Earth. I closed my eyes, visualized

the soles of my feet until they started to tingle; then I felt the tingling creep up my

ankles, lower legs, thighs and torso. The tingling picked up on my fingertips and

crept up my forearms to the elbow, then to the shoulders and finally to the top of

my head. Meditating on this a while, I heard (or felt) a loud buzzing sensation in

my head and suddenly I was outside, looking back at my reclining, corporeal form.

I floated through the bedroom walls to the outside and soon found myself

wandering amongst the teeming billions of departed earthlings who inhabit that

region closest to the Earth and to all they have loved. I talked with many of them as

I wandered, and found that their aims, aspirations and beliefs were little different

than those of the people one might meet at the county fair. Many expressed

disappointment in not having been taken to “The Saviour” and all were

preoccupied with finding a more or less permanent place to reside. (The crowding

of this region is somewhat like Manhattan Island multiplied by many thousands of

times).

As I elbowed my way through the dense crowds, I came eventually to a large

open valley. The ground of this valley was covered with boxes, baskets piles of

straw and similar things, each of which contained the astral form of a tiny infant.

Each infant was wrapped in a blanket. The scene extended for as far as the eye

could see, clear to the horizon of this region over the North American continent.

There were millions of tiny infants, placed in little groups of about a dozen, with

walkways cleared between the groups. Up and down along these walkways strolled

a few dozen sad, tired, middle aged looking ladies, each wearing a grey tabard with

a rope belt, and each busily trying to take care of the immediate needs of several

hundred of the infants. Needless to say, I was quite curious about this scene, and

could not resist inquiring what it was all about.

of 305

“Where did all these children come from?”, I inquired of the nearest lady.

“One of these babies is mine”, she responded, “but I don’t know which one,

because I never saw it; I don’t even know, whether it is a boy or a girl. I do know

that if it has blue, grey or green eyes, it very probably isn’t my own, because I and

my lover both had brown eyes. And the new ones arriving, of course, are not mine,

either, but they all need to be taken care of; they all need a mother but they only

have us few.”

“How did it happen”, I asked, `that you never saw your own child?”

“It was an abortion”, she sadly replied, “I was ashamed to let my folks find

out that I was pregnant so I went to this so-called ‘doctor’ who ripped it out and left

me unconscious from shock and, incidentally, with all sorts of germs in the torn

spots and I came over here shortly afterward as the result of a serious infection. All

of these kids were aborted, and every day we get several thousand more, so we

press into service every woman who comes here looking for her child. Still, as you

can see, there are not nearly enough ladies to take care of all of them properly.”

She continued, “They all need to be bathed more often than they are. There

are so many of them and we have such meager facilities for it, and so few people to

help with it; that’s why the stench is so bad. I don’t really mind it myself but it is so

offensive to ‘the others’ that they always bring them here and just drop them.” She

added, “Most of their mothers wouldn’t care enough about them to help, even if

they were over here on this side; they were just glad to be rid of them. As for their

fathers, I seriously doubt that many of them even believe that they have children

here.”

I looked out across the tremendous field with miles and miles of little

bundles, all dirty, hungry, crying and squirming with loneliness and discontent. I

thought to myself, “If only every young girl who plans to get rid of her kid could

come over here and see this!”

I wanted to help, but knew that I lacked the skill and experience to even get

started; also, I knew that I had to return to my body, so what little I was able to do

was just a token, like dipping out the ocean with a teaspoon. I wondered quietly

whether the lower heavens over the other continents of the Earth had tremendous

of 305

foundling fields like this one.

I knew that heredity is the main factor in whether one continues after death of

the body, so to a certain extent, survival of bodily death comes to most as a

corollary to the gift of life itself. It’s a little like beauty; one gets it chiefly by

choosing the right parents. If survival of bodily death was due to faith or to good

works or piety, none of these little ones would be here. If it was a universal gift to

every animal thing, the lower heavens would be a raging, howling zoo filled with

creatures of every description still trying to do the things they did in corporeal life.

As such it would hardly be called ‘heaven.’

I wondered at the poor physical condition of many of the babies. There were

cripples of every kind, deformed bodies, missing members, Siamese twins, dwarfs,

blind, deaf and partly paralyzed children. There were representatives of every, race

and ethnic group on the North American continent, but the ratios didn’t seem the

same as in the corporeal real world. I suppose that some ethnic groups place a

higher value on life and on children than they do on daughter’s “reputation.”

Certainly, the child’s religion could hardly have any effect upon its survival,

particularly at the ripe old age of minus four or five months.

As I strolled through these thousands of acres of outdoor nursery, looking at

the millions upon millions of abandoned children who had been prematurely cast

into heaven, I marveled at the size of the task before any woman who had the

courage to volunteer to help. I also wondered at the folly of our people in letting

this thing happen to us. I realized that the Puritan Ethics, the antiquated concept of

“marriage” and the consequent quaint ideas about “honor” and “disgrace” related to

the reproductive process must carry much of the blame for this wholesale slaughter

of innocents. I remembered hearing that in the United States of America, it is

estimated that over two million such deaths at the hands of ‘dear mother’ occur

every year. The U.S.A. only lost somewhat over fifty thousand young men each

year during the ten years of the Vietnam fiasco. Eventually, I tired of this

nightmare and was overwhelmed by a feeling of helplessness and sadness. As I so

mused, one of the ladies came up and placed her hand on my shoulder in sympathy.

of 305

“It’s a hell of a job; ain’t it?”

“I guess that about sizes it up”, I responded;

“What did you do when you were on the other side?”

“Army!”, she replied.

“Whatcha do in the army?”, I inquired.

“Don’t laugh!”, she chuckled.

“O.K.” “I was attached to the infantry!”

of 305


EDITORIAL

Greetings, with faith in The Great Spirit! Let us pose a question to you. Do

you think that the actions of the Almighty should always be all “good”? Do you

think it is blasphemy to attribute some catastrophe or natural disaster to the design

of the Almighty? On the other hand, do you conclude that the Almighty is not the

author or manager of our disasters and is not involved in them or that the Almighty

is far too loving and peaceful and joyous to engage in what might seem like

nefarious schemes?

Can we look far enough ahead of our own time and far enough behind us to

know what is good and what is bad for people? Do we take not only mortals into

consideration but the advanced spiritual growth of spirits who precede us into the

heavens by a long time? And what about those who follow us?

Would it so shock and demoralize us as to shake our faith to think that the

Almighty might practice a kind of selective prayer-answering or might

countenance humans cowering in fear, wincing and contorting with pain and

suffering in agonizing throes as part of a larger picture in which even the sufferer,

in the long run, has much to gain?

Do we regard the Almighty as necessarily all loving and so much so that He

would not allow even a sparrow to perish in a disaster when He could save it?

Would He spare one person and let another die in an accident or of a disease when

He has the power to keep both alive and well? If we claim that, if He has the power

to save everybody, then He ought to exercise that option, is a mortal lifetime of

observation and wisdom enough for us to know heavens to Hada. They were

stationed in order of rank with two Orian Chiefs at either end. Before the ships a

transit tube, filled with Earth’s air, was used to deliver drujas and fetals who had

been attached to the mortals who were perishing in the submergence. (V 17, Ch 3,

P 73, Bk of Aph).

of 305

We know that a thousand of the Almighty’s angels were delegated to guard

George Washington (who was bred to be above grade 80; see V4-5, Ch 13, p 762,

Book of Es, I) of 3 and who was raised by the loo’is to do the job of establishing

the foundation of Jehovih’s Kingdom with mortals) (See V 5, Ch 13, p 762, Book

of Es, V. 3). Certainly this is an example of special treatment for though

Washington was shot at and in many ways sought alter for destruction, angels

saved him, even catching in their hands the bullets that were fired at him. (V 28,

Ch. 13, p 763, Book of Es, V 3) and history is replete with many more examples. If

Washington was raised up for a job that would benefit posterity then we can see

that the saving of him was no personal whim on the part of the Almighty. It was

part of the strategy of doing the job involved and we see only in a very limited

way, if at all, what happened and will happen as a result of what Washington did.

Mortal history books tell about Washington having commanded the “rebel”

army in the Revolutionary war. Heavenly history records that a thousand angels

were detailed to guard Washington, day and night. The Revolutionary war was

started by a spirit impostor, Looeamong, a false god, who pretended to be Jehovih,

the Creator (and Jesus the Kriste) in order to overthrow the doctrines of Thomas

Paine, at a time when Paine’s doctrines were those of the Great Spirit and when

North America (“North Guatama”) was circumscribed land, where the Creator’s

Kingdom was to be. (V 22, Ch 13, p 762, Bk of Es, V 3) All these factors are but a

drop in the bucket in the correct judgment of the Almighty’s motives in what some

folks might call unfair selectivity.

It is alright to judge people and spirits and even the Great Spirit but if one

says the Great Spirit sends a rain storm to destroy the harvest or sends fevers to a

dirty city, one lacks discretion in words and judgment. It is poor judgment to hold

the Great Spirit responsible for everything; because, man is part of creation and

must do a part of the work himself.

of 305

The Almighty is not a wrathful God punishing mortals with disasters, and

saving favorites on impulse. The distribution of injuries, casualties and damages

would defy known logic less if more mortals judging would judge in better

knowledge of the First Cause and reserve final judgment pending the input of more

of the factors involved.

Love and trust Our Creator! Warmest Best Wishes, to you all, Your Editors

of 305

THE GROWTH OF LOVE

by A. Crane

More and more people are coming into the understanding of what love is and

finding it more and more a close and intimate friend. And it may be that some day

ft will lead mankind to perfect knowledge and perfect oneness with all light. It

takes steadfastness to love, it takes courage. Love is a part of the immortal part of

man.

It is also an experience. Men do not try to establish by logic that it is real and

effective. They tell their experience. They tell it to each other as one tells of a

glorious event, or as one whispers the secret that a new and dear friend is found.

When one experiences it, one feels as if it were a sympathetic being touching

one completely; as if such being were one which was loved and trusted absolutely.

And when anyone once is touched by this kind of consciousness his life is changed.

Life is very sure that he has help to conquer the confusion and the evil within and

without. And it gives him inward courage and lasting happiness.

In fact love comes in a wave of courage itself. It brings unity between people.

It brings a change to the mind first and then the body. Until this change comes, no

language can make you understand love. When it comes you know it forevermore

for the fire has been kindled in your heart and the sun has risen to your sight.

Those who so know it are ever increasing. It has a rejuvenating influence. It

is always beginning and never ending; it looks forward to the future; it is youth

itself.

To be able to love anyone requires the courage to turn away from self long

enough to do it. And once they do, love gives them the power to keep doing so.

Love points away from self toward the ideal of life. It helps us face the

unknown chaos of the future and the sudden snares of Life for two people who

share love form a battery. It gives confidence that it leads us to a great victory. All

that we have belongs

of 305

When the heart is touched by love, when the great heart of central Love

touches one, then one becomes a knight in its services One then takes sides in the

world against any breaches of order or of justice, or of good faith and one becomes

the servant and champion in the world of all principles that are loving. “Perfect

love casteth out fear.” And it wars against every side of the old self. It will conquer

all enemies, all misunderstanding, all baseness, all ineffectiveness, and it will

finally conquer death in every form.

Love is gaining ground in the affairs of men every day. And it means not

only that Love is acknowledged in the affairs of the world but it will be everywhere

served. Every act by us, its servants, will be done as under Love, and the very

smallest act may be done with purpose single to the purpose of Love — the

purpose of the development of ourselves and the race.

This treatment will soon be spreading around the world. There are now a

thousand streamlets that will soon join in a mighty current. Love will come to the

world with a mighty rush. Then it will lead us out of the black confusion of war

into the brotherhood of Unity.

One who has come in touch with this treatment continues his work in the

world but not as before. All waste will be eliminated. All effort that formerly was

futile will become effective, for Love casts out all ineffectiveness. Money or

worldly fame ceases to be the inducement of effort. Every effort is directed to the

service of Love, and in that service will the whole world, some sweet day be

joined.

For whether man’s aim be science, or philosophy, or art, or business where

he is inspired by Love, it prospers far more than it could have prospered before. A

change takes place in the spirit of the work, a fresh zeal and enthusiasm is felt and

Love’s will is done. No one is excluded from this treatment by reason of his

constitution or heredity or fundamental nature. All are capable sooner or later, of

completely turning away from self. Yet some seem far, far away, and it may be

long before they accept this generation. They seem to glory in their meanness and

wickedness. Yet there are many paths that lead to humiliation and heart searchings,

and it may be that some base, vile, cruel, hardhearted being on two legs called a

of 305

man, is nearer the realization which comes from experiencing the futility of self,

than some other who is considered a respectable citizen.

Some wish for love and, not noticing any magic results, conclude that they

are incapable of experiencing the wonderful regeneration of love. But they are

receptive to love without surrendering self.

If they set self on the throne and they desire love only in the service of self.

Yet even they will one day feel themselves turning away from self and then they

will experience the unity of Love which casts out every ill.

Love will unite mankind in a common enemy. Would two brothers continue

their fighting if they were attacked by a bear? So mankind, when awakened to the

fact that self is an enemy and that only by Love can it be overthrown, will cease

quarreling among themselves and unite against the common foe. And after the

victory over self, the bonds of love binding us to each other will never loosen and

we will come into our heritage of oneness with all Light.

We will calmly look to the future in perfect trust that the world will

continually grow into greater spiritual love.

Mote and more and more the illumination takes possession of us and we

become more and more kind to all.

All history is nothing in comparison to the great possibilities of man.

The union of hearts heals wounds and effaces the scars of our

discouragements. Man becomes sure, once and for all, that he will be taken care of,

with a reliance so overwhelming that all former hopes and fears are swallowed up.

For love cannot enter into your life on any other terms but that you give up

self entirely. You will belong to Love wholly or not at all. It comes to the rich and

poor alike; to whomsoever will turn from self.

of 305

If your intellect be the expression of the Love force, you become a genius, if

your muscles a giant of strength. But the greatest benefit of all is the awakening of

the real spiritual perception. Muscular strength and intelligence are only what you

had before, only now in greater measure. But spiritual perception comes like a

revelation and an experience totally unlike any former one. Therefore when you

love you radiate something new and wonderful and others recognize a change in

you, as if you were suddenly elevated to a place above them.

of 305

ADAPTATIONS FROM MARCUS AURELIUS

by Alfred Holmes

Whatever the time may be when I shall near my departure, I shall respect

only my ruling faculty and express the divinity within me, neglecting everything

else.

I shall not be afraid because I must cease to live in corpor; for I know I have

the power to live according to the nature of the Supreme Being wherever I shall be.

My principles can become dead only if I extinguish the thoughts which

correspond to them. It is in my power to fan these thoughts into flame.

It is in my power to have no opinion about a thing, and not to be disturbed in

my soul; for things themselves have no natural power to form my judgment.

If I am constantly observing what is in the minds of others, I am very apt to

be unhappy. but if I observe the movements of my own mind with an eye to

improvement, I will be uncovering within myself a happier state of being.

I see that if I am vexed at anything that happens, I am separating myself from

the Creator. I wish never to be disturbed by anything He may put upon me.

If I am pained by any external thing, I know it is not this thing that disturbs

me, but my own judgment about it; and it is in my power to wipe out this judgment

promptly.

I will exercise the power of reviewing and reflecting upon my own conduct

that I may know how it can be improved.

I will exercise the power of contemplation which strives to acquire

knowledge of the divine and human, and their relationship.

I will exercise the power to perceive beauty, even in those things formed by

nature which are said to be ugly.

Since I have reason, and the animals have none, I will treat them with a

generous and liberal spirit. As to humans, since they have reason, I shall behave in

a social spirit, and on all occasions call on the Creator, and not trouble myself

of 305

about the demands made upon my time and energy.

If the Creator has determined my fate, He must have determined that it be

good, for why should He have any desire to do me harm? If, however, the Creator

determines about none of these things which concern me, I am able to determine

about myself, and make myself conformable to my own constitution, and to my

highest light.

I wish never to do anything which would be an annoyance to anyone, or hurt

them in any way. But should anyone annoy or hurt me, I will not be vexed or

offended, suspicious or critical, but will give recognition to the Divine Presence

within that person.

EDITORIAL

Many factors in life are a balance of two opposites. One such situation is that

two conditions belong to all, belief and unbelief. Both are like seeds planted in the

minds of unborn babies, to grow later.

Belief makes for peace of mind and rigid stability with some consequent

happiness; unbelief causes people to question, investigate, inquire of the Great

Spirit through experiments and search after truth. There are negative and positive

sides to both. Belief can lead to stupidity and unbelief can lead to selfishness,

wickedness and cruelty. The medium path is the better one to follow; this is easier

said than done. Individually you may have some control over the extent to which

you let yourself veer from one condition to another but collectively there are

usually overwhelming factors at work. Even individually, who your ancestors were,

where they came from, what century you live in and what location in the world you

occupy influence degrees of belief and skepticism and it is only in part a matter of

your individual choice.

There has been, down through the ages, continuous inspiration and guidance

given to the children of earth, for the most part without their being conscious of the

fact that they were/are being led by spiritual workers on the unseen side. Some of

what passes for dire affliction and seeming reward are situations deliberately and

wisely contrived by our elder brothers and sisters in the heavens of and beyond the

of 305

earth who work in light under the guidance of the Great Spirit in order to raise up

mortals. People are impressed by the angels with better ways of doing and thinking

about things in order to advance technology and the arts and bring about happier,

better lives for mankind.

Wars have existed on many worlds (and maybe all of them), and the heavenly

hosts guide man through conflict to eventual peace over the eons. In one age we are

doing well if we can peacefully coexist with folks much like ourselves who live

comparatively near us. It has not been so terribly long ago that right in this country

the government of one part of the country took unfair advantage of the people of

another section and murderous, horrible war ensued, whereas when we look into

the future we can look with high hope toward a time when, at long last, there will

be free intermingling between the peoples of all nations, the creatures of two or

more worlds, among the creatures of many worlds and, ultimately, among all

intelligent creatures everywhere in the Great Spirit’s universes.

Mortal man does not grow in light by himself. He reached the peak of his

unbelief and physical development about the time the pyramids were built. It is

important to the angels in leading man to cause him to breed for the best possible

future race in order that physical strength, beauty, intelligence and longevity can be

achieved. But, it is development of the spirit that makes man capable of the best of

everlasting life. As the soul grows toward light or darkness some personify the

attributes of good and others are an expression of evil. With guidance and breeding

and reason and choice one affiliates with one or the other. If one aligns with good,

one becomes a channel and agent of the Creator. If one affiliates with evil one

increases power of evil. Good has always been and will always be immensely

stronger than evil, and evil exists in the long run to enhance good (Without

darkness who could comprehend the light?). The achievement of good demands the

development of the spiritual side, the first step toward which is the aspiration

toward the teachings of spirituality (for example, the motivation to actually read

Oahspe and other scriptures). Walk in peace, faith and love.

Your Editors.

of 305

EXPLANATION OF TERMS

Patricia, Shirley and Elizabeth Kemp

In Oahspe, CHRIST is the ancient Ahemic word for KNOWLEDGE.

CORPOR means the seen world, as against the unseen worlds, and includes

all physical life and things on Earth.

ATMOSPHEREA the name for the Heaven world immediately surrounding

the Earth (and traveling with it) to which all mortals go on death and remain for

some time.

ETHEREA is the name for the higher Heaven worlds outside the Earth’s

atmosphere to which mortals can aspire after overcoming all earthly desires

through much training and service in Atmospherea.

KOSMON is the New Age of the Creator’s Kingdom on Earth which began

quietly in 1848 and will take hundreds of years to come into full fruition.

Oahspe purports to have been written at the command of God, Who states

that He is not the Creator but is simply Chief Executive Officer (similar to the

President or Prime Minister of a country) for our Planet Earth. It explains who The

Creator is (called by many names but chiefly JEHOVIH, or I AM) and also makes

clear the difference between Lord, Lord God, God and The Creator. In the Kosmon

Era, The Creator expects Man to save himself rather than rely on Saviours whom

He allowed in the past as Man had not developed sufficiently.

of 305

JEHOVIH: NO TWO LEAVES, NO TWO FRUITS, NO TWO FEATHERS, HAS HE CREATED IDENTICAL; EACH IS LIKE

ITS BROTHER; YET EACH IS AN INDIVIDUAL WORK OF GITCHEE MANITOU’S ART.

I AM JEHOVIH, the Source of all Energy and Power Throughout you all,

every moment and hour. I AM the Doorway by that name on earth to My

emancipated Heavens. I AM known by infinite names throughout My Universes

seven. And even as you have managers of branches in a department store, To serve

your every need and all controlled by your law, I AM known by My Shining Gods

and Goddesses who manage each spiritual realm and world; They are rising ever

upward in Light, Love, and Power as my banners are unfurled. Through systems,

galaxies, sectors and each super-universe I run My Grand Universe. Throughout

trillions of corporeal worlds and other realms, Through the tiny seed in action, in

spirit, and all matter is of Me, Shall grow in Light, Love and Power to a mighty

tree, For even I can only grow if you will have it so. I AM your Ship of Life, I AM

at all helms. THE CREATOR OF ALL, JEHOVIH.

If you pray to Me as though I am afar, Away above in space as you see that

star, Your prayer may be weak in its travel long — And your faith grow faint for a

prayer so long gone.

Anonymous

of 305


ONE MARRIAGE?

by Belle Brand Sundgren

The subject of one marriage for Faithists has been a contentious one for a

long while. And those who hold tight to the meaning, as they understand it, in

OAHSPE, are very strong in their belief.

I do not hold to that belief for a number of reasons. Nowhere in the OAHSPE

did the Father Jehovih say so. This declaration has always been stated by a God of

that time. An angel, speaking through Po made that statement, as did Zarathustra.

Remember that long ago men were taking on many wives at one time. In order to

stop this practice, one marriage was taught and emphasized as taking the will of

God. The Commandments, as given to Moses, had nothing to do with one marriage

but dealt with adultery. Binding one’s self to an unhappy marriage usually leads to

adultery. Surely the Father, our Creator, does not want His children to be unhappy

— or to commit adultery.

I once asked an old scholar, a very, very wise man, “Why divorce?” He

answered, “Man (or woman) searches for the part of him which has been separated

from him. He sees a woman he thinks may be the one and he marries with her.

Finding out she is not the one he sought, he has no recourse but to divorce, be

miserable or commit adultery; but he is compelled to look further. He must find his

true mate to find happiness.” I asked him whether he meant the eternal search for

one’s soul mate. He said, ‘Exactly.’

I believe that the “one marriage” meant to one’s soul mate and this is what I

asked Oranothon. “The one marriage,” he told me, “is in the heavens above — far

above.” I asked if I wrote an article on the subject would he read it and comment.

He promised he would.

In the green OAHSPE, Book of Eskra, Chapter 36, #26 (page 715) Kayu

says, “I divorced my wife because I discovered she could not bring forth heirs to

belief or faith. No man should be bound to a woman whose desires lay in the

corporeal self. And women should have the same privilege.’ Kayu was an iesu so

of 305

certainly he was not speaking only for himself.

What Kayu said makes a lot more sense than some poor, unhappy soul trying

to raise up his wife, yet too weak to do so and, in the end, sinking to her level. You

know very well what today’s woman would say. “Don’t preach to me. If you can’t

accept me as I am, I’ll find someone who will.” And if he doesn’t want to lose her,

that’s the end of the argument. So much for trying to raise up someone TODAY.

Times have changed. I believe the concept of one marriage (on the earth) is

no longer valid. It was given in its time for reasons known to the Gods. How often,

when I worked in the heavens, did I meet poor souls who were still with their earth

wives although they had found someone they preferred. Upon checking, we would

often find the other woman as the soul mate. When I explained this, the man said

he felt this to be true but he could not leave his wife. What would she do? So I

would speak to the wife. If we found her soul mate, would she object to

“divorcing” her husband? “Object! good heavens no!! We’ve been together much

too long.” I would tell them that it was not really necessary to divorce since the

marriage vows said, “till death do us part” and they were both dead. They usually

laughed about this and went their separate ways but always, always they asked to

be really married to their soul mates.

FAITHIST FRIENDS’ PRINCIPLES

related by Lloyd Kinder

Vision — We hope to envision and help create on earth a world of peace,

plenty, freedom, harmony and happiness for all, wherein all people can freely

develop their God given gifts and talents to the utmost and for the good of all, as

God’s love would seem to advise.

Faithist Friends — We may suppose that skepticism may cause us to search

for truth and knowledge, but that too much of it can lead to cruelty; and we may

suppose that faith causes us to find happiness, but that too much of it can lead to

ignorance and gullibility. We may say Faithist to mean one. who seeks to keep

these two opposing talents, skepticism and faith, evenly balanced for exploring the

unknown. We may say Friend to mean friend of God, humanity and nature. See

of 305

Oahspe index under Belief and Unbelief.

of 305

God and Belief — If truth to us can only be what becomes known to us, we

seek to believe nothing but what becomes known, with the exception of God,

whom we suppose is beyond our knowing, not limited by time, place, form,

imagination, or law, Who is all-powerful, all-knowing, and all-loving, and Who

alone can provide anyone with true meaning and purpose. God’s power and

knowing may be simply forms of God’s love.

God’s Will and 12 Steps — We suppose God’s will is always superior to and

more rewarding than self-will for producing personal and world peace that we

envision; so we hope personally and often to learn and do God’s will and give up

individual and collective selfishness as well as we can and to help each other do

this non-coercively. We hope to use something like A.A.’s 12 Steps to reduce

selfishness effectively.

Cooperate — We suppose God would want Friends to cooperate fairly,

lovingly and unselfishly with each other to try to do the most possible good for all

creation, so we hope to live cooperatively by Friends’ methods.

Homage — We hope to honor God each week together with praise, music,

singing and/or other talents.

Love — We hope to use love, not force or derision, in all relations with the

needy, dependents, Friends and others. We hope to give up and avoid supporting

violence, killing and all unwholesome practices and influences, seeking positive

surroundings, influences and practices instead.

Immortality — We hope for unselfish spiritual immortality and to bolster this

hope, because such hope seems necessary for lasting motivation to improve

ourselves.

of 305

MEDITATION

by Alfred Holmes

Thou hast a purpose to fulfil in the world, O Creator, and Thou hast raised up

people who will act as Thy instruments in the tearing down of the old order and the

building of the new. As we see it, it is not necessary that all Thy instruments be of

a high order, carrying light and upliftment to their fellowmen. There is work for all

kinds of people. A person may live his whole life denying Thee, and mostly

serving self, yet without knowing it he may be serving Thy purpose in some

particular way. Is it not our part, then, to have faith in Thee; and not let others

actions disturb us, however wrong they may seem to be? And not let ourselves be

deceived into thinking things are out of Thy control? The buzzing of a fly can

disturb me if I let it; but if I am one with Thee in consciousness, and I have faith in

Thy Presence with the fly — I am channeling peace and goodwill, and I am not

disturbed. There are two kinds of people, then, who are taking part in Thy plan of

world regeneration; namely, those who acknowledge Thee, have faith in Thee and

try to serve Thee, and those who do not. Therefore we cannot very well know who

is accomplishing Thy will, nor by what means it is being accomplished. The

awakened ones are not completely right, nor are the unawakened completely

wrong.

The only way that we can know we are on the right road is by always giving

our recognition and faith to Thy Presence; praising and loving Thee, contributing

whatever service we can to the good of our fellows, and following our highest light

in all we do. Thou art the energy by which we live; and Thou didst create the earth

we walk upon and the bodies we inhabit; and Thou hast given us every good thing

we have and enjoy. Knowing this, we must give ourselves completely to serving

Thee, and to continuous search for a more complete understanding of Thy purpose

in our lives.

of 305

MEDITATIONS

by Alfred Holmes

Thank Thee, O Creator, that we are able to sustain an awareness of Thy

Presence and Rulership. And that we are able to find good in all things; and not be

overcome by the deceptive appearances of failure. We could easily believe that

darkness rules the world, and that the majority of humans are depraved and

unregenerate. But, we have faith in Thy Presence in every human soul; and in the

great truth that the soul of man is destined to be triumphant over all evil and

darkness. Once, we were at the point of despair, seeing no good in anything, ready

to give up the battle. But Thy Voice spoke within us, led us to a place of

inspiration, and revealed to us the truth of Thy Presence in every soul. We were

shown how to work with Thee and for Thee, how to develop our own higher self

and help others do the same. Since then, there have been many changes for the

better in our lives, both inner and outer. We are thankful. We rejoice because of the

good we can do, and the good we can see ahead for all people as Thy Plan unfolds.

MEDITATION FROM THE ELOISTS

We thank Thee, O Creator, for the protection and inspiration of the guardian

angels. They serve us and Thee without revealing themselves to us, without

desiring to be identified, and without asking for praise, thanks or any profit for

themselves. They are content to be anonymous, and to proclaim Thee as the One

Source of all good, to Whom every soul may reach within himself, toward Whom

every soul may aspire, with Whom every soul may achieve, and the awareness of

Whose Presence is every soul’s peace, happiness and security. We would serve

others in our world with the same selflessness as that of Thy angels, seeking no

recognition or praise, wanting only that Thy Presence be recognized and praised.

We would refrain from talking about our work and efforts when such speech tends

only to draw attention to the self. We would say to all others, through our manner

and actions, “We are only such as you, children of the Creator, babes in experience,

limited in wisdom and strength, capable only as you are capable in the effort to

uncover the soul’s true beauty and power.”

of 305


We feel, O Creator that there is some great truth right close to us which we

have not grasped, to which we have failed to awaken. Or that we are not using what

we know correctly. Or that the awareness we seek is here, but we are not handling

it right, or striking the right keynote. Do our desires head more toward what we

want to accomplish than toward what Thou wantest? Is it that we want to feel and

express something ourselves more than we want the other fellow to feel and

express it? Do we see something in ourselves that we do not see in others? And, as

a result, do we feel superior to others, and not loving, not giving faith? How often

do we affirm for others: “You have the awareness! You are love, wisdom and truth!

You do feel the Creator’s Presence and hear His Voice! You can express the All-

Highest!” How often do we sing Thy praises, O Jehovih, and give Thee thanks for

the blessings we already possess. We don’t really need to know any more than we

already know, or feel any more; than we already feel. We just need to practice

more, to see and proclaim Thy Presence in one another, so that we eliminate all

darkness and negativity from our consciousness.


In this world O Creator, we are alternately happy and sad. Such happiness as

we find does not last, but neither does our grief. It seems that in facing Thee, as we

must at times with complete honesty, that it is best to say, “Use me all the time,

whatever I’m feeling. I want neither to be happy nor to be sad, but I will accept

whatever Thou puttest upon me.” There is an awareness of oneness with Thee

which is above these moods, where we create good from everything. We learn to

accept the fact that things will not always go as we would like them to; and that our

friends and loved ones will sometimes act in ways which to us are senseless. We

learn that it is not things which are valuable, but experience. What is the big lesson

we are learning from our experiences? Is it that Thou art in command? That there is

but One Supreme Authority and Ruler with whom we must learn to attune

ourselves? That if we act on our own, without Thee, we are bound to get into

trouble sooner or later? We must learn to question everything, and ask, “What is

right from Thy point of view?”

of 305

THE HEAVENS BETWEEN THE WINDS

by Agnes Castle (A pre-publication review)

In some 469 typewritten and hand drawn pages, this well-known and brilliant

Faithist author has presented conclusive proof of OAHSPE’s authenticity her book

is the equivalent of a doctoral dissertation in effort and depth of research. She has

analyzed the correlations of OAHSPE with the various other scriptures,

archaeology, anthropology, geology, astronomy, ufo-ology, mythology of various

cultures, world history and philosophical literature. If you ever had any doubts

about the veracity of our scriptures, this book wilt dispel them as well as

entertaining you with its lively and plain-talking narrative of how we came to be

what we are; children of the One Great Spirit, Jehovah.

We don’t expect to be able to print this book for a couple of years, but can

offer you immediately a clear, readable, unbound photocopy of the entire

manuscript, just as the author typed it for $49.95 plus~ $5.00 postage.

(Now available, free, from January, 2009 at: http://groups.yahoo.com/

group/oahspefiles1/)

WILL YOU BECOME A MESSENGER FOR THE LIGHT?

by Gus Cahill

We are not asking you to go forth and proclaim this message from the house-

tops of the wayside. You can preach the silent sermon because very often the silent

word is as potent as the spoken. You know the secret of thought transference —

positive thoughts can pass from mind to mind. If your mind is radiating thoughts of

this New Age, people with whom you coma into contact will be strangely

quickened by this power. That is the silent sermon, and everyone in Kosmon Unity

can preach it.

of 305

http://groups.yahoo.com/

In meditation you can come into communion with the angelic light, then as

you go forth into the world, the light will be radiating from you continuously.

Often your teacher from the higher spheres is with you, and he sees the spirits who

are associated with the people you meet, and they see him, and they immediately

find a link with him, because his mind is normally stronger than theirs. These

spirits overshadowing the people you meet will feel a reflex, even though they

know nothing at all about higher things.

This is one of the means by which angels are working today. They are

finding the different points of contact through those who are associating themselves

with the light of the New Age.

Will you keep the door closed to those who desire to help and bless you and

have gone before you into the heavens and still love you? Could the thread be

severed by death? Perhaps there is someone who, during earth life, did you a great

wrong. Then try hard to forgive. Perhaps it is that very wrong that is holding him

down. Your forgiveness will help to set him free at last so that he may begin to

climb the heights. If only we could forgive others their trespasses it would even

help us to receive greater joy and blessings.

Behold the rainbow in the sky. It shines there when the sun has made a rift in

the clouds, and tells of the departing of the storm. The rainbow is a symbol of hope,

the Etherean presence. Gradually as the rainbow in the sky manifests, so are the

Ethereans coming to this earth. Long years ago they walked the physical path, just

as you do now. They lived either on this planet or perhaps a planet in some other

system. But they understand, they know your needs, and the needs of all mankind;

and they desire to spread the Light of the New Age. What is more, they want to

weave a shining garment which you shall wear, and it shall be the color of your

aspirations, your highest ideas, your hopes. They will invest you with that robe, and

your soul shall be attuned to the Infinite Illumination.

What a wonderful thing it will be to fear no more, but to go in silence and

during meditation to feel the incoming of that peaceful aura, the ray of the

ineffable. Calm over the storm, calming every fractious particle, putting it into its

right place within you. Will it not be a wonderful feeling to feel the presence of the

of 305

angelic light, and to know that during the hours of sleep, the consciousness shall

awake on the spiritual planes? You will be able to join those who have gone on

before you, or to speak to them face to face, and to ask them all about the things of

their higher lives.

How stirring it will be look on the Earth with other eyes, and be able to say.

“The life of spirit is a higher calling. I bear the heat and burden of the day, but

some day I shall be in this fuller and larger life, to take up the threads of my destiny

anew , entering upon ever greater spheres of glory, knowing that as I go on, we

enter more and more into the experience of Jehovih. I shall see his glories as they

manifest through His creations. I shall know the great Peace, and fear no more.”

So, beloved brethren, let this be your religion, let this be your life: Faith in

the Great Spirit Who is Ever-Present and Who does His will through His angels.

His inspiration is ever with you until you become a transformed being. His

presence within you gives you complete freedom, and yet gives you the joy of

service to your fellow man.

This brotherhood to which you belong is the earthly focus of a vast

brotherhood in the spiritual spheres working for the Light. Together we are

dedicated unto the best endeavor to found the reign of Light on Earth, for unless

spiritual means are taken to found the Father’s Kingdom, all other efforts will fail.

So let us go to together in service towards the eternal Dawn.

of 305


WHO IS THE CREATOR?

By Joan Kares

Every religion makes an attempt to explain the creation of all we see about

us. Each describes a Supreme Being who brings this about. If all religions stopped

at this point there would be no conflict among the various faiths. It is only when

mankind attempts to improve on the concept of The Creator that trouble begins.

Our Creator exists! One has only to look about to be convinced of this fact. The

miracle of life and birth, the growth of huge trees in perfection from tiny seeds, the

perfection and order of the movement of the planets and the universe — all testify

to the existence of One Supreme Being containing all perfection. Unless you are

blind, no one need interpret for you the beauty of a sunrise or sunset or the

perfection of a flower. Unless you are deaf, no one need interpret for you the clarity

and praise in a bird’s song, the majestic power of the ocean surf, the innocent joy

of discovery in a child’s laugh, the incredible sweetness of a wild strawberry, the

wondrous flavor of a tree ripened peach, the innocent pranks and romping of

newborn animals, the grace and beauty of deer and antelope or the humor of kittens

stalking prey. All are gifts from our Creator.

What intermediary is needed on a hot summer afternoon betwixt you and a

cold slice of watermelon or a tart-sweet glass of lemonade? What savior need stand

between you and a roaring fireplace on a cold winter’s day after coming in from

work or a romp in the snow? Our Creator’s gifts are so simple and so beautiful and

so direct, so perfectly suited to our needs. Who can possibly doubt His presence,

His love, His wisdom? In the preamble to the constitution are the words, “We hold

these truths to be self evident, that all men are created equal and are endowed by

their Creator with certain inalienable rights...” How can it be stated in a clearer

form? Mankind is created. Mankind is created equal. Mankind is endowed by our

Creator with inalienable rights. There is no intermediary, no intercession needed.

Just as no one is needed to taste the sweetness of fruit for you, no intermediary or

intercession is needed to taste the freedom of equality or exercise for you your

Creator given rights. The Creator gave you the capacity to enjoy beauty, freedom to

of 305

love and be loved, to learn of the many mysteries in the universe, to experience all

creation first hand. The Creator placed you on this earth, like most of His many

other creations, to learn to live in harmony and balance with all other parts of His

creation. He gave you the gift of life and responsibility to all other lives. He gave

you the gift of choice, to choose for yourself, so long as you do not restrict the

freedom of choice of others, and the responsibility for the consequences of that

choice. Who is the Creator? It is your Creator’s presence which gives you the

breath of life, which keeps your heart beating, asleep or awake. Who is the

Creator? The most loving mother, the most caring father, the most tender lover, the

most perfect teacher, the most generous provider, the most just judge, the light of

all wisdom, the source of all life, the Ever Present, the One Supreme Being.

ADVICE FOR THE READER OF OAHSPE

By Wing Anderson, Essenes of Kosmon

It is rare that a publisher who both loves and honors a book finds need to

warn readers against hazards In the reading of It. However, the experience of many

who have most valued this book, OAHSPE, indicates that such warning is needed.

Just as there are powerful medicines and surgical techniques that most people

are unqualified to use wisely, so In the realm of ideas there are profound

understandings and insights for which most people are not prepared in their

character development. OAHSPE is a book of such understanding and insight. It is

a book of teachings and information for those who have already fulfilled the

wisdom in the great religions of the past. OAHSPE states this as follows: “Behold,

O man, I come to give a great religion, yet not to set aside the old; I come to such

as do fulfill the old, and give the religion of the Gods themselves!” (840:15). No

board of censors or registered pharmacists of the mind could be entrusted with

deciding who should read such a book as OAHSPE. The reader must judge himself,

and exercise discretion In reading it.

So the publisher must limit himself to warning “DANGER, HANDLE WITH

CARE”, and give necessary precautions and directions for use.

of 305

Like all the greatest religious literature, OAHSPE warns mankind not to turn

to any bible (itself included), person, spirit, or abnormal psychic manifestation such

as conversion experience for our ultimate source of guidance, truth and light. This

warning is expressed In these words: “I have given thee many sacred books, and I

have said to thee: save thou Judgest them, thou shalt be caught in a snare; I charge

thee, thou shalt accept nothing from men, nor angels, nor Gods. But thou shalt rely

on thine own inspiration from thy Creator. Such is My word which I speak to thine

own soul.” (798:8-11). The criteria OAHSPE gives for evaluating such Inspiration

are rigorous and objective: “That which is substantiated by facts: that which hath a

parallel In known things: things that lead to peace, order and the uplifting of thy

neighbor and thyself. Also to discipline thyself to be constantly alert to be pure,

good truthful and gentle in thy speech; to practice right-doing — these are

following the highest light. This though is darkness — to express fault finding,

criticism, censure, or even an opinion unsupported by facts.” (841:11-13).

OAHSPE was produced by the psychic process of automatic writing. But it

warns, “Call not upon the spirits of the dead to come to thee, but call thou on thy

Creator for wisdom and light and truth and purity; and If it will be well with thee,

Re will send unto thee such spirits as are best adapted to thee for thy resurrection.

(such spirit help is shown to be a normal aspect of living and rarely employs

psychic phenomena). Whoso consulteth the spirits as to earthly things, or profit, or

great undertakings, or marriage or war or riches — woe be unto him in the hour of

death.” Psychic experience should never be undertaken for itself; it should be only

a bi-product of unselfish purpose and inward guidance, guarded by wisdom and

never accepted as “gospel truth,” whatever the purported source. Self-will and

motives of personal gain in psychic experimentation result anywhere from mild

confusion to sheer insanity. (769: 17-19).

We are warned to carefully judge our education and experience in life, lest

we act rashly, and assume that we have greater strength and advancement than is

ours. (Jesus gave similar warning to his disciples). The way of life that OAHSPE

suggests is one of orderly progression, not one of rash advances to a way of life for

which one is not prepared and cannot maintain. Yet the long-range prospect of

progression is so great as to lead many to Ignore this warning. (775:18-38). Those

of 305

who become attached to every great religious book are tempted to hold feelings of

superior knowledge and virtue. Readers of OAHSPE have proved as vulnerable to

this weakness as the followers of other religious literature. Yet OAHSPE warns:

Nor have I come to say: Behold, this is my book, and there shall be none other.” I

demand of thee, that thou hast no favorite doctrine above thy neighbor”, and that

we are to be “without self-righteousness above anyone.” Nor are we to seek to lead

others: “Let all men hear me in their own way. Let no man follow another. I will

have no sect. I will have no creed. I am with all my living creatures. To those who

choose Me, practicing their all-highest light, I am a shield and fortification against

all darkness and against all evil and contention.” In a later writing taken down by

Dr. Newbrough this is amplified: “I come not to take from you any of your Gods

and Saviors, nor to abridge your field for righteousness, but rather to show you a

greater glory in comprehending all of them in the plan of the Almighty, to reach the

different peoples of the earth. Pleading with you to be charitable to one another,

putting away egotism In professing amongst yourselves that such of you alone

were favored of Jehovih.” (771:17; 776:4; 776:30; 799:1-10; Ouranothen 1:6).

While these warnings and criteria of understanding are enunciated in

OAHSPE, even those most familiar with them and most advanced in character

development have, like all men, found themselves repeatedly shocked and humbled

by the extent to which pride and folly, delusion and apathy had misled them from

attending to the still small voice of the Great Spirit which is available to all who

would Inwardly listen to the Father. “I am the most easily understood of all things.

My hand is ready to whomsoever will reach forth unto Me. My voice is ready and

clear to whomsoever will turn away from other things, serving Me in good works.

My light is present and answereth unto all who follow their highest knowledge.”

(828 ch XXI 14-24; 799:23-26).

So here is OAHSPE. We bid you pray humbly to the All-Father for guidance

in your use of it, that you may be free from pride and prejudice, pure in aspiration

and purpose, and resolute and patient in following your true inner light in making

use of this book — and of all of life.

of 305

In reading OAHSPE it is suggested that what seems meaningless be avoided

until it grows to have meaning, and those portions that apply more clearly to one’s

understanding and sense of worth be read first. The sequence may be to start with

the first 3 books and the books of Inspiration and Discipline.

of 305

THE UNIVERSE

There are three things in all the universe; ethe, corpor and spirit Since

Jehovih is the All of all things, He is, therefore, in this sense three in one; yet — He

is but one person.

Ethe is the space which pervades between the planets and is boundless in

extent. It is the most rarefied of all substances and has the power to penetrate and

exist within all things.

Corpor is that which can be seen with the mortal eye; it is the substance of all

corporeal worlds, planets or stars; it is ethe comprised by the power of the vortex.

Spirit is the unseen power which motivates all things. it is life, It is potent

and supreme above all things.

The Creator created a whirlwind in space. The atoms, of which all things are

made, are, by the power of the vortex, driven to the center of this world wind. This

central mass is at first molten; after a millions of years, it gradually has cooled off

and becomes solid. Thus a world is made.

The universe has no boundary. If you traveled in a straight line at a million

miles an hour for a million years you would be no nearer the boundary, as there is

none.

There are spirit worlds and corpor worlds. The corpor worlds are the birth-

places of all created creatures. The spirit worlds are the abode of spirits. Our earth

is called the Red Star by the heavenly people. This earth we live on has an

atmospherean heaven which travels with the earth. It extends outward from the

earth to a distance of thirty diameters of the earth. Its diameter is 8,000 miles x 30

which is 40,000 miles. The diameter of the earth’s vortex is 240,000 x 2 plus 8,000

which is 8,000 miles. The moon travels within the earth’s heavens in a smaller

vortex of its own.

of 305

Corporeal worlds, like our earth, have a set time of existence; birth, maturity,

old age and death. Our world has about ninety and one half-million years behind it

and about as many ahead of it. Our world is held in space by the power of the

vortex, so, when the time arrives for this earth to end, the vortex will burst and

explode our world back to its original elements. There is no need to worry about

this; the end is a long way off.

HAPPINESS MEDITATION

Alfred Homes

It comes to this, O Creator, that to find answers to problems, to find the All-

Highest Wisdom by which to live, each one of us must make a compact with Thee

within ourself, interiorly and without fanfare, a pact of oneness, of self-discipline,

and highest purpose. We learn to talk with Thee, to praise Thee, to see the good in

all things, to rejoice and be thankful; and never to complain, or be critical of life or

of others; or to shirk my responsibility; or to seek pleasure, wealth, power or

prestige for self alone. This is a matter between the individual and Thee, Jehovih,

and no other can know the degree of consecration, or how great the success or

failure. Happiness, then is a matter of being truth to Thee within one’s self.

Becoming one of Thy instruments for the founding of Thy Kingdom on Earth is a

matter of holding to one’s inner covenant, day in and day out, over a period of

years, until the self is sufficiently cleansed away. World problems will be on the

way to attrition when a number of purified instruments have come together as a

unit to build with Thee outwardly. Then Thy Purpose will manifest through them to

demonstrate Thy way of peace, health and prosperity for all the world to see.

of 305

MEDITATION

from the Eloists

The desire to accomplish something, and to be somebody, is universal, O

Creator. How can we be sure that these desires are of Thee? Are they not about

ninety percent self? How much of our ambition is free from self, and is to serve

Thee only? We want to do so many things; and we tall ourselves that our purpose is

to serve Thee only. But when we examine our feelings closely, we see that self-

pride and self-satisfaction are part of the motivation. Self has a way of creeping

into everything; inserting its own ideas, exerting its own influence.

This clouds our minds, and makes our thinking unreliable and fallible.

Sometimes, when we are sick, or in pain, we let go of everything. We stand before

Thee in complete surrender, with no desire to have anything or be anything, or to

accomplish anything — just awaiting Thy action and Thy inspiration, knowing we

are in and of Thee, being willing to accept whatever is Thy Will.

This, we feel, is our closest approach to selflessness, and our greatest

awareness of Thy Rulership. To be able to do this all the time seems most

desirable. We need not fear that we won’t be active, and won’t use our creative

abilities; for Thou wilt inspire us; and we will accomplish in Thy Name and for

Thy Glory.

of 305


MEDITATION

From Eloists

It is so easy to find things wrong with the world, O Creator! It is in a bad

state, or rather, an unripe state. Its evils, imperfections and miseries are all too

obvious. But if we concentrate on the wrong, the darkness and limitations,

describing them, bemoaning them, we put ourselves on the same level and are of

no help in uplifting the world. Something in us recognizes wrong, recognizes

darkness, and gives us aspiration for a higher way of life. That. something is Thy

Presence.

If we learn to concentrate on Thy Presence, try to see Thy Purpose and Thy

Light which is supporting and saving the world, we will lift ourselves above the

darkness and be able to serve Thee in the building of a new order. Thou art the

Keynote! Thy Presence is the Keynote.

The world has many good people who are positive thinkers, crusaders and

workers for the betterment of mankind. But their influence is very limited. The

good they do is swallowed up and lost in the mass darkness. The Keynote of Thy

Presence is what these people most need awareness of and attunement with Thy

Will, Wisdom and Love. Then, instead of working for a multitude of different

causes, in separateness, they will be united under Thy Inspiration for the single

purpose of liberating mankind from the psychic causes of war, crime, poverty and

diseases.

The supreme good of mankind is in the building of a new order, not in trying

to correct the evils of the old order. This requires a higher type of individual than

the world is now producing.

But there is a Divine potential in every newborn babe. Discovering how to

bring forth this potential for the creating of a new race and a new world is the all

highest quest for enlightened souls today.

of 305

“TO COMFORT THE BEREAVED”

by Medium D. S. Pickard November 1982

And to every living person on the earth cometh the moment when someone

dearly loved passes beyond the limitations of the corporeal world; and they depart

from us. The chair they sat in is vacant. We try to recall their characteristics and the

words they say, the smile, the particular tone in which certain words are said; and

after the passing of time the vivid pictures still come up. Nothing can blot out the

memory of those who have gone before us; and we often say, in the quietness of

the evening ─ O God! Where has the spirit of my loved one gone? Will I see him

again? Win I see her again? Will they be unto me the same person that I knew

before, that I will recognize as that person and not someone who is a stranger to

me? These, and many others, are some of the thoughts that come to mind. And it is

natural that there should be grief. It is also natural that as life, the flow of life,

continues, and the things of corpor that press upon us demanding our attention

cannot be postponed but have to be dealt with, it is right we attend to these things.

For in so doing, time itself will be found to be on our side; to take away the

sharpness of that initial pain, as if the spirit itself had been wounded. And the world

of Spirit is very kind. For the world of Spirit will do everything possible to bind up,

what seemeth to you, a deep wound within the spirit, that you cannot of yourself

either comprehend or heal. But time carries us all remorselessly forward.

Sometimes we try to visualize our loved ones as we knew them. But it is not

like that, that we shall see them face to face. For the passing of the years in the

Spirit-worlds will more spiritualize the features into something resembling eternal

manhood or eternal womanhood than anything that could be achieved by the spirit

continuing to inhabit, or to dwell, within the body of corpor, because – as the span

of years increase so becomes it more difficult for Spirit to competently use the

vehicle of expression that it has at hand. The vehicle becomes unwieldy,

incompetent; and in the end, no longer usable in that form. And therefore Spirit

will quit this body that it cannot anymore use; and this, beloved friends, has

nothing to do with sin or saviors or anything preached in the dogma of theology. It

is just the most natural thing that there is, for the spirit to quit it, and then, to be

of 305

free. For only once, does the spirit, the immortal spirit, inhabit this earthly form;

and the loving kindness of The Great Spirit hath created what you call death in

order that the spirit can do this — i.e., to quit the mortal body and then, to dwell in

the worlds that are the immortal worlds – the worlds of Spirit – in which death is

not. And the more you give thought to what we say and simply ponder these worth,

the more it seemeth to you that all things fall within the category of wise

provisions, created by a most wise and loving Creator; seeing contingencies a long

time ahead, opening doors, as it were, almost in advance, almost as it were, putting

down a carpet for a very important person to walk upon. Yes, preparing and paying

great care and attention to a thousand and one details involved in the creation of a

living soul and its progress through eternity. Often we say: ─ O, that He had not

taken my loved one away! Or we muse: ─ if only the ‘Status quo’ could have

continued another couple of years. If only the pattern and the system of our well-

ordered lives could have gone rolling onward, undisturbed, please God ─ for a

couple of years at least.

These are the thoughts that pass through your mind. And no one need be

ashamed of admitting such thoughts. They are easy to read. They declare

themselves. They speak to us of what we call ‘the human touch’. But The Great

Spirit is very loving and wise, and will not answer such prayers as these, because

when you look into your own heart, there is an element of selfishness in any

reluctance to let the loved one depart this life of corpor ─ and go to a world in

which there are no troubles as to the faculties of hearing, or seeing; where all things

open out anew with a greater glory than ever the glory that you behold in the life on

earth. But when you analyze your thoughts and are true in your thinking, you will

say to The Creator ─ O Creator — O, Great Spirit, it is but a selfish love, this

desire that makes me want to cling to those who supported me all my life. Yes, in a

way, it is a selfish love, this reluctance to let the spirit finally quit associations with

the concerns of earth and our personal concerns. The cords of love ─ yes ─ they

bind us together. But once the spirit has quit the body of corpor, the interests of that

person must of necessity be different to the interests of those who have not as yet

crossed the narrow line that divides one from the other.

of 305

Therefore, a true loving heart after a time, will send out thoughts as these into

the spirit-worlds: — “O, Beloved Great Spirit, guide Thou and protect the one I

love. Let neither harm nor evil come to them in the spirit-worlds. Clothe them, O,

Father, with light of Thy Light, ethe of Thy ethe and Thy knowledge and

understanding and an awareness of Thy Presence that abideth with them always.

Let them go their way in life, with our blessings and best wishes.” Beloved, there is

a time for mourning, in these proceedings, of the quiet tear, of the personal prayer

to The Creator and the prayer that is sometimes the cry of a child baffled somewhat

by the mystery of death. O, yes, there is a time for these things — these emotions

— these things of the heart and the mind and the spirit within, that are common to

all of us and we should not hold them back.

But there is also a time for sober realization of the truth of certain words in

Oahspe in Bon’s Book of praise. I take them not back to the things of the past, to

trials and tribulations. But I open the veil, and I show the spirit the great provisions

I have made, and these open before the spirit as one that is constantly surprised, by

the provisions which I have created for the spirits of the dead.” You see, long

before any of us were quickened into life, Life was, and Life had always been. And

Life always prepared for the contingency ahead. Long before we came into Life, it

had all been well thought out. The governments and the systems, and the

authorities of heaven, all had been thought out; and they work today as wonderfully

as they did millions of years ago, in the different echelons of heaven. Let us just

rest in the fact that with all these well thought out provisions, there is no need for

any of us to be anxious, or even to say to the One beyond the Gods, the kind of

words that do, on such occasions, so readily fall from our lips. For The Great Spirit

hath taken care of all things, and made provision accordingly. And for the spirit of

the dead there is always a better future in the Summerland and the planes beyond

than ever could possibly be by the anticipation of a return to the former things. Let

your heads rest in this knowledge, and be not afraid.

of 305

MEDITATION

from the Eloists

The desire to accomplish something, and to be somebody, is universal, O

Creator. How can we be sure that these desires are of Thee? Are they not about

ninety percent self? How much of our ambition is free from self, and is to serve

Thee only? We want to do so many things; and we tell ourselves that our purpose is

to serve Thee only. But when we examine our feelings closely, we see that self-

pride and self-satisfaction are part of the motivation. Self has a way of creeping

into everything; inserting its own ideas, exerting its own influence. This clouds our

minds, and makes our thinking unreliable and fallible. Sometimes, when we are

sick, or in pain, we let go of everything. We stand before Thee in complete

surrender, with no desire to have anything or be anything, or to accomplish

anything — just awaiting Thy action and Thy inspiration, knowing we are in and of

Thee, being willing to accept whatever is Thy Will. This, we feel, is our closest

approach to self -mastery, and our greatest awareness of Thy Rulership. To be able

to do this all the time seems most desirable. We need not fear that we won’t be

active, and won’t use our creative abilities; for Thou wilt inspire us; and we will

accomplish in Thy Name and for Thy Glory.

of 305

MEDITATION

by the Eloists

We often make statements without meaning them to be categorical. To Thee,

O Creator, nothing that we can put into words is absolute. We have stated, for

example, that woman’s joy is to be beautiful, and that man’s joy is his

accomplishment. This is a mortal paint of view and has in it a modicum of truth.

But from Thy point of view, the true joy of both men and women is in the good that

they can do for humanity. It is in their awareness of Thy Presence and Rulership,

and their oneness with Thee. It is in getting rid of the self part which wants to be

beautiful or wants to accomplish something. We confuse ourselves by not

distinguishing between what the self wants and what the Almighty wants. It is not

considered sinful for a man to want to accomplish, or for a woman to want to be

beautiful. But, those desires can shut out Thy inspiration, and limit the soul’s

expression and `growth. The false gods and goddesses of history were great self-

wills. In the end they had to surrender their own wills to Thy WILL Then they

found peace, joy and security.

of 305


The Zend Avesta of Zarathustra.

PRAYER OF WORSHIP First, O Great Creator! Thou didst create the cosmic

Powers And Thou didst reveal the Cosmic Laws. Thou gavest unto us

understanding from Thine Own Mind! And Thou madest our bodily life. Thou

didst determine all our actions by Thy Power. Thine, O Jehovih! Was the Power,

when Thou didst order A path for each of us and all And this teaching was the First

of all rules To regulate our actions. He is most helpful and vigorous Who serves

with every Power, preserving and nurturing Thy Cosmic Order Through the

fulfillment of Deeds. O Thou Almighty Father! Demonstrate Spiritual Truth

through thy Cosmic Order. O Creator of Love! Reveal the Best Words Through

Thy Good Mind Living within us.

EDITORIAL

Greetings to all of our readers, with faith in the One Great Spirit, Creator Of

Worlds Without End, by whatever the Name. What can Faithists in the Great Spirit

do in these turbulent and seemingly worsening times to stay on the right spiritual

track? We know that there is a constant spiritual pressure either up or down; we

know it is almost impossible to stay still and we know that to some extend we have

some will in the matter; yet we are also aware of strong trends that influence even

spirits much stronger than we are. We can watch, listen, read and be aware of the

widespread human conflict and seeming tide of human declension and keep a

strong will to surmount it, not descend with it. We can be aware of conflicts,

thought forms and other elements that eventually result in earthquakes, epidemics,

famines, cyclones, floods, hurricanes, etc. The Force works for good and evil alike,

and we see the Great Spirit’s Hand in it all. We can see the worst such as violence

and disease as temporary and necessary consequences of what has occurred before.

of 305

And these factors, we trust, will lead, in due time, to the better days of

tomorrow. We know that the Great Spirit with His holy angels has brought people

and worlds through worse times. If we can help others, fine, but if it is a matter of

meddling, we can attend to our own work, studies, music, hobbies and prayers and

keep apart from the trends toward destruction and backsliding, guarding our

strength in the face of opposition. We can act on our educated inspirations to

protect ourselves and those in our care by various ways now and later as times get

harder. Another’s inspirations may not be appropriate for us. Let’s pray for those

appropriate for us and ours. Let’s keep from getting pulled down in the thick,

unspiritual depression everywhere with whatever talents and loves and

appreciations the Creator has planted in our souls and, despite the wholesale

darkness around us, nurture and attain that light, as best we know how. After that,

let’s bide our time with trust in the Great Spirit and a little needed flexibility and

the realization that we are being guided. Above all, to your own self be true and

keep the faith in your Creator.

Your Editors.

of 305

HOW TO LIVE

By Julie Waits

“THESE are my arrows and spears and war clubs: PITY, GENTLE WORDS

and the example of TENDERNESS. Soon or late, these shall triumph over all

things in heaven and on earth.” We an told to always speak gently instead of

harshly, to feel pity and sympathy instead of condemnation, to be an example of

tenderness and understanding instead of employing criticism and resentment.

It all seems so simple until you start checking and analyzing your thoughts

and attitudes. It is easy to resent words or actions of others. They may be unfair

towards your expressions or actions, but you have to ignore this, and try to feel

only tenderness and love, for you are to recognize no enemies, only HIS

CHILDREN at different levels of development. Every minute is a challenge that

has to be met POSITIVELY and LOVINGLY. Wouldn’t it be wonderful if we

were to remember ALWAYS that every individual is HIS CHILD and that the

SAME LIFE that allows ALL to function on this plane is HIS LIFE! I have

sincerely been trying to meet this challenge and somehow LIVING has become

more meaningful and enjoyable. A new strength sustains me. Why bicker and want

to win all arguments, when it is SO much better to express HIS LOVE and HIS

LIGHT? How encouraging it is to remember that every BREATH we take is a true

SYMBOL of His Presence and His sharing with ALL His children. A TRUE

SYMBOL OF ONENESS.

of 305

The Eloists -- The Kosmon Journal 1996

AN APPEAL TO ALL SOULS

Awake to the reality of the Presence of Love within you! Love that can lift

the spirits of the people around you. Love that wants only to shine like a sun. Love

that can heal the world. It is the true you, the eternal you. At whatever cost to self,

let it shine! This selfless love — the love divine Lies hidden in every human soul.

There is nothing more beautiful in all of life! Awake to the reality of the Beautiful

Presence within you!

of 305

The Eloists -- The Kosmon Journal 1998

FROM THE ELOISTS

Our friends and relatives who question our way of life are people who are

part of the good, middle class way of life of the U.S., probably the most fortunate

class of people in the world — materially. They have no reason to want to change

themselves, or to search for a higher way. It is useless to try to convince them of

the greater value of education in spiritual things over the standard, materialistic

education they are getting and giving to their children. Any normally intelligent

person of this world can argue with good reason and logic against the spiritual

principles and concepts we could give them. They do not remember that over two-

thirds of the world’s population is underprivileged, and that war, crime, poverty

and disease are rampant among them. These people are seeking a solution to their

problems, and will fight for any change that promises them relief. Sooner or later,

the complacency of the U.S. middle class will be upset. And only when it is, O

Creator, will they be ready to listen to Thy revelations of the Kosmon Era.

These are far above the highest, best concepts of selfless service preached in

the world today. Most adults are too set in their ways to respond to them favorably.

But there are some whom Thou hast prepared who will not argue or fight against

them. These are the builders of a New Order of peace, prosperity and goodwill for

all.

of 305


SPIRIT AND MATTER

Anonymous

Our infinite Creator created all matter through and in which are tiny

vibrating, breathing, etheric vortices.

Photons of light travel through the whole universe in even direction like a

whirlpool in a moving stream. They are called "Cosmic Rays" and they come in on

all directions upon all celestial bodies.

Everything is whirling around in vortices from the atoms in man's body to the

solar systems and galaxies. Our Creator's creative power permeates everything,

from matter on up (spiritually speaking as well) up to the Great Grand Central

Sun's vortex.

Any vehicle or object that is not being driven along under its own motive

power or is drawn by gravity starts turning over and over in mid space because of

the whirling action of spacial ether everywhere. Every bit of matter that is not

already crystallized into some kind of body or in some stage en route from being

dissolved and suspended in spacial ether, is still in the Creator's mind as an idea, to

be materialized later.

That old saying, "Love makes the world go round," takes in a lot more

territory than just this world.

of 305

LET US SHARE OUR THOUGHTS WITH YOU

Medium: Donald Pickard - England March, 1982

How to begin? How to explain such a fact as a medium who hears not words

as his friend would speak to him in corpor (the earth life), yet hears the words just

the same, devoid of utterance.

How to justify the workings? How to explain the man does not simply

imagine he hears and then colors it all with the aid of a vivid imagination. How to

explain the reality of thoughts not your own that come at times unasked for by you

or anyone?

These words are our introduction, to let you see our thought processes and

judgments as to what is reasonable or perhaps, an affront to common-sense, carry

on just the same beyond the grave. Let us at least leave with you the idea you are

dealing with people exactly the same as yourselves. Well, not literally, not exactly,

but the words we have penned will do.

What would you expect of us in a short address, on any subject, seen of

course, from the supposed other side? What about the many in your world to whom

prayer is something having no reality in it, who cannot pray, who sometimes, if

cornered, might confess — I would at times like to pray, but to whom shall I pray?

Does He hear? How to be sure. And we tell you, hundreds of millions are there

who walk the earth-life knowing nothing, nothing at all, of what is to all too soon

come upon them.

And would you not therefore say, if you were seeing the world of mortals

from the side of the immortals — would you not say- Beloved, let us think of those

who cannot pray, who know not what it is, what it means. How can we help them

to find the secret that is not a secret once the heart has grasped the essential

simplicity in it.

To teach a man to speak to a part in himself that is immortal, and ignore the

voices coming up from some well of darkness within himself that suggest he is but

talking to himself, how shall we do this? How shall we, without him bowing His

of 305

guardian angels face to face, put him on course so he finds real happiness in life,

rather than endlessly suffering illusions that are constantly dropping him in the

mire.

Let us do a simple thing. Let us make a list. On it we put the names of many

who come to mind, irrespective as to whether 'family' or not. Then shall we 'image'

that person, that living soul for a few fleeting seconds as we read each name aloud;

for the etheric waves that course the universe shall carry these names to those in

our worlds and you will have to take our word for the fact no thought ever

dispatched by mortals into the 'ethe' ever returns void, with mission

unaccomplished. Each loving thought reaches that one intended for it. And not only

this; they know. Love is all-powerful. You call it love. Love answers. Simple is it

not? And once this has dawned on the heart, is not disbelieved or thought to be

rather far-fetched, then you soon grasp what prayer is all about.

Love will respond to love; thousands of millions of little ethe-waves will

ripple outward and onward and not one will ever find its atomic counterpart shall

fail in any way whatsoever. And from your worldly scene, suppose you desire to

give your loves in the worlds unseen happiness, what shall you do? Shall you rush

hither and thither dealing with a multiplicity of projects? No! You shall sit quietly,

in the evening, when the busyness is over for that day, and let these pictures pass

across your mind's inner eye. Yes, dear friends, in this will you, create happiness in

heaven more than anything else in the way of literally 'doing'.

Your loves come to its and sometimes a cloud also comes across their own

world of inner thoughts. They need not put it into words. We can read the thoughts

better than all the eloquence in words. And the thought is this: So many years have

passed. Am I still remembered by those in the earth-body? Do I still live in their

thoughts? And because the whole basis of heaven is not as it is on earth, others

come and explain that only by giving off love to others, can or do we ever really

answer that cry in the heart.

Beloved, in the higher heavens there is no such thing as separateness. No

isolation. No lonely Lives. No lives lived out as if others did not matter. We

perceive the bond that binds us all. Easy to say this, yet it hath not entered the mind

of 305

of man as to exactly what this is.

Again we say to you, so there shall be no mistaking the importance of the

truth expressed — there is no such thing as separateness in the higher etherean

spheres of the Great Spirit. All the living are indeed, members of one family, the

Universal family, impossible to ever count. The individual person remains with all

the traits of personality. That is not lost. But something added to the earth-

experience makes us aware of ties that bind us so comprehensively — we truly do

feel for each other. And this can only be spelt out to you in life itself. Our words at

best can only give a rough picture.

It hath not entered the thought-forms of mortals to know what is conveyed by

this word `oneness'. It cannot be said. All that can be achieved are a few steps in

the right direction. That is all any man or woman can do is the whole of a life-time

in corpor.

A man prays for his friend. It is good. But to also include in his prayer those

he has no direct acquaintance with, and to really feel deep down the desire to serve

their own best and highest interests, that is to feel as the angels of The Great Spirit

feel. Do you not see, when all art one, this is how you will feel, more deep, more

intense than you ever guessed to be possible?

And thus, the highest best man on earth. in this matter, is but no more than

one who had advanced a few steps forward in the right direction. This is not to

detract from the good he has done, or to in any way mark down. It is to put it in

perspective, so it is seen for what it is by those who judge all things from a higher

light than mortals.

To pray for those of similar belief to us, what merit lies in that? But to burst

the bonds of limitations within ourselves, this is, dear friends, to go yet a few more

steps in the right direction. And when things are seen from the universal point of

view, then even former notions of God and Lord are seen as insufficient.

By trial and error does a mortal usually gravitate to true ideas of The Great

Spirit E-O-IH. Rarely do these come suddenly, overnight.

We are therefore all children on the endless path of life. Let us help each

of 305

other. You do not see us, not as you see your friends, yet nonetheless our hands are

everlastingly reaching down to bless you, to inspire you with thoughts such as the

ones briefly touched upon in this address.

Let no man err in this. It is by and through cultivation of an understanding as

to exactly what is prayer that the universe opens out in a mortals' world of inner

thoughts. Devoid of prayer, the man or woman is tossed helplessly about in the

earth-life and for a time, the same happens in the heavenly life.

Is it not sad to reflect upon what might or what might not have been. Because

a simple truth was not seen, because a new thoughts were not cast out from the

heart, or help asked for, the tribulations of love carried a soul through an era of

darkness. Repeat this many times, in many lives and you have an idea of the

endless labor before us, that can never ever be completed, because more is always

being added unto it.

On the subject of prayer much has been written and spoken through the ages.

Yet is there not in each one, a light; a part within, that surely knows really knows,

without another having to spell it out?

Let us leave you with a few words that may help you build your own base in

this.

“He that hath faith in Me alone, is surely thrice blessed,”

“All I want to do is to do the good. Why will ye not let me do it?”

“To have faith in Me. above all else and all other persons, this is is the

highest truth for any son of man."

“O Great Spirit E-O-lH. Thou, My Creator. Thou alone art that bright and

shining star within each person. Beyond all sacred names, beyond the Gods and

Lords, Thou, O Jehovih. Thou art the star that shines in each soul forever.”

of 305

LIFE WITH THE SPIRITS

Kasandra Kares

When you are alone, when you are walking along, when you are doing

almost anything and you are fairly passive do you often experience a reasonable,

uplifting conversation-like situation in which one part is your own conscious mind?

The thoughts of kind, caring spirit folks who want to guide and protect you

and others to do the right thing is not uncommon and can be experienced almost

anytime. If it happens when you are asleep you call it a dream. If it happens when

you are awake you might consider it an unimportant daydream or a meditation, but

you can be counted on to profit by it, to learn by it and let it influence your actions.

If this were not so, then The Great Spirit’s Holy Angels would not waste their time

coming to you. As long as you respond, your spirit companions will hold

conversations with you. They will consult and contend with you and if you were to

talk aloud they would use your organs to make you seem to talk both sides.

Writers experience a lot of this and often what they write is practically

dictated to them. Shakespeare was attended by a vast number of spirits and they

even spoke their parts when they came close enough to enter within his aura. You

might call this inspiration.

The difference between this and insanity is vast. In insanity, many low grade

spirits seek to get possession of a person and in some cases there is both a diseased

organism and evil spirits.

As we know, evil spirits do come back to haunt the living. We should

probably look upon them with sympathy. They don't know, really, what happened,

or where they belong, or how to rise to anything better. If they are really evil you

won't want them around you and will do and think things that will bore them

enough that they will leave you. If they are poor ignorant drujas, you might try

reading Oahspe aloud to them.

When we pray for inspiration, we can pray for good and pure spirits to come

to us, and to drive hence those which are evil.

of 305

What do evil spirits want anyway? They are like thieves wanting your

strength, your spirit food, your sustenance. The best way to get rid of them is to

keep on with your disciplined life and you will bore them enough that they will

leave you, for something more exciting to them.

What is going on when one mortal lives in fraud and rascality and riches,

having amassed a pretty good fortune and not being very honest about it while an

honest person lives in poverty and struggles by all his life? One is laying up

treasures in heaven and the other treasures on earth. Some rich people are honest

and help many people with their resources.

Even in your prayers, pray for what will hurt no man.

Spirit Obsession in Everyday Life

Kasandra Kares

When you look you can see spirit obsession behind the scenes at work all

around you, and in most of the movies on television, you might ask just what

happens to allow a disembodied spirit to take control of a mortal person?

Sometimes when a person becomes unstable, gets suicidal, has frequent

uncontrollable rages, a dark spirit is on board. It may be a strong malevolent spirit,

or even have an entourage of fifty or a hundred more spirits.

Many spirits are earthbound because before they died they were not very

spiritual, and now they are still spirits of high intelligence but of low morality,

troublemakers who even use cleverness to get mortals under their control. There

are many homes with several earthbound spirits in residence. Some spirits love

violence and will drive the mortals around them to commit whatever the mortals

will go along with.

To keep them away from you, watch carefully how you feel about people. Do

you catch yourself being critical of them? Are you annoyed by anything you see or

hear from them? Supposing you broaden your viewpoint. Put yourself in their

places. If you find yourself criticizing people for their imperfect treatment of you,

be on guard for thoughts about getting even.

of 305

You are smarter and in a better position than these spirits. You can suggest

attitudes for them that they may accept. Visualize a place or an activity for the

spirit that could do some good.

You can run a tape and if you have pretty good hearing, can hear them

talking on it.

You can get them to go somewhere else.

One very foolish way to pick up a spirit is to invite the spirit voluntarily to

enter your mind and body. It's not a lark. It is all too easy to pick up one, and

become possessed in seconds.

If a child has been good natured and suddenly becomes disruptive, he may

have become possessed and maybe by a relative who wants to be with the child.

A good way to become intruded upon by alcoholic spirits is to frequent

public places where liquor is served. Such an intruding spirit can drive the host to

drink, to suicide, to murder.

When feelings are over-expressed negative energy is discharged. Negative

thought forms may be in the making. Negative entities can be drawn to such

expressions and caused to commit regrettable acts. A pendulum can detect such

negative energies. Imagining a cleansing torrential rain over such places can help

clean them.

of 305


YOU ASKED ABOUT THE INVISIBLE WORLD

Eugene Maurey

Dear Friend,

As you know, I am a dowser and handy with a pendulum, and you asked if I

could answer some of your questions about those things apparently few of us can

see.

This letter will be in three parts. First of all, let's talk about people who

become spirits without bodies. The space about us is rarely free of them. For

instance, there were seven in your school, all of whom have been asked to vacate.

When I was there, I cleared the building of them. Why seven more, one may ask?

They may have been attracted to the place or come with one of the students and

then decided to stay there. The real problem arises when all too often these

characters become attracted to a person and get close to him, possibly in his aura.

As the disembodied spirits (we are all spirits) usually feel lost, frustrated and

negative, they telepathically project their thoughts to the living person. The person

reacts accordingly. Unbeknown, this is a frequent occurrence for many people.

How does one identify the proximity of an invisible spirit? First of all, the

person must know himself, how he normally feels. When a negative feeling comes

over him, and when there is no known reason for it, he can suspect there is a spirit

character too close nearby. What can one do about it? Simple, he can go into a

room where nobody can hear him, and in no uncertain terms, tell the spirit person

to get lost! Immediately the negative thoughts disappear and the person feels his

old self again.

Some may feel this is not a generous attitude toward an errant spirit, but if a

spirit makes a nuisance of himself and is causing trouble, one must deal sternly

with him.

When checking you again using the pendulum, I found no possessing spirit

within your mind but found five following you around. They left. You probably

of 305

attracted them by talking about the spirit world as you often do and they were

interested in your ideas. This often happens to me when I lecture on the subject of

exorcism. I don't see spirits but an occasional clairvoyant in my audience will call

my attention to one or two who are standing nearby. I recall an amusing incident

when a cameraman suggested I move to one side as two spirits were causing

interference with the picture. Instead of moving, I turned around and asked the

spirits if they would step aside. “That's better!” exclaimed the cameraman.

The next subject is about the 'dream' that was written to you by your friend.

He described a place where he saw many grey clad human beings following one

after the other and apparently being directed by a powerful negative entity. He went

on to say that he tried to communicate with one young person but failed. I don't

think it was a dream but a pure out-of-body experience into a world very few

people know exist.

Peace Pilgrim, the mystic, who traveled consciously every night, warned me

that there was such a place and to stay far away from it. The Faithists also describe

such a place and the difficulty of trying to rescue a soul from there. In one of their

texts they tell how difficult it is to get the attention of a soul there. One can readily

understand why a hellish place such as this exist. When on this earth place, we

create the kind of life we will find when we cast off the physical body. There are

living people so negative and so positively believing that there is no afterlife but

darkness of the hole of the grave, that they create such a scenario when they die.

During their lifetime, such people usually were not the best company to have

around. The negativity of these souls could conceivably endanger someone trying

to retrieve them. For myself, I have contemplated attempting to rescue people in

that level, but I have never felt strong enough to make the effort. I suggest that you

caution your friend to avoid that area.

Let's talk about another energy that is invisible to most of us. Did you ever go

into a room and felt uncomfortable there? For myself, I can't walk through a

gambling casino without feeling the heaviness of the negativity that exists there.

The atmosphere of such places seems to be full of negative energies and a sensitive

person feels it. I have identified this kind of energy in such places, as caused by

arguments, heated discussions, physical strife, anxieties and by other negative

of 305

activities.

Since we know that energy cannot be destroyed but can be converted, we can

change psychic energy using the mind into some other kind of energy. Using

visualization, I change the negative energy I discover with the pendulum, either at a

location or within a person's body, into the energy of love. The Law of

Visualization states: If you can visualize an event or an object, with belief, it

becomes a reality. My method is to visualize a pinpoint of light as love expanding

and changing all the negative energy into love. I discovered about twenty-five such

energies within you which hopefully have been removed. Hardly any adult has less

than seventy-five.

Clairvoyants often see negative energies or thought forms as dark areas,

streaks of light or in a form more readily identifiable such as an ugly creature or

even as a demon complete with horns. Again the Law applies: the mind created it,

the mind can neutralize it.

Removing negative energies has a practical side. When a restaurant is cleared

of such garbage, business picks up as people seem to like to be there. Also, you and

your guests will feel better in your home. There is also a good possibility that

ridding yourself of negative energies will lead to better health. I send you positive

thoughts for your well being.

of 305

FROM THE ELOISTS

The state of mind of the moment, O Creator, is one of dullness and apathy.

But Thy Intelligence tells us this is not the whole picture, that it is but a section -

one of the dark corners. We do not need to concentrate in that direction, and thus

give it our support. There is much that is alive and bright in most other areas. In

attempting a description of the whole picture, we see many people in various stages

of growth, all with the bright spark of Thy Presence in their souls. Their thoughts

and emotions run the gamut from depths to heights. They are active in many

different ways, creating either greater freedom or further bondage. Over all shines

the Glory of Thy Hosts; and shafts of light penetrate from them into the darkest

places to reach and support striving souls. The over-all picture is bright and

encouraging. A mortal needs only to affirm Thy Presence and Power, to offer

himself in service, and to keep searching for the all-highest inspiration, and he is

safe ashore as from a stormy sea. He can play a part in helping to bring the light

into the dark corners, knowing that Thy Angels are backing him. Whenever we find

ourselves in one of the dark corners, O Creator, we will affirm Thy Presence and

Power, breathe with Thee, give our faith and love, praise Thee, thank Thy Angels,

and rejoice that we are able to be Thy instruments.

of 305

MEDITATION

FROM THE ELOISTS

What is our need in the present times, O Creator?

What kind of light do we mortals need for our awakening and development?

What kind of experience?

Is our world so evil that only catastrophe will cleanse and uplift it?

We do have a degree of order and sanity, of kindliness, of charitableness and

righteousness.

Many are trying to help create a better world.

Man is not without hope and vision and aspiration.

Both darkness and light are manifesting.

They seem to be about evenly balanced.

We are dedicated to trying to help tip the scales in favor of light.

Some of us see the need of self-purification, and are striving along this line.

Others are inspired in different ways, equally important in Thy plan.

We feel that cultivating awareness of Thy Presence and Power is all

important; at least, for the furtherance of Thy work in our group.

We want to give all the love and faith we can to Thy Presence — to the soul,

the true self—in every individual we can reach.

We want to exemplify all the qualities of the ideal, god-like human being, to

practice and develop them, and become more and more perfect instruments of Thy

will, wisdom and love.

Originally written, October 26, 1964

of 305


CHANNELS OF LIGHT

Vernon Wobschall

As Faithists, we are aware that we work with the angels to help dissolve the

darkness on earth and in atmospherea. What are some of the many ways we can do

this? And how best can we inspire both mortals and angels of low grade to turn to

the Light, and not only this, but to become workers to further Jehovih's Kingdom?

Firstly, this combined aspiration of both mortals and angels requires us to

become affiliated with a group or organization who have pledged themselves to

this purpose, rather than to work alone. We need to affiliate for maximum power.

Many times the Creator has appropriated those who have suffered greatly on earth

and in the heavens, as armies of Light (like those of the Inquisition spoken of in

Oahspe) to disperse the darkness. So even in our humble daily lives, Love,

Compassion and Good Works' hold the greatest power for whenever we let go of

"self," great miracles can happen—for we then become shining examples of His

love and draw others closer to Him. Having felt His attributes through us, this heals

those afflicted with darkness and they in turn become more like the Creator in

many ways.

Thus does the Light grow and become more powerful, spreading across the

world and into atmospherea as the angels channel the Light through us. We are

each of us angels on a mission and should never lose sight of this goal, far it is our

destiny to fulfill our mission. By embracing each other in the Light, the Light of

Kosmon will grow stronger with every day. No matter what befalls us from day to

day—keep the Faith.

So let us fill our hearts and homes with songs of joy and praise. Remember

—"A house without a song is like a tree without a bird."

of 305

FROM THE ELOISTS

It is most desirable to be cheerful and radiant with goodwill all the time, and

certainly we should fry to be to the best of our ability. But there are times for some

of us when it is not possible, when pain of mind or body dominates our

consciousness, and darkness seems to take over. Instead of adding to our woes by

holding a sense of failure or condemnation, or by acting mean or irritable, we need

only realize that Thou art present and in command, Jehovih, and give Thee praise

and faith.

We can surrender ourselves, just as we are, to Thee, not resisting, not

fighting, and not letting ourselves be thrown off balance. We can take the attitude

of acceptance of the condition, knowing Thy work continues through it, being glad

and thankful in our deeper selves for the privilege of being Thy instruments. It is

possible, now, to sustain the higher consciousness while the lower is going through

its pains and discomforts. We do not wish to make health and happiness our first

objectives in this work, or to think that they are prerequisites to doing a good job. It

is quite possible that Thy best work is done, and that greatest progress is made,

during these times of darkness. We need only to never cease giving Thee our faith,

praise and devotion. Just as Thy work goes on unceasingly in our lives, so must we

learn to practice our awareness and attunement unceasingly through every

experience, every waking moment.

of 305

FROM THE ELOISTS

To make nothing of the self, O Creator, this is the most difficult thing to do.

In the past we built up the self. Now we must tear it down. We have the feeling of

ownership toward many things; yet, all things are Thine, to give or take away.

Thou sayest, injure not, kill not, but be kind and loving, seeing the good in all

people and all things. Seek no retaliation for wrongs done.

Shall a man not protect his family from harm? If a man lifts himself and his

family up out of darkness and becomes one with Thee, there will be no need to

protect them from harm, for no harm will come upon then. Thou art the Protector,

O Creator. It seems to be a matter of relinquishing ownership, and giving one's self

completely to Thee. We must place ourselves entirely in Thy Hands, being Thy

servants, knowing Thou art in command, keeping aware of the reality of the soul

and the eternity of its growth. We overvalue the things of earth, and cling to them.

We must develop an entirely new consciousness. Then we will see more clearly

how man has gotten himself in the position of thinking it is right to kill or injure

another to protect his own, or to get something he desires. It is all a bad dream!

We want to be awakened!

of 305


CHURCH TRANCE ADDRESS

By Brother George Morley

OAHSPE FELLOWSHIP KOSMON - Midsummer Festival (Summer Solstice)

26 June 1958

To-night you have assembled to celebrate the Summer Solstice, and many of

your Christian friends would call you pagans because this observation of a natural

phenomenon is something which was observed before the Christian Era. If it was

observed before the Christian Era, there is nothing in the Teachings of the great

Founder of the Religion which became Christianity which says you shall not

observe any of the ancient festivals. As a matter of fact, He engaged in it Himself.

We are therefore to conclude there was reason apart from an emotional reason why

the Ceremony of the Summer Solstice has been observed through the ages. It is

because at this particular time of the year the sun is at its strongest, and we have

always looked to the sun as the bestower of life to the Earth. So do you today.

Ancient records show belief in a Beneficent Power and this giving of life is a

manifestation of the Ever Presence.

This Ever Presence everywhere manifests and produces those things which

are alive. Everything in nature vibrates to this Presence. It is a source of all Motion,

Energy, Thought, Idealism, Music, Art, Poetry, Love, everything which can create

that which is beautiful. It is friendship's tie. It is the light from the farthest star. It is

the movement of the insect on glowing wing as it passes from flower to flower. It is

the power in the petals of the flower expressing an innate force. Know that the life

with which you are so familiar does not exist only on the plane on which you are

living. It manifests through other states of being and it is because of this that you

are believers in life after death. Death, the change from the physical to the spiritual,

the passing from Earth into the Heaven World, and the taking on of Immortality

with a spiritual body. And this time of year betokens that Ascension into the Light

that is profoundly real to you.

of 305

And because you are aware of the facts that go to show the continuity of life

and the glorious Ascension away from corpor, that you rejoice at this Hi'dan, this

High Light Festival. There are with you those who are out of the physical body.

They are with you in that spiritual body which they have inhabited after passing

from the earth life, but they do not come so near to you perhaps as you might wish.

You might wish for some special manifestation of their presence. How do they

approach you then? Is it on an interior plane of your being?

Let us look at it for a moment. When a man dies and leaves earth life, he

dwells very closely to the condition he left. He had shut out all thoughts of an ‘after

life'. Desiring his old surroundings, his thought held him there. He found that the

things he left he could no longer control. Now they became intangible. He sees

them with an astral sight, sees objects through their vibrations. He may dwell in

that condition for a considerable time. There comes a time when the urge to

advance comes to him. He enters the spirit state more profound and real which has

possibilities denied him on earth. He sees larger scope for expression and earlier

life fades somewhat. There is still love for those he left on earth and ties are not yet

broken so he can come back to the state but now with greater power than before.

Now the mind goes out to a thing and it immediately understands the thing.

Misunderstandings are not possible as they are on earth. There one is known in

one's true aspect. Petty failings of earth life have gone. The particular germ within

the spirit shines like a jewel. One begins to take hold of things by blending with

them, and all things which take one away from the conditions left behind are like

aspirations after self-expression. The urge to be your true self has free scope and

acts like wings which carry you on, and on. No wonder Angels are portrayed with

wings by artists. There is typification of this power. Spirits travel distances, some

from more interior planes of life, some from other planets. Their mission? A power

which can unite. As spiritual power increases it infiltrates lesser planes. Negative

forces become lesser. In the latter days, the ideals in art, music, poetry, dancing,

symmetry become better expressed in the race. Younger generations catch up with

ideals which become better expressed.

The world has been a testing ground for the human race for thousands upon

thousands of years. Why should it ever change if it is the object of earth life to

of 305

bring forth humanity that it may inhabit the Celestial planes? There is not in the

whole of natural phenomena anything which indicates a permanence. The human

race must either continue to advance or it must cease to exist; It is because of this

that such schools of thought as KOSMON exist today and are advancing the

message so that it can be handed on and on and on and all those who feel the power

of spirit moving them will respond to the inflow of this wonderful vibration of life

and expression the best thoughts within them, bound by no forms, creeds and

dogmas, loving the Father and believing in His Power to regenerate the whole of

the world, His Power to provide "Heavens of delight which perish not forever" as it

says in Bon's Book of Praise, in Oahspe.

These are things fundamental to the TRUE RELIGION. All those who take

the Path of this Religion feel that they are the expressing this Interior Light which

the higher angels are manifesting on the Inner Planes. They express with silent

thought, telepathy. When the true light shines there is no limitation to the power.

Life after death is an elementary fact.

The Kosmon Church particularizes on the coming into rapport with those

interior planes of Light from which the spiritual powers can flow overall the wide

world. So that the true believer, the Faithist, by the power of Affirmation opens

within the planes of his spiritual consciousness, a door. The Light from Higher

Worlds flows out through that doorway. He seeks to come more and more into at-

one-ment with those Inner planes and it is by no easy process that he does this. He

follows a definite path of discipline. He begins in Service, a member of a

Fraternity, seeks methods of meditation or contemplation and thus bring his soul

into association with all who work toward raising up standards of the human race.

After years of service he perhaps seeks still closer union and communion with the

more inner planes and there is no Path denied to him if he has the perseverance to

go on. What seems like two worlds are one. It takes nothing from earthly life.

Discipline has a purpose. Tasks of life become less irksome because over all there

will be the dawning of the transcendental spirit and you will know that your Father

will speak to you in the Silence of meditation. The best within you will begin to

unfold.

You look into suffering, may think, "Why has the Creator permitted it?" Now

of 305

let us put the question another way: Why do I permit it? We are all part of the

Creator. Not donation for scientific research for the cure of disease but we suggest

you devote your life to the prevention of things which take away the beauty of

humanity, which cause constant crumbling into decay of the human race. You may

say, you have no power but we all have power. Remove the conditions which are

basic. It is the conditions of life which produce these. Remove the conditions. If the

spirit had free play through the living organism there is no disease which could

triumph over it. The proof of this is that if you bring a person into line with the

spiritual light the disease which has so often baffled the physician is entirely driven

away.

The Spiritual Science is a very real thing. Not that we decry physical science,

in its place it is doing admiral and noble work. There is an underlying Power which

produces Light the Inner Light. When we speak about the Inner Light, the mystic

interprets it as some power which can come and raise us up above our little selves.

It is quickened every time we turn our thoughts to the Creator and say: "Our

Father". It is the identity of ourselves with the Power which is greater than our

limitations; it is the identity with this Power which can overcome the limitations.

When the mind recognizes a thing it opens a channel within the psychic centers for

the inflow of the Invisible Power which has produced all nature. When this Power

flows through the psychic doorways it passes through the etheric body and it reacts

upon the physical body. And in 9 cases out of 10 that is what happens when the

sufferer is healed by the power of prayer after the physicians have failed. In

identification with Our Father, called by Faithists in JEHOVIH — we see solution.

Jehovih is Ever Present intelligence expressed in the whole of creation and by all

the angels as One Self ; through all vast universes expressed as His Body; in the

heavens as Spirit, and in the Soul of things as His most Internal Self. And you and

are part of that One Life and, are ONE We seek the unity in this Festival of Mid-

summer. Here in this Mid-summer Festival when all the glory of life is about us, let

us catch hold of it and never let it go but live forever in the Light of the Eternal

Oneness: The Father of All in every age."

of 305


We Believe

The Eloists

That there is One worshipful Being in all the universe Who is all there is in

all of life.

Whose Will, Wisdom and Love are present, at least in seed form, in the souls

of all the Creator's children on this and millions of other worlds, corporeal and

spiritual.

Who has created us for continual progression in higher and higher worlds

forever.

Who makes the All One's children into instruments for their own

development and the management of the worlds they live in.

We believe that we become aware of and attuned with our Creator by losing

self, which means separateness.

That self-purification is the first step for all to take in the pathway of light,

truth and freedom—physically, mentally and spiritually.

That mortals are misled and their souls suppressed by the influence of

millions of spirits of the dead who have not progressed away from earth; and who

perpetuate the darkness which produces so much misery, hatred and disorder in the

world.

We believe that higher Beings, the Angel Hosts, are trying to awaken

mortals, and working to free humanity from its age-old bondage and limitations.

We believe that mortals can cooperate with the Higher Beings by practicing

peace and brotherhood, and by giving their devotion and service to their Creator for

the establishment of a new order of benevolence on earth.

of 305

BLAMELESS

Rick Cafaro

In the Dead Sea Scrolls reference is made to the requirements to be a member

of the Essene community. The children of the light are those who keep all the

commandments and walk “blamelessly before men and angels”.

To be blameless can be a tall order. To be such a person is not what you

believe yourself to be but what others perceive you as. They can see what is written

upon your soul.

In the conflicts that arise between people, usually one or both parties try

earnestly to make themselves out to be innocent of all accusations, or only slightly

responsible.

Such a disposition is from the first resurrection. Oahspe’s Book of Discipline

states “of the first resurrection: Let me justify myself in what I have done; behold, I

am falsely accused.” And further in the text, “I will not consider my shortcoming”,

lest I be dejected in spirit.” And then also again, “What might the world say? Ah!

My reputation is at stake!” Being blameless is not covering up and hiding the truth.

But rather, taking responsibility for any or the least part of any dispute or

misunderstanding and then making full restitution to repair for any wrongdoing in

actions or words. I have often found that the person who talks the loudest about his

or her innocence, claiming with much fervor that they are in no way responsible,

are usually good liars.

They so often have an excuse for everything. Why they were late, why they

didn’t get this thing done, their problems that so often arise inhibiting them from

completing their job., or finishing this or doing that. They lie to their friends, they

lie to themselves, taking little thought that the angels of Jehovih can see right

through them.

of 305

To walk blamelessly before men and angels is indeed a tall order. The first

requirement is total honesty, a willingness to admit your faults, which requires

humility. The second requirement is a wholehearted determination to make things

right, by doing right, thinking and speaking right. In the Book of Discipline it is

stated, “of the second resurrection: Teach me, O Father, to look into my every act,

word and thought, to purify myself in Thy sight!” Be your own judge, Oahspe

teaches us how. No one is perfect. No one can truly be completely blameless. But

in the context of what the Essenes meant it is very possible. It requires dedication

and constant monitoring. And this is part of what it is to be a good Faithist. Not to

make excuses, not to abet conflicts, not to find fault, but rather standing tall and

firm in the light, taking full responsibility, avoiding conflicts and seeing the good

in all, being a child of light. And in turn you too may be called blameless by the

angels of Jehovih.

of 305


FROM THE ELOISTS

We are called upon from time to time to make decisions which are difficult

because they involve so many different factors and points of view. The intelligence

of our lesser natures is not sufficient, it seems, to give us the right answers. Even

when we make a decision, we are not always sure that we have done right. We have

consecrated our lives to serving thee, Jehovih, and are trying to live from Thy

inspiration, and not by rules alone. Some matters lie outside the field which can be

governed by rules. So we try to uncover the highest light possible which is of the

soul and from Thy Presence. This involves our faith in Thee, and in the fact that

Thou art overshadowing our lives for the purpose of world betterment. Inspiration

from a higher source than that of mortal intelligence is necessary to our success. If

we forget that we are living to serve Thee, or lose our awareness and attunement at

times through reverting to self, we cut off Thy inspiration; and if problems come up

at such times, we are unable to handle them wisely. But if we are doing our best to

stay tuned, we can have faith that Thou wilt inspire us in the right way. Our

Creator! Ever-Present and powerful, and All-Wise! We want and need Thy

inspiration above all things. The whole world needs Thy inspiration. It is our

purpose to so conduct and rule ourselves that we are open every moment to an

understanding of Thy Will.

of 305

The Spiritual Dress

14 October 2003

Ken Mills.

The Mantle I understand that our spirit friends clothe them selves or wear a mantle

to distinguish themselves not only is this a covering of fine cloth but it is also

colorful to the degree that one is advanced in the knowledge of spiritual

consciousness. To be sure the knowledge would be of a different hue to what we

are used to on this material and denser world. Oahspe tells us that Music and

Colour are used not only to build those great ships as well as to drive them across

millions of miles in that vast space around us. So to what degree does color and

music have on our earthly lives, should we become accustomed to these units of

power? Now to carry this further as to the Creator or God of this universe? Is God a

fantasy? Well I can accept with all my heart that when man came forth and the

process of thought emerged into language then these thoughts also were enclosed if

you like in color or as the scientist would say electrical impulses, these in turn are

gathered in a Super consciousness that all thought springs from as would the water

from a well. It also receives all thought from where ever no matter what the

language. We have to think? In a different form of maybe Light, we know it travels

but we cannot see it, thoughts are the same So yes we can Sow seeds of thought as

in prayer, receive them in meditation, they are Things and so we can witness in

spiritual psychic form people and or their thoughts over great distance, in fact just

as this (GOD consciousness) is as close as breath so is everything else in this

universe. Hope that will clarify my outlook and understanding on this important

topic.

of 305

THE TREE OF LIFE The Cabbala or Kabbalah the origin would be hard to really define as like

most teachings it contains both the past and the Ray of Light of the Day, but the

word Kabbalah was established at least in the traditions that were handed down by

word of mouth: as distinct from written scripture: it is harder still to date the time

when secret or mystical knowledge was established as such. We do know that the

group known as Essenes were around long before Jewish lore as we know it, and

others and I feel a great respect for this group in passing on much of the higher

knowledge.

They were responsible for the Dead Sea Scrolls found in 1948, which shows

secret lore, as some of us know it as. At any rate in the 2nd century; the

“MISHNA” a Rabbinic collection of religious lore attests the existence of two

subjects that should not be taught in public and were therefore considered esoteric

disciplines for initiates only: The subjects were: The work of Creation — from

Genesis, chapter 1. The Work of the Creation and the mystery of the Divine Throne

— from Ezekiel chapter 1. It was because of the dangers the soul encountered on

the ascent that the secret lore came into being:

The Tree is composed of ten numbers placed in compartments each

containing aspects of the Creator which in turn are within each of us to different

degrees, That is how we use Numerology and how to some extent Astrology is also

shaped from this theory. The tree grows downwards and we see three parts on the

left the female, on the right the male. The middle mediates between them to

harmonize these aspects and make up the Godhead, which in spite of its

complexities is essentially one. We can see the balance that we would all like with

these separate powers by the joining lines.

The earlier Gnostic system consisted of hundreds of such aspects but I feel

ten is enough for us to contend with and it is up to the individual to let his own

consciousness expand as it can to reach out into this ever increasing knowledge of

this cosmos or universe, this after all is the purpose of the symbol, as with all

symbols it is unrestricting and unlimiting. Unlike our orthodox teachings that tell

us when where and how we can find God in a confined path. The system is

concerned with mans soul journey towards heaven through the cosmic spheres. It

of 305

requires individual discipline to develop the powers to forge through a passage into

the higher elements of consciousness.

All reality is composed of letters and numbers this came from Merkabahr

(The Throne of Glory) 32 elements of the universe, the 22 letters of the Hebrew

Alphabet and the first ten numbers. Not by chance we have 22 Trumps Major in the

Tarot Cards.

The unknowable God was called “En Sof” the Infinite. In effect this God

does not exist, for the God spoken of in the Bible is manifest revealed, which is

impossible in the case of God Infinite.

The Kabbalah teaches emanation rather than creation, emanation is

something, which has flowed out from its source, as distinct from something,

which has been created or made by a maker. The universe is after all the creator

and therefore cannot become individualized. Ken Mills

The Tree begins with the supreme Crown of God. No 1 “Kether” each

Sefiroth has of course considerable range of symbolism and imagery, some are

more important than others. Number 5 is a case in point as it is the centre of the ten

numbers or compartments, it is all things and yet is nothing, it contains all that is in

2 and 3, which brings it to the centre, like Lee, the heart of things. Yet it is also the

middle of everything and needs to relate to all the other numbers to be good.

Without them it can be totally negative.

The number 6 is beauty and compassion of God. It is the building number.

The centre between the human and the divine. We can also divide the tree into four

Elements, which in turn can be enlarged of courser but in the cabalistic cosmology,

these are Asiluth the Divine world — Beriah — the Sub-Divine world — Yesirah

the world of Heavenly spheres down to the moon. Asiyyah — the sub-lunar

universe. And so like a book we can open it up and read at any level in any context,

according to our individual degree of enlightenment at any given time. Unlike a

book its power to increase knowledge and understanding is unlimited.

The sixth Sefirah Tifereth (Beauty) is the central Sefirah. It functions as the

hub and pivot of the whole system. In the dynamic exchange in the give and take of

power, the six receives the power and influx of the higher potentsies and

of 305

harmonises them, and passes them on to the lower ones.

Standing at the lower end of the symbol is the number 10 Malkhuth —

Kingdom — like a receptive womb becoming the bride, Moon and Queen. As it

acquires the active creative ruling characteristics in harmony, it also becomes the

Mother, much as we say Mother Earth, which receives its energies and sustance

from above.

We have two paths to the understanding of God. One is to accept in blind

faith, and to spend ones life in worry if such a God exists when he fails us — or to

set out and discover God Manifest in all things and to really understand his many

moods and aspects.

Many of you will have made a study of Yoga and the Chakras. Mostly

keeping to seven chakras. Like the “Tree of Life” there are many more. Just the

same it is with enlightenment and understanding that we can learn to accept more

as we go along and each of these centres while being a part of the whole, is a

centre, which has its own part to play. It is the duty of the Yoga practice to bring all

of these charkas into harmony and into the state known as Samadhi — Nirvana,

Liberation a experience of the I AM.

Now the question will be raised by many, that’s all very well, but how do we

know when we have this experience of reality. Well my friends, the I AM

Consciousness is very clear in its expression, for at the back of all and any

experience is the act of feeling. There is nothing that takes the place in our lives,

which does not have a sense of feeling.

It is the degree of feeling that mediums sense that drives them on to express

what they see hear or feel or just plain sense which is more often the case. When

we read a book hear a lecture see a film or any other experience with our senses,

physical or psychic there is always a degree of feeling as to how you feel about it.

So my friends it is this gut feeling this heart feeling, or head feeling, no

matter where it takes place remember you are an individual and must find your

own way of connecting into the vast cosmic computer through which you will find

answers to your many questions and learn to trust it and to keep it switched on at

all times. It has been my experience that symbols, nature, prose, music, and

of 305

paintings act as keys to different parts of cosmic knowledge, which awaits us if we

care to seek it out.

So let me once again list for you the following:- There is a great mystery in

the fact that your personality is exclusively different from that of any other human

being. That your I-AM consciousness of identity is exactly the same. You are really

one in consciousness with all human beings and with all self-conscious creatures

who have ever lived, or who will live in and on all inhabitable worlds, within this

great universe.

You must realize the inner voice is saying I, AM I to every living self-

conscious being in the cosmos. Pretty hard to take I guess but if we believe in the

Godhead of the great divine force then as per our acceptance of that idea so shall

we become aware of this cosmos. “Do unto others as you would they would do

unto you” takes on a greater meaning for you would be injuring your own self or

Divine Soul.

The deeper the feeling, the closer the communion and then a closer under-

standing of each other. You see you have feelings about what you see, hear and

feel, moved or unmoved by what you hear or taste and you feel repulsed by what

you touch or smell, you feel drawn to or driven away by the ordure. Feeling is the

universal language and when we learn to rely more upon our feelings we will have

greatly extended our awareness of this beautiful universe we are destined to live on

for eternity.

Thank your Ken Mills.

of 305

OPEN LETTERS PROM READERS Dear Editors: Several months ago I came across a book on an American

Indian, Black Elk at B. Dalton Bookseller. On 9/19/92 I was drawn to this same

bookstore. I was frantically looking through all sorts of books. I didn’t understand

why. Then I found what I was looking for on the top shelf just where it was several

months ago. The title is “Black Elk Speaks” as told through John C. Nethardt.

Evidently John Neihardt wrote a great deal about the American Indians.

Black Elk had a great vision as told in chapter III, The Great Vision. This

vision was about the Oahspe symbol, the circle, the cross and the (tree) leaf of life

as you see on the cover of the Faithist Journal. His interpretation of this symbol is

as though it came right out of the Oahspe. The horizontal line (corpor) was black

and the vertical line was red. The horizontal line is the black road of war, death and

confusion that man must travel. The vertical line is the red road of joy. When the

American Indian was crushed by white man the circle was destroyed, and the tree

of life died. In its place at the center of the circle is a healing herb. This appears to

be the present. Then in his vision Black Elk sees the tree of life growing again, and

there are many circles every where.

Since reading, “Black Elk Speaks”, I have been having dreams about the

Oahspe symbol every night. I would see beautiful colors everywhere, going

counterclockwise around the circle, left to right or west to east, on the horizontal

line, below to up or South to North on the vertical line and the colors in the tree of

life kept getting brighter. These colors kept going faster and faster until all the

colors began to move in unison as one, continuous, flowing motion. Right then, I

understood everything.

of 305

Immediately after I understood the kaleidoscope of colors, I was transferred

into a classroom. I was talking to American Indian students from the book of

SAPHAH, plate of SEMOIN. Night after night I was having the same dream over

and over. Then on the last night of the dream, Monday, Sept. 28th as I was talking

before the Indian students, I drew a black cross on the blackboard. Then the cross

got bigger and bigger. It was dark and ominous, black, both horizontal and vertical.

As I looked again there was a man on this black cross, as I continue to look, he

becomes black all over, dark all over, just like the cross. As it continues to get

bigger and bigger, there at the bottom of the cross a book opens and all the words

fall out onto the ground, which is also dark and ominous. The words are dead and

they are in a big pile like garbage.

While I continued to dream I understood that religion was dead as it is

nothing but a bunch of words and more words in a big pile beneath this black cross

like stinking garbage. I turn to these American Indian students and tell them this

black cross has no circle (hoop) of power around it, and the center has only death

and no tree of life. I said to them “choose the religion of death or the circle and tree

of life.” Also I told them since the American Indian has maintained faith in the

Great spirit white man will have to come back to the Indian for the sacred

knowledge of the Great Spirit.

Tom Gabriel

of 305

Kosmon Pioneer Bulletin 1954

Unselfishness is one of the higher virtues. It is a quality that, to acquire it,

you must develop it, cultivate it, and strive for it. When we begin life we cry for

what we want and cry not to have what we do not want. This continues until we are

taught unselfishness and see the results that come from being selfish. Give children

a good start in life by teaching them to be considerate and thoughtful of others at an

early age. Life begins when you start doing things for others without any thought of

a return.

of 305

From: Ken Mills

Date: 03/18/04 21:01:28

To: Aart Bosman

Vision Here it is, do what you wish with it. Ken. Liked your man thing. It has

always intrigued me how a name of a place or person can invoke memories, our

heart and minds can be changed in an instance and so I wish to report this story of

mine a short but vivid state of mind this morning. I awoke this morning very early

yet wide-awake and an impulse to get up and sit before my simple alter and receive

what ever but sure there was something in the wind. The sun was up and a

wonderful day beckoned. I had not been in my meditation long or so it seemed

when I was surrounded with a multi colour cloud and lifted up slowly and gentle

and also along a ray like a roadway of electric Blue a most beautiful colour that

made me feel attuned to all that was around be. I seemed to travel some distance to

a scene where there were various paths leading into a haze and with the feeling that

I had to choose my path, funny when I think of this as I have been searching for my

path for years and each time have been directed to another after a time.

Anyway I chose the path that was lined with tall trees I think they were

Norfolk Pine and always feel at peace when in their strong trunks. After some

distance a huge door appeared, when I say huge I mean beyond comprehension and

it too looked solid and above all sense of proportion when compared with the giant

trees I had travelled through so my mind was at a loss to fathom this scene with my

mortal intelligence. As this cloud that I am still enveloped in drifted to this door it

started to open, ever so slowly and beyond was this hall of equal proportion to the

door. I began to wonder what other surprises lay before me. Along this hall on both

side appeared what was like a moving film of people. All of them I recognized well

some of them as those who had been great Musicians, Scientist, Doctors, Authors,

Artist and those who had created inventions and other matters that had helped

mankind. I did not see any faces of those who had done mortal harm. The ceiling

that was of great height seemed to be a revolving range of the Big White Fluffy

Clouds that inhabit the New Zealand Skies and from where the name Land of the

Long White Cloud arose. Here and there without any special sequence there

of 305

appeared streaks of the electric Blue I had seen earlier.

As I moved slowly along the hall I had the feeling that at some point I would

meet or see something that would change my life, though why I should be chosen

to view this beautiful and strange scene I could not at the time bother to think about

in fact was not even conscious of any earthly impressions other than wonderment.

After awhile the hall narrowed and several other more normal doors began to line

the walls, each seem to have a number though I could not see what.

Outside each door was an Angel at least that is the only way I can describe

the figure of beauty. I began to wonder which door I might be entering, so after

some fifty or more doors the cloud that surrounded me dropped away as if I had

taken my coat of, before me the number on the door was 000. I could not help but

think of its meaning, at least to me with my understanding of Numerology. The

Angel opened the door and away in the corner stood a large desk and a man of

large size sat with a pen in hand and a book before him. I suddenly felt the first

pain of fear and yet I could also feel the flow of love and friendship flowing from

this man. I was offered a chair and then after pause the man asked who I thought he

was, well apart from my father who I have always hoped to meet again some day I

had only one other man who had stayed in my thoughts for many years and I said

Mr. Newbrough.

There was a period of silence and then a hand was offered to me which took

and felt a strange energy run through my body. As I write this I have to wonder

what this may mean to others, but for me it is a turning point and the energy is I

know the drive I needed to do what I have to do without any feelings of remorse,

resentment or other feelings we tend to get when embarking on something we feel

the urge to do. Dr. Newbrough asked if I felt the need to cry, I could not fully

understand why he asked that other than it might release some hidden feeling, but I

said no I would rather laugh as I had not been doing much of that of late.

of 305

He then explained that I might inform others that while many had strange

thoughts about parts of Oahspe, it was a natural response and no one should worry

about that but that we would be better to concern ourselves in the continued

promotion of Oahspe in anyway possible and that its keys would be turned in a

even stranger way than the book itself. I felt a deep sense of love coming from his

voice and also privileged to have this experience, but could and still cannot

understand why me. I would like to say more about this but at the moment that is

all I can recall, as there was no fancy exit, just after I bade farewell and passed

through the door I found myself in a daze and feeling very tired.

of 305

Subject: in my sight The latest writing of Wayne’s ended with a question, “Is the Creator forever

to be in Disguise” I find this an interesting question to put ones mind to, yes an

invaluable item in this old body is the mind as without it, life would certainly be

empty. My thoughts on this is that I have always seen the Creator in all the

beautiful things, like the Butterfly, the Bee and the flowers they serve each in the

own way. The Sun Set and the Sun Rise each become more beautiful and

wonderful each day. The rolling serf down at the beach indicating the power of the

unseen yet potent force. The smile from my neighbor who is slowly but surely

dying from Cancer but has mind to live. The many people who give their time to

help others with little or no reward other than Love. Those who offer to help in

times of need when all is lost in the many disasters we face around the world. Yes I

can see the Creator in so many things if one cares to look and forget those dreadful

words in the old bibles of a hard and vengeful God, those writers saw only the

negative aspects that anyone can see in all things if they choose. At this moment in

our history we need more and more of the positive sightings of a loving Creator.

Blessings Ken

of 305

As a Ray of light I would like to consider the quote above, which is a part of a quotation from

Oahspe, the book we are concerned with here tonight. The full quote is “Thou are

as the end of a ray of light from My Person”

The whole of my thinking in regard to this Universe we abide in and the many

questions that this Life pose are tied to the one statement that all Life is made up of

Thought and so the above quote is very relevant as I can then except quite readily

that I am a part of this whole process and therefore should do my best to advance

its course into the glory set before me.

There are, as you know many questions that come to mind and each possible

answer will raise more questions so that we will never it seems come to a final

conclusion. I ask should there be a final answer and I have to say no, as then life

would have no purpose in continuing its journey into a future, and I am positive

that without a future life would be meaningless.

Now as I have travelled this journey for some 80 years and at the stage when like

most in my golden years feel they at least have some foundation to base at least a

part answer to a few of the questions we ask of this life.

One question that is always prominent is that of Re-Incarnation, the same life

continuing into another person on and on until some state of pure light is reached.

There are many cases on record that are hard to refute, yet the thought that there is

need for such a system is abhorrent to many and I refuse to indulge in such a

thought as its main purpose is to give some feeling of importance when otherwise

the person may feel less worthy.

Never the less there is a reasonable explanation to this idea, apart from the idea

being used many years ago to give some satisfaction to those unfortunates being

used to create wealth of one kind or another for the few which in part continues

today in India that made them feel as though they were at least on the road to

greater things in a future life.

of 305

Be that as it may I am sure the better view would be to advance by service to others

and just as importantly service to ones own personal Light, ones own possibilities. I

am sure like every flower and shrub we too have a blossom to produce if cared for

and fed properly by both nourishment and right thought.

My other encouragement in this life is that we are as the quote said an extension of

the Ray of Light from the original Source whatever the form might be.

To hold this thought gives one strength not only the feeling of being a part of the

whole and therefore have a place no matter how small in this Universal plan, it also

enables a communication between the cells of all living things, just think of that for

a moment, it opens up all manner of creative possibilities and potential to each of

us. Of course a few have used this for their own good and caused great harm for

which they must surely have to repay at some stage, and yes life does continue but

not I fear in the same condition as here on this Earth life but in a more subtle form.

This is where the suggestion that all life whatever form it may take is no more than

Thought Vibrations just as the Light is self, which we are an extension of a brain

cell in a Universal mind.

Blessings Ken Mills. 31/12/2002

of 305

THE DANGEROUS ROAD

by Eugene Maurey

The article, “It’s a Matter of Life and Death,” which appeared in the May-

June 1987 issue of The Faithist Journal, coincides in many respects with my

experiences as an exorcist.

But first let me briefly explain how I do an exorcism. We know that, when a

person passes into the spirit world (dies) he/she carries across all the emotions,

memories, desires, and strong or weak personality as the person had when living.

At first there may be some confusion, disorientation, but the person is his same old

self.

Let us imagine that a person we know — let us call her Margarita – led a

useful life always trying to be of help to others. She dies. What will she do now?

Margarita, now in the afterlife, has not changed in her thinking and will continue to

do what she has always done, to help others and be a useful citizen in the society in

which she now finds herself. Let us examine what happens to another individual

(we will call him Diago).

Diago in this life was full of intrigue, hateful purposes and was a heavy

drinker. He dies. He also does not change. He strongly desires to continue his

power play role, his drinking habits and his utter disregard for others. But how can

he do it? The only way is through a living person. He waits, looking for his

opportunity.

Now comes John, a likable guy, happily married to Angela, an understanding

and loving wife. John likes to socialize with the men from the factory where he

works and they occasionally go out to the local tavern to put one on. On one

drinking session John forgets to count his drinks and almost passes out. John is

drained of energy, loses his natural protection and Diago, who has been waiting for

his opportunity, takes over. John goes home. His wife, not suspecting anything is

wrong, senses a change in him. Soon John, goes to the tavern more frequently and

when he returns home intoxicated, he is nasty and sometimes physically brutal to

his loving and understanding wife. Angela doesn’t know it but the drunken man is

of 305

not her husband; it Diago. Diago doesn’t like Angela and has determined to drive

her away so that he can have John all to himself, to do with him as he pleases. We

have now the typical scenario of the alcoholic who causes havoc with his family.

What is to be done? All thoughts are instantly transmitted between spirits or

between spirits and living persons. We, on this side, can communicate with any

spirit (dead person) when we concentrate on him / her. Also, for those who are

familiar with using the pendulum, questions can be asked that can be answered

with a “yes” or “no.” The question is asked, “Is John possessed?” The pendulum

will swing “yes.” Questions are then asked to ascertain the personalities of the

possessing spirits, and to count the number which may be present. When this

information is known, the exorcist is ready to go to work.

My method is to contact a spirit helper and to instruct him (George) what is

to be done. I ask George to explain to the erring spirits that they are dead, are

causing trouble both to themselves and to their victim and that they must leave.

They are then introduced to a friendly and trusted spirit on their side whom they

see. Most will go with such a friend to meet their loved ones who have preceded

them in death. Those who are reluctant to leave are dealt with in another manner. In

any event, they all go.

When Diago is sent on his way, Angela rediscovers the same old loving John.

Furthermore, surprisingly, John has but faint memories that he was nasty or in any

way mean to his wife.

All is done with a loving attitude. I believe that the mischief-making spirits

are basically good; however, they are simply misguided. Show them the direction

of their greater good – or give them a shove – and they will cause no more trouble

to the living.

Most spirits who are earthbound — tied to our earth but not of this earth —

are confused, homeless and friendless. They know not where to turn for help. They

usually do not know they are dead, possibly because of a sudden accidental death

or because of a strong attraction to something on this earth such as alcohol, drugs,

sex or even a treasure. They may wander for hundreds of years in the astral world –

that nebulous space surrounding the earth – before someone, either a living person

of 305

or a friendly spirit, will guide them in a more productive direction. All too often a

malevolent spirit will cause untold harm to many living persons before he is sent

off to be educated and guided by a loving spirit teacher. The Faithist Article gives a

ratio of 8 to 1 spirits to the living, that was prevalent thousands of ago, particularly

in ancient Egypt. My finding differs little. When a person has been possessed for 5

to 20 years, I frequently find 3 to 6 spirits who have entered and are controlling his

mind and a host of 25 to 50 who are nearby looking for an opportunity to enter. A

final word to the wise – or should it be to the foolish? Be extremely careful when

exploring the psychic world. If you must do it, seek a competent teacher. Be wary

of who contacts you on that other side. Do not play around with the ouija board –

you don’t know with whom you are talking. A Master, St. Francis or Joshu (Jesus)

do not have the time to play games with you. More than likely, it is someone who

would like you to believe he / she is a great and wise person. Fall for that line and

you are ready to have your whole life crumble about you.

For assistance and further information write Rev. Eugene Maurey, 4555 W.

60th St., Chicago, IL 60629.

of 305

SYMBOLS

by Joan Greer

There are a number of things that studies such as

Astrology, Numerology, Tarot, I Ching, and Kaballa have in

common. One of these is the use of symbols to help us understand

abstract ideas. To me this is one of the truly profound aspects of

such study, for the human mind needs training in working with

and understanding symbols. We are told in OAHSPE that the first teaching that the

angels aim was to give to mortals a group of symbols to help them in their spiritual

studies. This group of symbols is present in OAHSPE as the Tablet of Se’moin in

the Book of Saphah.

One of the things I learned in the study of Astrology and Tarot was that there

are a number of levels of understanding from which the student may view any

particular symbol. I understand this to mean that as we grow spiritually, we express

a higher and higher spiritual understanding, and this understanding appears in our

lives in a deeper spiritual wisdom about life. As we grow and mature spiritually,

we sometimes see new meanings in symbols, things we had not seen or understood

before. Astrology teaches that there is a lower side of our nature and a higher side

of our nature, and that our own spiritual growth express this higher or lower nature

depending upon our own understanding.

One example of understanding different meanings of a symbol can be seen in

contemplating the diamond. Plate 81, TABLET OF HY’YI shows a diamond which

is to be pondered In association with the eye and the sun. From the text, which is

used to study this tablet; called HO’ED, we find this..

Yea,, the diamond binds me not, the highest shining corporeal

thing.

of 305

As I pondered this, I realized that the diamond does not shine in the darkness,

and so for our study in this tablet, the diamond is grouped with the sun and the eye.

The diamond here represents a “corporeal thing, and there is no abstract

meaning involved, except that we do understand that without the corporeal sun

(symbol of the Creator), the diamond would not flash its beautiful and varied

colors. So light is necessary for the diamond to be the shiniest corporeal thing, the

diamond does not shine on its own. The diamond shines because of the light which

strikes it. It also shines because of the way it is cut, and the inner perfection which

exists within it. A diamond with flaws does not have the same sparkle as a diamond

that is flawless, but only a trained eye can truly tell the difference.

In another tablet of Saphah, Plate 80, Tablet of Ancient Egypt, another aspect

of the diamond is found in verse 6 of the accompanying text called

ARIBANIA’HIAYAUSTOYI we find that we are to think of ourselves as more

precious than the diamond. The text reads:

Thou hast made me above the diamond and above all precious stones.

The text goes on to say that the men of darkness seeks diamonds because he

does not realize that we (the Father’s children) are more precious, and that if we:

Run quickly to lift up others they shall be gems for our raiment; they shall

become a glory in Thy sight

So in this understanding of the channel, it is to symbolize that we choose to

help others, knowing they are more precious than any gem stone. Through the

contemplation of these of these two verses in different tablets, we also come to

understand that we can become shining as a diamond, flashing the brilliant colors

of the Creator by placing ourselves in the spiritual light — that is to say, by

allowing the light of Jehovih to shine upon us, and to shine from within us.

In the Book of Saphah, tablet or in there is a symbol called OM. In the text,

of 305

which is verse IQ. we are told that OM is the negative, the female of Jehovih. If we

wish to receive spiritually we are to ask of OM, so if we seek spiritual blessings or

healing we receive those from OM All spiritual gifts come to us by waiting in

supplication. NA is the opposite of Old, and may be thought of as the positive or

male Spiritual power comes by going forth. In this same verse it explains that when

we go forth to labor for others, we go forth in NA.

Nevertheless, we are told that the ALL ONE is ONE, but that the ALL ONE

has these two attributes. NA and OM the positive and the negative. The same verse

also tells us that each individual is both NA and OM In the Book of Divinity,

Footnote I, we are told that OM is female for Jehovih, and that Bride- grooms

marry Old, and Brides marry Jehovih.

This symbolism of the positive and the negative is repeated in different ways

in OAHSPE. For example, in the Book of Saphah,

There is one Almighty Creator, matchless in wisdom, power, unity of

purpose and the Creator of all on this Earth and all other worlds seen and unseen.

Mans’ soul is immortal and will attain peace and joy in the heavens of the

Almighty. According to a man’s good or evil deeds, words, thoughts, he will

inherit joy or unhappiness in heaven. All the world is every man’s country. To do

good with all one’s wisdom and strength is the highest religion. Man has a natural

right to serve the Creator in his own way. This is an age of reason in which all men

should be inspired to read and think and judge with their own judgment and not

through priest, or church or Saviour. The doctrine of the Saviour is unjust and no

honest man should accept another man’s dying for him.

The so-called sacred books are not the writings of the Creator and their many

defects prove them to have been made by corruptible authors. In practice those

sacred books are used by unprincipled priests to promote wars, inquisition, tyranny

and destruction. Man should rise up in his might to embrace his Creator, by the

practice of good works, and by promoting brotherly love toward all men; and by

charity and independence elicit the protection, the pride and the glory of the

of 305

Almighty.

This is the l’hin seal which relates to inner dimensions. The weather is mild

in this Comox valley at the toot of Mt. Washington ski area. Sometimes snow in

the winter covers the land chasing the birds into hiding. Most of the year the

Comox glacier is mantled in white. It looks like mother earth. On its flat area some

Indians claim that one of the ships from Pan landed there and left a large arrow in

the rock pointing down. Local psychics have seen this area covered with grass in

the near future.

At night the stars come out and we feel very close to the Infinite Source. To

image one’s self out in space, like an astronaut, with the 6 directions, with stars

stretching far and still farther, into infinity brings one into touching with Him. This

exercise is called “leis” as one approaches as close to Infinity as possible for a

mortal. To do this exercise while in “the Sacred Crescent” aids psychic

development.

-

It is in this valley that “the new age” psychic power seems to affect one much

more readily. Special psychic awareness centers in the body are awakened. Even

the children speak of having some su’is happening (Suis-psychic). In the Sacred

Crescent there appears to be a constant growth of the Light. Ethe has become finer

and finer. It does not “dance” as before. Working with the plants during the day

aids “patterns of light” -Ethe Journal, a square of Light in the crescent.

of 305

WHAT IS A FAITHIST?A Faithist worships the Creator who is the beginning and source of all things,

the Ever Present, not in the shape of a man, Jehovih, the Almighty.

WHY? — The Creator is the ultimate source of all life and by His presence

within us do we live and breathe.

HOW LONG HAS THE WORSHIP OF THE CREATOR SEEN GOING

ON? — For many thousands of years. Ever since man was brought forth on this

planet, Faithists have worshipped Jehovih.

WHY DON’T MORE PEOPLE KNOW ABOUT THIS? — Faithists have

been persecuted for their belief in and worship of the Creator by those who

worshipped man-made deities. The Faithists have been kept secret from the main

portion of humanity until the present.

WHY ARE PEOPLE HEARING MORE ABOUT FAITHISTS NOW? —

This is a new age for mankind, an age of spiritual responsibility. Men must learn to

live in brotherhood or die out on this planet, destroying the planet in the process.

HOW CAN PEOPLE LIVE IN BROTHERHOOD CONSIDERING ALL

THE DIFFERENT RACES, RELIGIONS, AND POLITICAL SYSTEMS, THE

GREED, VIOLENCE AND WARS? — It can be done if people will turn to their

Creator. The Creator made us all and is present within each one of us. He has beer,

called the still small voice of conscience. That Voice does not have to be small. It

can be made strong by cultivation and the practice of each individual’s highest

inspiration. When each person is attuned to the Creator, each becomes attuned to

every other person on this planet. By doing so we all truly become brothers and

sisters under the fatherhood of Jehovih.

ARE FAITHISTS FOR PEACE? — Yes! Faithists believe that all life is

given by the Creator; all life is sacred. A Faithist will not kill needlessly anything

which breathes the breath of life, not even for food, nor will a Faithist eat that

which others have killed.

of 305

WHAT ABOUT CHRIST? — The religion based On the worship of Christ is

scarcely 2,000 years old. How old is the earth? The best estimate given in the

encyclopedia is between 3,500,000,000 years and 5,500,000,000 years. Do you

think the Creator would do such a Door job as to wait for 3,499,998,000 years to

provide a “Savior” who in 2,000 years could not bring about unity among his

followers nor produce one single community anywhere on earth where there was

no poverty, crime or inequality?

WHY HAVEN’T THE FAITHISTS BROUGHT PEACE? — Faithists do not

seek to convert others. Throughout history they have always been an extremely

small minority. The majority take part in war for the temporary advantage which it

brings to the victor. If they did not, war would not exist. Unless a person truly

desires peace and brotherhood to the extent of actively working for them in

common cause with others, he or she is not a Faithist. The false religions have

gained their converts by preaching that only belief is necessary, or that calling on

the name of this God or that Savior will guarantee a place in heaven. A Faithist

knows that only by personally doing good for others and constantly sitting in

judgment on his own actions can he provide for his spiritual growth on earth, and

after death a continued progress in heaven.

WHAT DOES THAT MEAN, CONTINUED PROGRESS IN HEAVEN? —

Just what it says. Each soul is immortal and survives death, carrying with it the

individuality and personality plus whatever spiritual values and aptitudes it has

attained during life. It continues learning and growing with increasing

responsibilities and commensurate rewards. Just dying doesn’t automatically make

one any better.

WHAT ABOUT HEAVEN AND HELL, WHAT ABOUT THE

JUDGMENT DAY? — Everyone creates his own heaven or hell by his own

actions. Like is drawn to like. If a person is selfish and grasping, indifferent to

other’s needs, he will find himself in the company of others just like himself after

death. The person who is considerate, doing for others those things which make for

harmony and happiness is in the process of creating his own heaven, for his

companions after death will be like himself. Each individual sits in judgment on

himself and where he has failed to do good for others with all his ability and

of 305

wisdom he must make restitution. What could be fairer than asking one to set his

own punishment?

WHAT ARE THE GOALS OF THE FAITHISTS? — First, to worship only

the Ever Present Creator, Jehovih.

Second, to practice peace in brotherhood with all people, reverence for all

life, and to five in communities doing useful work.

Third, to care for and raise abandoned, orphaned or castaway babies to be

peaceful, productive and useful members of society.

Fourth, to take no part in war, nor aid nor abet war in any manner

whatsoever.

Fifth, to take no part in government, nor to establish any form of government.

Jehovih proclaims liberty, more liberty and still more liberty far all men.

Sixth, to add to the sum total of human knowledge in all fields which will

benefit mankind.

Seventh, to show by example that Jehovih is the All Highest, that any man,

woman or child may hear His voice directly, without an intermediary God, Lord or

Saviour; that He is Ever Present with every human soul dwelling on the earth and

in the heavens of the earth; that by attuning ourselves to our Creator we can in truth

establish His Kingdom.

of 305

CHILDREN AND THE WAY OF PEACE

by Peace Pilgrim

I met a couple who were determined that they were going to train their four

children in the way of peace. Every night at dinner they gave a regular sermon on

peace. But one evening I heard the father scream at the older son. The next evening

I heard the older son scream at the younger son in the same tone of voice. What the

parents said hadn’t made any impression at all what they DID was what the

children were following. Implanting spiritual ideas in children is very important.

Many people live their entire lives according to the concepts that are implanted in

them in childhood. When children learn they will get the most attention and love

through doing constructive things, they will tend to stop doing destructive things.

Most important of all, remember that children learn through example. No matter

what you say, it is what you DO that will have an influence on them. This is a very

challenging area for parents. Are you training your children in the way of love

which is the way of the future? It concerns me when I see a small child watching

the hero shoot the villain on television. It is teaching the small child to believe that

shooting people is heroic. The hero just did it and it was effective. It was

acceptable and the hero was well thought of afterward. If enough of us find inner

peace to affect the institution of television, the little child will see the hero

transform the villain and bring him to a good life. He’ll see the hero do something

significant to serve fellow human beings. So little children will get the idea that if

you want to be a hero you must help people.

of 305

THE ORIGINAL OAHSPE MANUSCRIPT LOCATED — SAFE! OAHSPE RESEARCH GROUP Dorothy Wills, Jim Dennon 3676 King

Arthur Drive, 272k Highway 101 North Lexington, Ky, #0503, Seaside, OR 97138

Linda Blazer P.O. Box 3286 Las Cruces, NM 88003

The Oahspe Research Group is pleased to announce that after a century of

false and misleading information about it, the original typewritten and pencil-

drawn OAHSPE manuscript has been located and is in excellent condition at the

university archives where it had been contributed for safekeeping in 1949 (proving

true what Ray Palmer reported about the manuscript in 1974).

The El Paso Women’s Club had donated the Oahspe manuscript to the

Centennial Museum of Texas Western College at El Paso in 1949. It remained in

the museum until September 21st, 1972 when ii was transferred to the Special

Collections Department of the Library, University of Texas at El Paso. By some

quirk, the library cataloged the manuscript under the name of the person who

delivered it, so it became “lost” among their collections and was in a box with no

marking on it to indicate that it contained thee Oahspe manuscript.

Dorothy Wills of the Oahspe Research Group learned where the Oahspe

manuscript was supposed to be from Marjorie Palmer; then found an El Paso

Herald newspaper clipping dated July 28th, 1950 about the manuscript being

donated to the college museum. She began corresponding with the university about

the manuscript in Since then, she and the research group members have been

diligently keeping in touch with college officials and library staff about the

manuscript.

A thorough inventory of the special collections department was begun by the

library staff at the University of Texas at El Paso, which had taken years and is still

in progress. During the course of this inventory, special collections staff found the

original Oahspe manuscript in excellent condition in its box, on Thursday,

February 5th, 1987. Members of the Oahspe Research Group were notified

immediately by letter dated February 6th, 1987.

of 305

The Oahspe manuscript is currently being microfilmed to assure preservation

of its contents for posterity, plus electronic copies are being made. One copy is for

the Rio Grande Historical Collections of the New Mexico State University at Las

Cruces. The Oahspe Research Group is contributing one copy to the Library of

Congress in Washington, D.C. The original of the manuscript will be kept at the

library vault, for safekeeping, at the University of Texas at El Paso. When the

Library of Congress receives their copy, it may be possible to order a microfilm or

electrostatic copy there.

The Oahspe Research Group was formed to collect and preserve the

historical aspects of Oahspe, and is not connected with the religious aspects of the

book.

of 305

THE BIRTH OF JEHOVIH’S KINGDOM ON THE EARTH

by Jahazerah, Son of Jehovih

The birth of Jehovih’s Kingdom on earth is here; The mid-servants are

gathered round. The Ethereans make the way open. The Atmosphereans ready

themselves for a new phase upon the earth. The remains of the old order are

reformed. The carcass of the beast decays and fades in the light of the Kosmon day.

The Matchless Voice has been heard. The Faithists have made their covenant

openly. The light of High Noon is upon the chosen. They go forth to birth the

Kingdom! The Love, Wisdom and Power flourishes. The fruit has grown ripe upon

the vine. The distaste for war increases throughout the world like the taste of

poison to the lips The spirit of cooperation is set in motion. The joy of brotherhood

takes hold like a parent’s strong loving embrace. The birth of Jehovih’s Kingdom

in the flesh of the earth is here. The spirit is set loose from its cage in the heart of

humankind and spreads its wings over the dominions of the earth like a beautiful

white dove. The people go forth to affiliate like new lover. The sore and broken

begins recovery being made whole by Jehovih’s Hand. The pollution is being

driven from the skies and beaten from our waters. The flame of hope has been light

within the children’s hearts and its light can be seen growing in their eyes, the

glory of the Almighty unfolds like a giant pinwheel of jeweled colors. The lasting

romance has begun The hands are lifted in celebration

The kingdom child is coming forth. The colonization of the earth by

Jehovih’s chosen is soon to be underway. The signals have been sent. The signals

have been received. The signals have been understood. The ships are docked. The

boats are going out about the earth to do their labor. The corporeal birth blankets

have been set down. The lines of light have been fastened to their anchorage. The

doctors wash their hands. The nurses prepare the interments of birth. The earth

womb is full and ready. The musicians are tuning up. The dancers stretch. The

singers work the scales. The withering on the vine of the chosen is no more. The

Gods and Goddesses rejoice for the chosen are coming forth in strength and

wholeness. The birth, on earth of Jehovih’s kingdom is here. The God of earth and

her heavens will soon sit on Jehovih’s throne sigh with great relief as a father who

of 305

hears his child has been born quite safe and sound. The windows have been

cleaned. The drapes have been drawn and tied back. The light pours in like a flood

upon a desert. The earth Ma pushes and moans all attending her perform their parts

in divine excellence. They do as if one harmonious symphony of delight. The

Kingdom has come and wails its first breath of life. The limbs are whole. The mind

is bright. The trunk is firm. The chest is strong and glowing with great Naoma’s

love and life

of 305

Faithist Lodge

The Faithist Brotherhood of Light: The Beginning

From Joan Greer

When OAHSPE was published in 1882, Newbrough realized that the people

who read this amazing book would want to get together with others and try to put

into practice its vision of the future as presented in Jehovih’s Kingdom on Earth.

Almost immediately a lodge was formed in New York City. The letters Newbrough

wrote to Andrew Bates in the Boston area have been the source of much we know

about the various lodges that subsequently were formed. These Faithist Lodges met

weekly, worked the Degrees similar to those in the Rites of Emethachavah in the

Book of Saphah, and members became known as First, Second or Third Degree

Members. It appears that Newbrough would be asked to come to a city and meet

with those who wished to form a lodge. He would ask people he already knew in

that city to read through the Prelude and First Degree in Book of Saphah to become

familiar with it. When Newbrough arrived in the city, those wishing to become

Lodge members would meet and discuss the Rites, and then the Prelude and First

Degree would be performed. Thus the new lodge would be considered open.

Newbrough traveled to a number of cities on the East coast establishing lodges, and

we know that in addition to New York City, lodges were active in many cities

including Philadelphia, Boston, Detroit, Cleveland, Chicago and Denver. We know

that there were those who were Rab’bahs of each lodge, and through whom

inspiration flowed. These lodges practiced tithing, and money from the lodges was

sent to Shalam while it was in operation.

When Newbrough passed on, the lodges continued to function. In Denver,

Colorado, a new Lodge organized calling themselves The Brotherhood of Light.

They eventually had to change their name, as another group calling themselves the

Brotherhood of Light formed in Denver shortly after the Faithist Lodge organized.

This second group is still in operation and has Los Angeles as its headquarters. I

have spoken to the Archivist for that group and we both were amazed at the

similarity of the early history of these two Brotherhoods of Light, not only in the

date they formed, but also in the date of their move to Los Angeles. The dates are

of 305

so close, the Archivist though they might actually be the same group. To avoid

confusion we shall call the group that studied OAHSPE the Faithist Brotherhood of

Light. It appears that there was confusion among students of OAHSPE about these

two groups at the time, for in papers of those studying spiritual matters during the

20s and 30s we find literature from this other Brotherhood of Light, which for

clarity we will call the Egyptian Brotherhood of Light. In our brief talk, the

archivist and I found two major differences: one, the Faithist Brotherhood was

dedicated to caring for children, and there is no mention of children in the literature

of the Egyptian Brotherhood of Light; and the second difference was that

Reincarnation is one of the teachings of the Egyptian Brotherhood of Light. The

Egyptian Brotherhood formed in Denver a few months after the Faithist

Brotherhood, and the Egyptian Brotherhood moved to Los Angeles a few months

after the Faithist Brotherhood made their move. One of the things mentioned from

time to time in inspiration of the Faithist Brotherhood is that there was a powerful

movement against their work from dark forces in the lower heavens.

The Faithist Brotherhood was composed of an Inner Council and an Outer

Council. This is the structure that Newbrough outlined as the structure of the

lodges he opened. The Inner Council was composed of those members who lived at

the Children’s Home. The Outer Council was composed of all the groups who

wished to affiliate with the Faithist Brotherhood of Light.

The records of the Faithist Brotherhood indicate that established Faithist

Lodges around the country applied to the Secretary of the Outer Council, Nelson

Standart, to affiliate with the Faithist Brotherhood of Light. These lodges sent

money and goods to the children’s home in Colorado. There is a letter among the

papers of the Faithist Brotherhood from a European man who traveled to Shalam,

only to find the doors had been closed and the children sent to orphanages. This

letter says that Andrew Howland, still living at Shalam, suggested that the man

contact the Faithist Brotherhood of Light and visit them. A copy of their reply is

also among their papers indicating that visitors were not welcome by the Faithist

Brotherhood. From their first months of operation they cared for a number of

children, and worked hard to make their farm self-supporting. They felt they did

not have facilities for visitors.

of 305

The Faithist Brotherhood of Light was formed before the children at Shalam

were sent to orphanages. In their records they indicate that they would only take

infants. This statement appears around the time that the Howlands were seeking

places for the children remaining at Shalam. The Faithist Brotherhood did make

one exception to this rule of only taking infants, as they took a 5 year old girl who

was sent to them through a trance medium. She adjusted well to the group.

The Denver Faithist Brotherhood of Light immediately secured property and

children began to arrive from allover the United States and Canada. From their

records it appears that established Faithist Lodges in Los Angeles, San Francisco

and Chicago, gathered in children in the early months of the operation of the new

organization, and took them to Colorado. As the Faithist Brotherhood of Light

established itself, various Lodges around the United States applied for membership.

An Outer Council soon had stationary with the letterhead indicating that there were

Faithist Lodges in ‘all major cities’ in the United States.

There were two or three Faithist Lodges in the Los Angeles area, one of them

started by Nellie Jones Watson and her husband James Watson in La Cresenta,

California. They had met at Shalam. From the written records we know there was a

group called the Believers in Jehovih (we do not know if this was the same group

as La Cresenta), and an active Lodge in Los Angeles (Wing Anderson was a

member) that functioned into the 1930s. Colorado had at least two lodges in

Denver, and possibly one lodge in Colorado Springs, after the Faithist Brotherhood

moved to California. In addition there were groups of two or three adults raising a

small group of children in various locations around the country.

No records have as yet been found giving the names of all the children and

adults who were at Shalam. We do find in the records of the Faithist Brotherhood

of Light references to individuals with a comment, “ — remembered from Shalam”

— leading the reader to conclude that many associated with this group had been at

Shalam or Levitica.

of 305

It is sad to observe that there are no records indicating that any of the

children raised by these early Faithist groups even carried on the work of helping

other orphans. The Faithist Brotherhood survived the upset of WWl, but the

depression and WW2 seem to mark the end of their work. Upcoming issues of KV2

will have articles with more of the story of this successful endeavor.

of 305

Positioning the Plates in Oahspe

By Robert Bayer (2006).

It would be safe to assume that the plates of the images found in Oahspe

have nearly always struck its readers as quite mysterious. Some of course

are quite clear, for example, showing what the asu race looked like, how

the Temple of Baugh-ghan-ghad appeared 11,000 years ago, or which

Panic symbols are used for the Tablet of Se’moin. Yet so many of the

others seem very difficult to understand, such as Panic, Yi’haic, Vedic,

Hebraic, and Sanscrit Primaries (a non-English language),

Orachnebuahgalah (very complex ideas) or Mathematical Problems

(very complex ideas, AND in a non-English language). Consequently,

many first-time readers of Oahspe may glance over these images, but any

puzzlement seemed best to ignore in order to seek and understand

inspiration from the truly profound spiritual meaning within its text.

The preparation for, channelling, and completion of Oahspe is one of the

great contributions of spiritual light ever made to our world. Therefore, John

Newbrough deserves much appreciation for his extensive efforts. Yet

when Mr. Newbrough completed the editing of Oahspe for its initial

publication, less than perfection was achieved in regard to the 90-some

plate images which were included within its pages. Perhaps this was even

desirable in the eyes of the angels because such imperfections would help

keep Oahspe from becoming “divine and worshipful” to its readers and

followers.

Not immaculate is this Book, Oahspe; but to teach

mortals how to attain to hear the Creator's voice, and to see

His heavens, in full consciousness, whilst still living on the earth; and

to know of a truth the place and condition awaiting them after death.

(Oahspe – Oahspe: 24)

of 305

The issue before the more modern readers such as ourselves, however, is

can we revise some of the errors in editing which Newbrough was not able

to finish in time prior to Oahspe’s initial publication?

Concerning the image plates, the answer should be affirmative. Some

typical errors included the unnecessary duplication of plates (see plates 8,

9, and 12), missing plate numbers, and the hodgepodge combining of

plates (see plates 53 to 55). Nevertheless, the most important need in

connection to the plates is the repositioning of them so that the image is

referenced by a corresponding text. In other words, the plates and text

which go together most closely in meaning, should go together in position

as well. I recall first seeing the The Signature, which was originally placed

at the end of the Book of Fragapatti, and concluded that this image was

the signature of Fragapatti himself. What other reasonable conclusion was

there, since no text anywhere near this plate made the slightest reference

to what was shown in it? My thinking now is that this conclusion is wrong.

It seems fairly obvious that around half of the plates in Oahspe are placed

randomly throughout it. In fact, this might not be so troubling if there were

no text which made reference to these images anyway, however, this is not

the case. There exists text throughout Oahspe which can make some

clarifying reference to virtually every plate. The angels are said to have

placed Newbrough in charge of the editing of Oahspe. It follows that John

Newbrough was naturally anxious to publish Oahspe, the most amazing

book of this age, as soon as possible. Without a computer, it could have

taken at least several years of hard study to have determined the locations.

So Newbrough did the best he could and those he could not locate were

placed throughout the book in a somewhat random fashion.

But now we are blessed with the researching power of computers. A

solution is possible. The problem with having images with no

corresponding text nearby is that Oahspe will thus be more difficult to

understand than it needs to be. In fact, if the text and plates do not match,

of 305

some doubt is cast upon the meaning of the text and often a fair degree of

confusion can be associated with those plates themselves. Conversely,

placing images adjacent to their related text passages should help to further

explain both text and image, as each will provide meaningful context for the

other. The end result should be that Oahspe will become more

comprehensible to its readers.

This study of the plates involved looking for matching ideas or terms

between the text of Oahspe and the plate’s image, its title, and / or its

caption. The guiding principles of my research in determining the best

adjacent position for the plates was to discover text which:

(1.) most fully described the image, title, or captions,

(2.) defined a new spiritual concept at the earliest point,

(3.) was made more comprehensible itself through the study of

the image, or

(4.) was the only existing text with at least some referencing

connections between itself and the plates.

If no corresponding text could be found, such as in The Signature, then the

plate’s position remained where it was. Until a suitable translation of this

plate is discovered or accomplished, no further action can be taken. It is

conceivable that Mai (61) of Se’moin (“a king’s signature”) is the referring

text but what I can translate on my own of this plate points away from this

location. My hunch now is that it may also have been meant to be placed

just before the very first verse of Oahspe, as some characters could be

interpreted as referring to the spiritual light which reveals truth to mankind

on earth. This was the only plate to which I could find no clear reference. I

would be grateful if someone could point me to a translation of it already

written up in a past Faithist publication such as The Faithist Journal,

Kosmon Voice I or Kosmon Unity.

I think you will see in the concluding below that both the text and plate

image make more sense when placed adjacent to one another. The

of 305

complete results of this research can be viewed at this website address in

the files section:

http://groups.yahoo.com/group/oahspefiles5/

I welcome all suggestions and analysis on this project.

If only we could have been there in the early 1880s! Still, we can only be

very grateful and determined to live out the universal truths which the

Creator shares with us through not only Oahspe, but through the cosmos,

and especially within ourselves.

Lastly are provided 6 examples of plates placed more meaningfully

alongside a passage of Oahspe. None of these examples previous had

any referencing text near them. The arrow [ → ] indicates that the plate

image is positioned after the cited text.

Primary Vortex.

The power that maketh planets.

Original Placement:

Ben II: 18→

Proposed Placement:

Jehovih III:6→ For each and every

corporeal world created I a vortex

first, and by its rotation and by the

places in the firmament whither it

traveleth, caused I the vortex to

conceive the corporeal world.

Proposed Placement:

Cycles I: 25-26→Now will I bring the

earth into a'jiyan fields and forests for

a long season; for I shall again

reproduce the I'huans; and the time of

a generation shall be thirty-three years.

For my harvests shall be of fruit that is

of 305

http://groups.yahoo.com/group/oahspefiles5/

The Earth (white spot) in A'ji.

Original Placement:

Ben V: 11→

mature and full of ripeness.

And Jehovih brought the earth into new

regions in the etherean worlds, and

covered it over with a'ji, east and west

and north and south.

Earth and her Plateaux.

When Jehovih condensed the

earth, and it became firm and

crusted over, there rose up

from the earth heat and

moisture, which continue to this

day. But Jehovih limited the

ascent of the substances going

upward, and the boundary of

the limit of moisture was as the

clouds that float in the air; and

the heat was of like ascent.

And whilst the moisture and

heat rise upward, they are met

by the etheric substance of the

vortex of the earth, …(from

caption of plate)

Original Placement:

Ben VIII: 20 →

Proposed Placement:

Jehovih IV: 9-11→ As I cause

water to rise upward as vapor, and

take a place in the air above, let it

be a sign and testimony of other

places in atmospherea whereon

dwell the spirits of the lower

heaven.

As I made a limit to the ascent of

the clouds, so made I a limit to the

places of the different kinds of

substances in atmospherea; the

more subtle and potent to the

extreme, and the more dense and

impotent nearer to the earth.

According to the condition of

these different plateaux in

atmospherea, whether they be

near the earth or high above, so

shall the spirit of man take its

place in the first heaven; according

to his diet and desires and behavior

so shall he dwell in spirit on the

plateau to which he hath adapted

himself during his earth life.

of 305

Outline Map Showing the

Locality of Pan.

Original Placement:

Cosmogony XI:14→

Proposed Placement:

Sethantes II: 27-28→God said:

To each of you have I given a great

division of the earth, and each

division shall be named after

you, each in its place.

This, then, was the rank assigned:

Waga (Pan); Jud (Asia); Thouri

(America); Vohu (Africa); and Dis

(Europe). And the lands were

Called after the names of the Lords

and so entered in the books of

heaven in Hored, by command

of God in the name of Jehovih.

Travel of the great serpent

during the creation. SEVENTH

nine-thousand years after

man’s creation.

Original Placement:

Cosmogony I:15→

Proposed Placement:

Thor I:2-3→In the Holy Council of Gods

and Goddesses in Don'ga, the voice of

Jehovih came to Thor, saying:

My Son, behold the red star, the earth;

she courseth from Mos to Dae, and now

draggeth in the swamps of Asath. Behold,

thou shalt deliver her through thy

dominions, three thousand two-hundred

years. Even now approacheth the dawn

of Ghan.

of 305

Tow’Sang.

Original Placement:

Ben IX:8→

Proposed Placement:

Cosmogony I:33→ The earth's

vortex is a sub-vortex, existing

within the sun's vortex: Mercury,

Venus, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, and

so on, are corporeal worlds, and

each and all of them within

sub-vortices, and the combination

of all these vortices within the

sun's vortex are known by the

names great serpent, or solar

phalanx. For which reason the

sun's vortex was called the

Master, or Tow’Sang, by the

ancient prophets.

of 305

Editorial – 2008 — Kasandra KaresGreetings brothers and sisters, in the Ever-Present Spirit. In the United States,

it is pre-voting time, and each side says he can be President best. As time goes on

they take turns impressing. the public most and either one of them could do the job.

When they started, McCain was asked when an infant has any rights at all and just

when life begins. McCain promptly answered, “At the moment of conception.” He

also said it’s better not to have too much government.

One compares intelligence, and capacity for peace and light. We know

they’re all rascals. We know that mortal intelligence and strategy and leadership

can keep a country out of war. We also know that that is secondary to the presence

of the Ashars, because when Ashars are taken away, it typically leaves a place for

the drujas at which point a country can be plunged immediately into riots.

Followers of the Creator who think they should purify the government or leaven

the whole mass, are told by Ashars to leave it all alone, to just come out of Uz and

be clean, to leave, and let whoever has more faith in Uz than he has in the Creator,

to stay in Uz.

The believer in the Almighty best gets himself into one of the Almighty’s

kingdoms. What’s wrong with government today is that people support their law

makers, who trade in projects and schemes for their own profit and glory. The kind

of government God judges against in Kosmon is the kind where liberty is not

provided to the people. There is good government but man gets it wrong. A good

government is as a father over people and not as a separate matter against them.

Today people are servants supporting their law makers, who trade in projects and

schemes for their own profit and glory. God judges against government in Kosmon

where liberty is not provided to the people. The bad type of government in Kosmon

is the kind where people are servants supporting their law makers who trade in

projects and schemes for their own profit and glory, the kind that neglects to

provide means for development of talents created with all. Better one where there

is wisdom between governments, and people make themselves reciprocal toward

one another and it’s an unselfish government, with affiliation to bring about

reciprocal brotherhoods. Remember that earth affairs, legislations, laws and treaties

of mortal governments, are not of interest only to mortals and that things

of 305

governmental in accomplishment are known and recorded in the heavens of the

Earth. Look to the past, because laws and governments did better and shaped man’s

judgment toward perfecting selves. What is not good for a person is not good for a

nation.

Prophecy: — What will happen In American politics is that the righteous will

be drawn away gradually. Only rogues will eventually accept great office.

Kasandra Kares

The Kosmon Journal, 2008

of 305

The Best of the Faithist Journal - Robert Bayer - Editor

Documents

Transcript of The Best of the Faithist Journal - Robert Bayer - Editor